Read Siemens Energy & Automation -- Specification Guide text version

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

Specification Guide

Siemens Worldwide Siemens is recognized throughout the world as an innovative supplier of quality electrical and electronic products and systems. For 150 years, Siemens technology has laid the groundwork for pioneering achievements in a number of dynamic industries, including: ½ Power Generation and Distribution ½ Factory Automation ½ Information Systems ½ Telecommunications ½ Medical Systems ½ Automotive ½ Electronic Components Siemens Facts ½ Siemens employs about 390,000 people in over 190 countries, with over 50,000 in the US ½ Siemens routinely invests over 10% of total revenues in research and development Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Headquartered in Alpharetta, Georgia, Siemens Energy & Automation is one of the largest manufacturers of electrical distribution equipment, targeting the industrial, construction, utility, and OEM markets. SE&A Facts ½ 27 Manufacturing Facilities ½ Over 100 U.S. Sales Offices ½ Over 3000 Authorized Distributors ½ National Field Service Network The Specification Guide Siemens Energy & Automation brings to market one of the world's most comprehensive lines of electrical distribution equipment in the industry; the goal of this edition of the Specification Guide, is to present an even more efficient, logical, and easy-to-use source of information than in previous editions. These pages are backed by Siemens world-renowned commitment to research, development, engineering innovation, and unparalleled service and support. Table 0.1 Contents

Introduction Section 0 Description Siemens Overview Electrical Power Distribution Total Capability Siemens Product Literature Cross-Reference ACCESSTM System Medium Voltage Switchgear­38kV Medium Voltage Switchgear­5 through 15kV 480V Metal Enclosed Switchgear Power Switching Centers Secondary Unit Substations Sentron Switchboards Commercial Metering Switchboards Sentron Panelboards Sentron Busway, XL-U and XJ-L Busway Systems Transformers Medium Voltage Controllers ­ Series 81000 Motor Control Centers Programmable Controllers AC Controls SB Encased System Breakers Sentron Molded Case Circuit Breakers Enclosed Switches Load Centers Metering Drives Motors Voltage Regulators Technical Training Types of Power Distribution Systems Ground Fault Protection Overcurrent Protection and Coordination Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Technology System Analysis Series-Connected Combination Ratings Harmonics/K-Factor Ratings Codes and Standards Motor Full Load Currents Transformer Full Load Currents Transformer Normal Load/Fault Currents Conductor Ampacities Formulas Grounding Conductors Page 1 2 4 5 19 31 50 69 75 99 145 155 177 225 239 261 281 285 313 326 355 371 375 399 408 412 413 415 418 424 426 429 430 431 433 434 434 435 436 437 437 438

Switchgear Products Engineered Products

Control Products

Circuit Protection Devices Residential Products Other Products and Services

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

General Technical & Application Information

21

Product/Subject Index

LV Switchgear

Secondary-Unit Substations

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

1

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

Electrical Power Distribution Total Capability

General

Using the Guide... The Specification Guide presents product information in the same manner as the flow of power in an electrical distribution system, that is, from the power supply, through distribution, then to the components at the utilization point. There are four organizational tools to help in locating information: ½ Table of Contents (page 1). ½ The total system flow chart on this and facing page -- a quick reference to pages covering particular products. ½ The Product / Subject index found on the last three pages of the catalog. ½ Guide Words at the upper right of each page summarizing the type of information found there. Each section is typically arranged as follows: General and construction details, followed by Technical ratings and data, Dimensional data, and finally, Guide Form Specifications. 2

½ Siemens ACCESSTM System See pages 5­18 for an in-depth discussion of this intelligent software / hardware electrical distribution monitoring and control system. References to ACCESScompatible devices are made throughout the Guide. ½ Measures and Weights All dimensions and weights are expressed in inches and millimeters; pounds and kilograms. They are included for reference purposes only and are not to be used for design or construction purposes.

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

½ Technical Application Information Updated discussions, standards, formulas, and other items of interest begin on page 415.

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

Electrical Power Distribution Total Capability

General

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

3

ACCESS TM Electrical Distribution Communications

General

Siemens ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Communication System centrally monitors and controls an entire electrical distribution system. Engineers, accountants, executives, and technicians can access an almost limitless stream of data -- for troubleshooting, early warning alarms, power quality studies, preventive maintenance, cost allocation, and facilities planning. ACCESS adds a new dimension to managing energy-intensive facilities, allowing identification and correction of potential problems before they cause damage, waste, injury, or downtime. System Overview ACCESS enables users to connect new or retrofitted Siemens intelligent metering and protective devices in switchboards, switchgear, and motor control centers via a twisted pair of wires, in order to "access" critical electrical operating information. ACCESS provides a graphical user interface for viewing and reporting information such as real-time, historical, and min / max data on a desktop computer or field-installed industrial computer. The field device network uses an industrystandard RS-485 twisted pair, which has galvanic isolation of up to 500 volts. Siemens "SEAbus" communications protocol is utilized on the RS-485 high speed LAN. SEAbus is an open protocol with complete documentation allowing users to integrate Siemens devices directly into other customized communications systems. Siemens ACCESS Electrical Distribution Communications System meets ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1, C37.90.2, and RFI / EMI 6241 specifications.

Primary Functions

½ Reducing costly down time by identifying system problems well in advance of tripping. ½ Providing data for more efficient allocation of power usage cost, and providing accurate verification of utility billing. ½ Identifying and controlling peak power demand. Allowing actions such as load shedding, changes in billing structure from the utility, or other remedial steps to minimize power cost. ½ Providing data to plan substation expansion needs, such as the ability to know steady-state and momentary percentage of capacity for all breakers and transformers. ½ Providing data that allows the user to analyze the quality of power, such as harmonics and disturbances (surges and sags), and this data can be used for diagnostics, reporting, or other tracking purposes.

1

Look For This Symbol...

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Comm.

Throughout this catalog, this symbol will appear with products which tie into the ACCESSTM system. Page numbers will refer you back to this section for specific information regarding ACCESS compatibility and specifications, if applicable.

ACCESS-Compatible Devices From Siemens

Table 1.1 below lists Siemens devices which are ACCESS "savvy," and also shows where detailed information on each device may be found -- both in this section and elsewhere in the Specification Guide. Table 1.1

Category

ACCESS Field Level Device Cross Reference

Model Static Trip® IIIC/IIICP/IIICPX--LV Power Breakers Type SB Encased Systems Breakers SB Energy Communicating Trip Unit Sensitrip® III--Molded Case Circuit Breakers ISGS Protective Relay 4300TM, 4700TM, and 4720TM Power Meters SAMMS-LVTM SAMMS-MVTM S7-I/O Spec Guide Page Reference This Section Elsewhere 13 63 14 313 15 319 15 329 13 ­ 12 ­ 13 265 13 244 13 ­

Protective Relays and Trip Units

Metering Motor Protection and Control Relays I/O Devices

CSI Section 16920

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

5

ACCESS TM Electrical Distribution Communications

Software

1

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Comm. SIEServeTM Monitoring Software SIEServe is a WindowsTM-based application designed to retrieve and display realtime data from Siemens power meters, trip units, and relays. It provides a simple means for monitoring an electrical distribution system from a local or remote personal computer. SIEServe interrogates each communicating device connected and continually updates the SIEServe device data displays. SIEServe can forward real-time power system data via Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) to remote DDE-aware applications for trending, reporting or charting. Each instance of SIEServe running can monitor up to 128 ACCESS-compatible devices on RS-485 LANs utilizing direct connect, or modem connect serial communications and the Siemens Isolated Multi-DropTM Converter. WinPM offers device configuration, userdefined trends that can be saved to disk as "snapshots," alarm logging, event logging, waveform capture, harmonic analysis, and manual control. In addition, WinPM offers real-time and min / max data display capability. Standard and custom reports are available for hard copy output. WinPM communicates with ACCESScompatible devices through a PC's standard RS-232 serial communication port. An Isolated Multi-DropTM Converter is required for each group of 128 devices to convert device RS-485 communications to the computer RS-232 serial port. Network capabilities allow multiple copies of WinPM to be linked together via TCP / IP. WinPM is also a Windows DDE (dynamic data exchange) client / server, allowing links from and to other Windows applications. WinPM displays device and system data in useful formats, including the following: ½ Device Data: Displays all real-time detailed device data available from each field device including configuration and software version. Data is displayed in user-defined screens and system diagrams. ½ Min / Max Data: Logs minimum and maximum values for each measured parameter of each field device including date and time stamps.

General

½ Alarms: Maintains a separate alarm log for recording out-of-limit active user-defined alarms. Alarms can be configured to enable an audible alarm or a popup window display, notify a pager, control outputs, and log timestamped alarm information. ½ Event Log: Records all power-up, user log in, out-of-limit, pickup, alarm, and trip events with date and time stamps. ½ Snapshot Log: Captures and displays user-defined trends of any parameter from any device using WinPM's Snapshot Log feature. The Snapshot Log is updated in preset user-defined time intervals. ½ Waveform Capture and THD%: Captures and displays current and voltage waveforms, as well as harmonic content (THD) values for each harmonic, from compatible devices including the 4700 and 4720 power meters, and the SB Energy Communicating Trip Unit. Neutral current input and auxiliary voltage can also be captured. ½ Discrete Inputs: Display status (ON / OFF) of discrete inputs from field devices, such as the S7-I / O Addressable Relay. Discrete input status changes can initiate visual and audible alarms, be recorded in the event log, and provide external alarm output.

Example SIEServeTM Screen

SIEServe is DDE-compatible with spreadsheet and word processing software, including Microsoft® Excel, Microsoft Word, Wonderware® IntouchTM, WinCC, and others. SIEServe supports all current ACCESS field devices including: ½ 4300, 4700, and 4720 Power Meters ½ SAMMSTM Motor Protection and Control Relays --SAMMS-LVTM for Low Voltage Motors --SAMMS-MVTM for Medium Voltage Motors ½ S7-I / O Addressable Relay ½ Pulse Reading Meter ½ STIIIC / CP / CPX Static Trip® Units ½ SB and Sensitrip IIITM Trip Units ½ ISGS, 7SA511, and 7UT512 Protective Relays WinPMTM Software WinPM is a WindowsTM-based application for monitoring and control of all Siemens ACCESS field devices, Siemens protective relays, and other field devices.

Example WinPMTM Snapshot Screen

8

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16920

ACCESS TM Electrical Distribution Communications

Software

WinPM Configuration Capability ½ Devices: Users can configure field devices over the communication bus or network from a centrally located computer, including basic setup (baud rate, address, name), and detailed protective setup, such as voltage and amperage scales. The input scaling feature allows users to scale values from any device by either a multiplication factor and / or an offset value. ½ System Diagrams: System diagrams are custom diagrams which graphically display the layout of the user's site. Once device is configured in WinPM, its real-time data can be animated and added to custom system diagrams. The user can also create a Run button within diagrams that will run other Windows applications when selected. ½ Alarm Limits: Users can program alarm limits into WinPM for measured field device parameters. Over, under, equal to, not equal to, and change setpoint alarms are available as well as device discrete input status alarms. Alarms can be configured to enable an audible alarm or a popup window display, notify a pager, control outputs, and log time-stamped alarm information. For the 4700 and 4270 power meters, the user can set up WinPM to automatically clear the kWh, kVARh, and kVAh when an alarm has been activated. ½ WinPM supports all current ACCESS field devices and other ACCESScompatible devices including: -- 4300 Power Meters -- 4700 Power Meters -- 4720 Power Meters -- Pulse Reading Meter -- SAMMSTM Motor Protection and Control Relays (SAMMS-1, 2, 3; SAMMS-LV for Low Voltage Motors; SAMMS-MV for Medium Voltage Motors) -- STIIIC / CP / CPX Static Trip Units -- SB and Sensitrip IIITM Trip Units -- SentronTM Systems Breaker Energy Communicating Trip Unit -- ACCESS I / O Addressable Relays -- S7-I / O Addressable Relay -- SCOR Overcurrent Relays -- ISGS Relay -- 7SA511 Numerical Line Protection Relay -- 7SJ511 Numerical Overcurrent Time Protection Relay -- 7SJ512 Numerical Overcurrent Protection Relay -- 7UT512 Numerical Differential Protection Relay

General 1

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Comm.

Example WinPMTM System Diagram Screen

Table 1.2

ACCESSTM Software Capabilities

SIEServeTM Windows 3.11, 95/98, NT 4.0 128 WinPMTM Windows 95/98, NT 4.0 Unlimited

Software Feature Operating System Maximum No. of Devices Password Protection Real-time Data Display Min/Max Data Retrieval Discrete Input Status Waveform Capture Event Logging Device Configuration Clearing Device Data Pickup Information Manual Control Alarm Configuring Alarm Logging Printing Data/Reports Trending Capability One-line Diagrams Custom Diagrams Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) Networking Capability PLC Integration Third Party Devices Interface to Other System

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

(Data only)

-- -- --

(Net DDE only)

(DDE only) (DDE only) (DDE only)

-- -- --

CSI Section 16920

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

9

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Communications

Hardware

1

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Comm. Siemens manufactures a complete family of industrial computers and programmable controllers for use in the ACCESS system, as well as for other applications. Siemens Industrial Computers are configurable to fit specific requirements. All Industrial Computers have passive back planes and use slot CPUs for easy upgrades and fast service. Rugged chassis design and shock mounted drives are standard on all models. All units have built-in diagnostics for CPU scan, voltage monitoring, and internal temperature monitoring with relay outputs for detected problems. Siemens can also provide desktop and laptop computers for nonindustrial type applications. Industrial Personal Computer The Siemens Industrial Personal Computer (PC) is designed for mounting in the face of electrical equipment, or for wall mounting. The Industrial PC was designed specifically for use in harsh environments where space is limited. The flat screen monitor -- 10.4 inch (264 mm) Active Color LCD, full keypad, PS / 2 mouse, hard drive, and 3.5 inch floppy disk drive are all contained in one unit. The Industrial PC has a 3ISA / 1 PCI slot back plane (3/4 length), with 586 / 133MHz CPU and 16 MB RAM. Hard disk options are available to 850 MB. The 3.5 inch floppy disk drive is standard. The Industrial PC is an excellent choice for running ACCESS software local to the equipment or in a control room.

General

Siemens Multiplexer Translator Connected to (clockwise from upper left) Static Trip III, SB Breaker, Sensitrip III Breaker, SAMMS-LV Motor Control Relay

Isolated Multi-DropTM Converter

Isolated Multi-DropTM Converter Siemens Isolated Multi-Drop is a four channel, industrially hardened, RS-232 to RS-485 converter that provides the connection between a computer's serial port

and a Siemens SEAbus RS-485 communications loop for ACCESS field devices. Once installed, the converter allows software such as SIEServe or WinPM to communicate with any of the connected ACCESS components. The unit has four RS-485 ports that can support 32 devices each, for a total of 128 devices. In addition, the converter offers a convenient 15 volts DC power supply which can be used for communications to the SAMMS and STIIIC / CP / CPX Static Trip devices. A 120 volts AC or 125 volts DC power source is required for the converter itself. The Multi-Drop protects the computer from potentially dangerous field device voltages through opto-isolators located between the RS-232 and RS-485 interfaces. To isolate the PC further, the con-

verter is equipped with high-energy surge suppression per ANSI standard C62.41. Multiplexer Translator The Multiplexer Translator (MT-A) is a microprocessor-controlled device used for communications with Sensitrip® III Molded Case and SB Encased Systems Breakers on the ACCESS network. Each MT-A can support up to eight circuit breakers. Ground fault interlocking, short time interlocking, both, or neither are individually programmable for each circuit breaker in the network. Table 1.3 gives hardware system recommendations for the ACCESS software packages described earlier.

10

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16920

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Communications

Hardware

General

DTU3005 The DTU3005 intelligent data transfer device is designed as a low cost solution for transferring data from Siemens devices to systems that have other manufacturer's PLCs as data gathering devices. Real-time data can be transferred from Siemens ACCESS devices to any Modbus RTU / ASCII or Profibus DP supervisory software applications, or to other supervisory PLCs. In addition to these capabilities, the DTU3005 can also communicate simultaneously to Siemens WinPMTM software via a Passthrough port. Minimal programming is required on both the DTU3005 and the PLC to monitor and / or control the field devices. Up to 32 DTU's can be daisy chained together, and each DTU can be connected up to 32 ACCESS devices. The ACCESS devices supported by the DTU3005 include: ½ Power Meters: 4300, 4700, 4720. ½ Trip Devices: Static Trip III trip device for low voltage switchgear, Sensitrip® EC trip units for SB circuit breakers on low voltage switchboards, ISGSTM protective relays for medium voltage switchgear. ½ Motor Protection Relays: SAMMS-LV motor protection devices for low voltage MCC, SAMMS-MV motor protection devices for medium voltage controllers. ½ Input / Output Devices: S7-I / O Addressable relays. Although the DTU3005 is not a protocol converter, each model does allow data to be transferred from a SEAbus device to a PLC or supervisory system. The DTU3005-B can interface to multiple types of PLCs manufactured by several different vendors. In the PLC to SEAbus configuration, the unit transfers data directly to the PLC. Dual Passthrough configuration allows connectivity to two supervisory SEAbus applications, such as two copies of Siemens WinPMTM software. In the Modbus Master to SEAbus configuration, the unit acts as an addressable Modbus RTU / ASCII slave device. The DTU3005-P unit utilizies SEAbus to Profibus DP configuration, wherein the unit acts as a Profibus DP slave.

1

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Comm.

DTU3005

Table 1.3

Recommended ACCESSTM Computer Hardware

SIEServeTM Software (PC) 486 Minimum 33 MHz 8 MB 20 MB 3.5" 1.44 MB P/S 2 Style Mouse Standard VGA minimum Optional--any WindowsTM Supported Printer WinPMTM Software (PC) 486 Minimum 66 MHz 16 MB 20 MB 3.5" 1.44 MB P/S 2 Style Mouse Standard VGA minimum Optional--any WindowsTM Supported Printer

Hardware Feature Central Processing Unit Processor Speed Random Access Memory Disk Space Required Floppy Drive Mouse Type Serial COM Port Video Monitor Type Printer Type

CSI Section 16920

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

11

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Communications

Field Level Devices

1

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Comm. At the foundation of the Siemens ACCESS system are intelligent field devices. In addition to their primary functions of overcurrent protection and metering, each of these devices has RS-485 communication capability to transmit valuable power system measurements out onto the ACCESS network, and to receive commands -- open, close, trip, start, stop, etc. Power Meters Siemens 4300TM, 4700TM, and 4720TM digital power meters are designed for high accuracy metering of power distribution systems. Built for use in industrial environments, the rugged microprocessor-based technology meets ANSI / IEEE C37 requirements for radio frequency interference (RFI), surge withstand, and fast transient tests. All meters comply with FCC / DOC emissions standards, are UL and CSA certified, and are fully integrated with Siemens WinPMTM software. 4300TM Power Meter Designed with retrofit applications in mind, Siemens 4300 meter helps businesses satisfy basic monitoring and communications needs by combining digital metering technology with Siemens advanced communications capabilities. The 4300 meter is a three phase, rms sensing power meter with a 20 character LCD which shows multiple measurements simultaneously. The standard meter offers open protocol communications through an optically isolated RS-485 port. The unique two module design and the standard 4.5 inch (114 mm) ANSI C39.1 mounting make the 4300 meter ideal for retrofit and analog replacement. The 4300 can be applied up to 1,000 kV and 10,000A circuits. 4700TM Power Meter Siemens 4700 digital power meter provides the industry's highest level of monitoring, combining numerous traditional analog meter functions into a compact and easy-to-use package. In addition to enhancing metering capabilities, the 16bit microprocessor of the 4700 calculates and records min / max meter values and waveform capture. An extended snapshot memory further increases power system analysis capabilities. The 4700 offers four discrete inputs that can be used to monitor transformer sudden pressure and temperature alarms, as well as to serve as a counter of circuit breaker operations or utility kWH pulses. One of the discrete inputs may be used for synchronizing the 4700's internal kW demand period with an external utility billing meter pulse. With three form-C output relay contacts, the 4700's application can be extended to alarming, load shedding, or breaker tripping functions. Each relay can be set to activate or release on programmable threshold and time delay values for any of the metered parameters. These relays can also be manually controlled via the communications system. The waveform capture feature allows high speed sampling of any of the four voltage or four current inputs. The meter stores 128 samples per cycle, allowing PC-based power monitoring software to display the sampled input and calculate the harmonic content up to the 63rd harmonic. Waveform capture is activated

General

through commands on the communications port. The Siemens 4700 ability to provide analog output to systems such as SCADA, programmable logic controllers and distributed control systems replaces the need for an external transducer. 4720TM Power Meter The 4720 power meter answers the everincreasing concern for "clean," reliable power by integrating the many critical aspects of power metering, power quality analysis, and control into one simple and economical instrument. In addition to the metering capabilities of the 4700 power meter, the 4720 provides on-board THD calculations, disturbance capturing (i.e., waveform recording), predicted demand, and increased memory. The standard 4720 power meter provides three form-C output control relays (10 A), four digital inputs, one analog voltage input, and one analog current output (0-20 mA or 4-20 mA). The three-phase, rms sensing 4720 power meter offers over 300 high-accuracy measurements, onboard harmonic analysis, high-speed waveform capture, digital waveform recording, and a high-speed setpoint control system. Measured values include current per phase and neutral, voltage line-toline and line-to-neutral per phase, frequency, power factor per phase, kW, kVAR and kVA per phase, kWHr, kVARHr and kVAHr per phase, Amps demand, kW demand and predicted kW demand per phase.

4720TM Power Meter

4300TM Power Meter Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

12

CSI Section 16920

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Communications

Field Level Devices

SAMMS-LVTM and SAMMS-MVTM Motor Protection and Control Relays The Siemens Advanced Motor Master System (SAMMSTM) is a solid-state overload relay with integrated control logic and advanced motor protection. The SAMMS-LV relay is designed specifically for low voltage applications (NEMA Size 6 Max) while SAMMS-MV is designed for protection of medium voltage machines. The SAMMS devices utilize a current sensor to obtain rms current measurements; these are used in conjunction with user-programmed full load amperes, service factor, and trip class to provide overload protection ± 5% accurate. Modifying protective settings and extracting valuable statistical data are both accomplished with a plug-in hand-held communicator. Advanced motor protection capabilities of SAMMS include phase unbalance protection, process current warning, jam protection, loss of load protection, and optional ground fault protection. SAMMS also supports RS-485 open protocol communications via an optional communications module. The SAMMS Motor Relay is UL recognized. Measured and communicated values of the SAMMS relay include phase currents, trip current, average current, percentage current unbalance, elapsed time, number of starts, number of trips, and motor winding temperature. of inputs or outputs the S7-I / O device can monitor and control. Each discrete expansion I / O module containing 8 inputs or 8 outputs can be added to the base unit. A maximum of 5 expansion modules can be connected to each base unit. Counters on the first 8 discrete inputs of the base unit allow the S7-I / O to track breaker or starter operations or count the pulsed output from a kWhr meter. As part of the ACCESS communications system, the S7-I / O has a digital address and is polled on a regular schedule by a supervisory computer. The supervisory equipment can either be a host computer, a PC, a PLC or other compatible supervisory device. Siemens WinPMTM software is used to configure and control the S7-I / O. Features include control power options of 120 / 240 VAC or 24 VDC, analog input capability (blocks of 3 up to a total of 12 inputs), on board control power for expansion modules, and relay contact outputs that can be manually controlled. Inputs can be dry contacts; signal voltage is provided through the internal power supply. The digital states on outputs can be pulsed or latched -- pulsed outputs, typically through an interposing relay, can be used for breaker operation control. Typical applications of the S7-I / O addressable relay include monitoring transformer temperature relays and circuit breaker status (open or closed). The outputs can be used to close contactors, trip circuit breakers, provide remote indication of an event, or to communicate various levels of alarming to plant personnel. Static Trip® III / IIIC / IIICP / IIICPX The Static Trip III devices are microprocessor controlled, rms sensing overcurrent protective relays for use in low voltage switchgear. STIII trip units provide front panel selectivity for overcurrent protection (Long Time, Short Time, Ground, Instantaneous) with pick-up LED's and LCD trip target indicator. Optional features available on the STIII include serial communications, power metering, protective relaying, and local display. Zone interlocking is standard on trip units provided with short time or ground fault protection. The STIII family consists of four models: ½ STIII Basic Overcurrent Protection ½ STIIIC Added Communications and Current Metering ½ STIIICP Added Power Metering ½ STIIICPX Added Protective Relaying

General 1

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Comm.

Static Trip® III with Breaker Display Unit

SAMMS-LVTM Motor Protection and Control Relay

S7-I / O Addressable Relay Siemens S7-I / O (input / output) addressable relay can remotely monitor any device equipped with an auxiliary contact, and thus monitor or control power system elements that are not specifically designed for digital communications. The basic S7-I / O allows up to 14 digital inputs and 10 outputs. Two models of the S7-I / O base module are available: one with AC control power, relay outputs, and type 1 sinking DC inputs, and one with DC control power, sourcing transistor outputs, and type 1 sinking DC inputs. Expansion modules increase the number

An optional local Breaker Display Unit (BDU) can be added to communicating trip units. The BDU mounts on the face of the breaker and displays real-time measurements, trip log, event log, and min / max values. The BDU also allows viewing and modifying the STIII configuration. A standard feature of the STIIIC / CP / CPX models is an alarm output. Any of the trip unit's measured parameters may be set to activate the alarm, based on programmed threshold and delay. The alarm output is a 100mA 12 volt signal which requires an additional interposing relay to provide a normally open dry contact closure. Models STIIIC and STIIICP provide accurate metering as an integral part of the trip unit. The same current sensors used for overcurrent protection are also used for metering. In addition, special potential transformer modules mount on the drawout breaker. Metered parameters can be displayed locally with the BDU, or displayed remotely via the RS-485 communications port. Measured and communicated values of the STIIIC include phase, neutral, and ground currents. The STIIICP adds power metering including line and phase voltages, real power, reactive power, apparent power, energy (real and reactive, forward and reverse), power factor, and frequency. All metered values are accurate to ±1% at full scale. An event log, trip log, and min / max data are also available from communicating STIII trip units. ISGSTM Protective Relay The Intelligent Switchgear Systems (ISGSTM) from Siemens is a high speed, numerical, multifunctional protection relay. This combined metering and protection package has been designed for integration into a computer monitored medium voltage switchgear. The ISGS

CSI Section 16920

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

13

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Communications

Field Level Devices

1

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Comm. ISGSTM Protective Relay (Cont'd) relay is designed in accordance with ANSI / IEEE C37 .90 and IEC 255-4 standards. The M1 size case houses the withdrawable element for quick and easy maintenance; the dust-tight front cover is suitable for mounting on the low voltage compartment or on relay panels. The RS232 communications port on the front of the ISGS relay allows connection of a portable computer for local access to all parameter settings and oscillatory waveform fault recordings. In addition, the relay can be ordered with a rear network RS-485 port for multi-drop topology. The ISGS relay unit provides protection, metering, control, and monitoring. The relay requires three phase current transformer inputs and one ground transformer input; residual ground sensing without a CT is also an option. Two breaker tripping contacts and one relay disabled alarm contact are provided. The base unit provides protective functions for instantaneous Phase Overcurrent (50), Instantaneous Neutral or Ground Overcurrent (50N), Phase Time Overcurrent (51), and Neutral or Ground Time Overcurrent (51N), with nine selectable ANSI time overcurrent curves and one custom user definable curve. An event log, trip log, min / max log, and waveform capture capabilities, as well as Breaker Failure (50BF) protection, are also provided in the base unit. The optional configurations that can be added to the ISGS relay base unit are as follows: Metering: This option requires three inputs for the connection of Voltage Transformers, extending the metering capabilities to provide rms and average rms voltages, active and apparent power, kilowatt demand and kilowatt demand hours, power factor, and frequency. The installation of the voltage input card also provides for protective functions High-Set Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent (50 HS) and High-Set Instantaneous Neutral or Ground Overcurrent (50 HSN). Additional Protective Functions: Under / Overvoltage (27 / 59), Phase Sequence Voltage (47), Negative Sequence Voltage (47N), Directional Time Overcurrent (67 / 67 / N), and Over / Underfrequency (81U / O) can be provided when this option is selected. Communications: In addition to the standard RS-232 port, an RS-485 rear communications port can be added to the base unit to allow for networked or

General

ISGSTM Protective Relay remote modem communications and control. The relay is designed to operate in the ACCESSTM system with Siemens WinPMTM software. ISGSTM WisdomTM Software The ISGSTM relay can be completely set up and configured using the front panel keypad. Alternatively, the free WisdomTM software program can save time and effort by allowing the user to configure the relay, read the metered values, and retrieve the stored data. Wisdom is a Microsoft® WindowsTM based tool that is very user friendly and includes an integrated help file. The software has a Demo Mode feature, enabling the operator to configure the relay settings, store the configuration data to a file, and download the data later at the substation -- as a result, this feature can greatly reduce the on-site service time. The capability to monitor and have breaker control over a network also makes this software very beneficial to the customer. SB Encased Systems Breaker Trip Unit The Siemens SB Breaker has characteristics of both molded case breakers and low voltage switchgear breakers. It has high interrupting capabilities as well as extended short-time delay tripping. It may be applied in situations ranging from 100 to 4,000 amperes at system voltages through 600 volts AC by using interchangeable rating plugs and continuous current adjustment. The SB trip unit provides fully adjustable settings for continuous current limits, long-time delay, shorttime pickup, short-time delay, instantaneous pickup, ground fault pickup, and ground fault delay. The microprocessor based trip unit for the SB breaker has communications capability when provided with an expansion plug and connected to a Multiplexer Translator. Measured and communicated values include rms phase currents, pick-up status, and communications status.

14

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16920

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Communications

Field Level Devices

Table 1.4 SB Energy-Comm Unit Features by Model Type

SBxxTP01 SBxxTP01G SBxxTP02 SBxxTP02G Feature Protection Functions Long Time, Short Time, Instantaneous Metering Functions Volts, Amps, VARs, VA, Demand Communications EIA-232, ACCESS, Zone Selective Interlock Operations Operations Counter, Fault Counter Security Password Protection Event Log Time-Stamped History of 10 Most Recent Events Trip Log Time-Stamped History of 5 Most Recent Trips Alarms Overcurrent, Over kW, Under PF Advanced Alarms Harmonics, etc. Min/Max Logs Per Phase Amps and Volts, Power, PF, Frequency, THD Harmonic Analysis Per Phase Protective Relay Functions Current / Voltage Unbalance, Over / Undervoltage Ground Fault Protection Residual or Ground Return

General 1

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Comm.

-- -- -- -- --

-- -- -- --

--

SentronTM Systems Breaker Energy Communicating Trip Unit

SentronTM Systems Breaker Energy Communicating Trip Unit The SentronTM Systems Breaker Energy Communicating Trip Unit (SB EnergyComm) is a microprocessor-controlled protection and metering device for application with Siemens' family of SB Encased Systems Breakers. This highperformance device integrates metering and ACCESSTM communications capabilities with overcurrent protective functions. When installed as part of the ACCESS system, the SB Energy-Comm unit derives current data from current transformers (CTs) mounted in the Siemens SB circuit breaker. As passive devices, the SB circuit breakers provide high reliability with minimum signal error, while also providing power for the trip unit's circuit protection functions. The current signals from the CTs are converted to digital values in the trip unit. These values are then stored in memory and are used by the microprocessor to detect and process overcurrent conditions. The SB Energy-Comm trip unit is designed as a plug-in unit to mount directly into an SB circuit breaker frame, and it can use field interchangeable rating plugs. These rating plugs allow the ampere rating of the circuit breaker to be changed to meet specific applications.

The keypad, display LCD, and LED indicators on the front panel of the device provide the user with direct access to device data and settings. Both real-time and accumulated data are available, in addition to current and voltage waveforms. Four models of the SB Energy-Comm trip unit are available as described in Table 1.4. The "xx" in the model number denotes the breaker's current transformer rating (In). Sensitrip® III Trip Unit The Sensitrip III trip device provides microprocessor-based selective overcurrent protection for Siemens SentronTM Series Digital Molded Case Circuit Breakers. The trip unit provides fully adjustable settings for continuous current limits, long-time delay, short-time pickup, short-time delay, instantaneous pickup, ground fault pickup, and ground fault delay. In addition, the Sensitrip III has communications capability when provided with an expansion plug and connected to a Multiplexer Translator. Measured and communicated values include rms phase currents, pick-up status, and communications status.

CSI Section 16920

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

15

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Overview

Siemens GM 5kV, 7.2kV and 15kV metalclad power switchgear assemblies with horizontal drawout type GMI vacuum circuit breakers take advantage of the latest developments in vacuum interrupter technology. Up to two circuit breakers can be stacked in a single vertical section, allowing significant space savings. The equipment meets or exceeds the latest standards of ANSI, IEEE, and NEMA. UL Listing is available where the arrangement allows. GM switchgear is widely used in industrial plants, commercial buildings, electric utility systems, cogeneration installations, and other electrical systems. It is commonly used for protection and switching of transformers, motors, generators, capacitors, buses, distribution feeder lines, and, in general, for protection of any medium voltage power circuit. Siemens' experience gained in nearly 70 years of supplying metal-clad switchgear in the U.S.A. has been captured in the GM design. The objective has been to incorporate features designed to provide safety, while simplifying operations, maintenance, and minimizing installation cost. The switchgear structure and the drawout vacuum circuit breaker are an integrated design, with dielectric, thermal, and interruption integrity built directly into the basic design, not added as an afterthought. Siemens Vacuum Interrupters The vacuum interrupters used in the GMI circuit breaker are manufactured by Siemens and have been proven in thousands of installations since 1976. The chrome-copper contact design used in these interrupters assures low chopping levels, eliminating the need for surge protection on most circuits. Front Mounted Operating Mechanism The simple GMI operating mechanism makes maintenance and inspection easy. The mechanism is located on the front of the circuit breaker, rather than underneath.

General

Five Year Maintenance Interval If applied under ANSI "usual service" conditions, maintenance is only needed at 5 year intervals. Floor Rollout No lift truck or dolly is needed to insert or remove circuit breakers in the lower cell of indoor or Shelter-Clad installations since floor rollout convenience is standard for GMI breakers. "Universal" Spare Breaker The physical configuration and interlock logic allow the use of a single circuit breaker to serve as a "universal" spare breaker at an installation site. The interlock logic checks the four principal rating characteristics (continuous current, maximum voltage, interrupting current, and close and latch current), and allows a circuit breaker to be inserted in a breaker cell, provided that the breaker equals or exceeds the ratings required by the cell.

Single Source Responsibility Single source responsibility is assured since the complete equipment is designed, manufactured, and tested in a single facility. Full ANSI Design Background Full design integrity is assured. ANSI C37.09 and C37.20.2 require design tests on circuit breakers and structures together. Since both the structures and the circuit breakers are produced in a single facility, Siemens controls the entire product, from design concept to production. Records are maintained to document compliance with ANSI standards. UL Listing Available Where the arrangement of components allows, UL Listing is available.

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

The vacuum circuit breakers are checked in the switchgear cells as part of production testing, and shipped in the switchgear to assure interchangeability and reduce possibility of damage to circuit breakers in shipment.

CSI Section 16320

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

31

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Overview

General

Breaker Interchangeability The GM switchgear cubicle and the removable GMI circuit breaker element are both built to master fixtures so circuit breakers of the same ratings are interchangeable with each other even if the breaker is required for use with a cell with "provisions only" supplied years earlier. A circuit breaker of higher rating can be used in a cell of equal or lower rating, i.e. a 3000A circuit breaker can be used in a 1200A cell. Tested to ANSI Standards Siemens GM switchgear is tested to meet the requirements of ANSI standards. A complete design test program, including short circuit interruption, load current switching, continuous current, mechanical endurance, close and latch current, short time and momentary withstand, impulse withstand, and the other tests required by the standards has been successfully completed. These tests encompass the complete equipment design, including both the switchgear structure and the circuit breaker removable element. Production tests to ANSI standards are performed on every group of switchgear and on each circuit breaker. Certified copies of all test data can be furnished to customers upon request. UL Listing Available When specified, if the component configuration allows, the switchgear can be provided with the UL listed label, indicating conformance to the requirements of ANSI C37.54 and C37.55.

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

Structural Flexibility Siemens GM metal-clad switchgear provides enhanced flexibility in locating circuit breaker, auxiliary, and metering cells within the structure layout. Circuit breakers rated 1200 amperes and 2000 amperes may be located in upper or lower cell positions, to a maximum main bus self cooled limit of 4000 amperes per vertical section. Bus sectionalizing (tie) circuit breaker cells may be located on the upper or lower levels and are ordinarily located next to an auxiliary cell on the same level to accommodate transition bus work. 3000 ampere circuit breakers can be located either in the bottom cell or the top cell of a vertical section. If the 3000 ampere circuit breaker is located in the lower cell, the upper cell can be used for metering devices only. If the 3000 ampere circuit breaker is in the upper cell, the lower cell may be used to house a set of drawout voltage transformers. The 3000 ampere circuit breaker can be used for 4000 amperes continuous, with the addition of fan cooling equipment in the auxiliary cell above the circuit breaker. This application is well suited if loads above 3000 amperes are infrequent, as

for example, in the case of a fan cooled rating on a power transformer. Each vertical section contains a main bus bar compartment and two cells for auxiliary devices and / or circuit breakers, including primary and secondary disconnects, instrument transformers, instruments and relays, secondary wiring, and other components as necessary. The switchgear is normally designed so that additional vertical sections may be added in the future. Enclosure Design The GM design includes full ANSI C37.20.2 Metal-Clad construction. This means complete enclosure of all live parts and separation of major portions of the circuit to retard the spread of faults to other compartments. Removable plates permit access to all compartments. The rear panels are individually removabIe to access to either downfeed or upfeed cables. Sheet steel inter-unit barriers extend the full height and depth of each vertical section for isolating adjacent sections. The ground bus extends the entire length of the complete switchgear lineup, and to all circuit breaker cells.

Upper Cell Breaker Being Racked Out with Door Closed

32

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16320

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Construction Details

Switchgear Compartments

Vacuum Circuit Breaker Cell The circuit breaker cell is a bolted, reinforced, sheet steel enclosure, with provisions for a type GMI vacuum circuit breaker. It includes a hinged front door, inter-compartment and inter-unit barriers, primary and secondary disconnects, automatic shutters, racking mechanism, interlocks, instruments and relays, control wiring and devices, and current transformers. Vacuum Circuit Breaker Element -- The GMI vacuum circuit breaker includes a stored energy operating mechanism, primary and secondary disconnects, automatic shatters, auxiliary switches, ground contact, control wiring, and interlocks. Auxiliary Cell -- An auxiliary cell is similar to a circuit breaker cell, except without provisions for a circuit breaker. Space may be used for VTs, CPTs and fuses, batteries, chargers, and other auxiliary devices. Bus Compartment -- The bus compartment is a separately enclosed space for three-phase insulated main power bus bars, supports, and connections to circuit breaker cells. Primary Termination Compartment -- The rear area of the unit includes space for connecting incoming or outgoing power cables, busway connections, transformer connections, or surge protection devices. Circuit Breaker Cell Features Floor Rollout -- Breakers in the lower cell can be rolled out directly on the floor in front of the unit, without a handling device, lift truck, or hoist for indoor and shelter-clad installations. A lift truck accessory is optionally available for handling circuit breakers in upper cells, or in non-walk-in outdoor enclosures. Closed Door Racking -- The circuit breaker can be racked in or out with the cell door open or closed. For racking, a manual drive crank or an optional electric motor drive may be used. Interlocks -- Interlocks prevent moving a closed circuit breaker in the cell, by preventing engagement of the racking crank if the breaker is closed. A second interlock lever holds the circuit breaker mechanically and electrically trip-free between positions. The racking mechanism can be padlocked to restrict unauthorized racking of the circuit breaker. Separate padlock

Circuit Breaker Interior

General

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

provisions may be used to hold the circuit breaker in the trip-free condition. Automatic Shutters -- Automatically operated grounded steel shutters allow or block access to the stationary primary disconnects. The shutters are opened by the circuit breaker as it moves toward the connected position. The shutters close as the circuit breaker is racked away from the connected position to the test position. The shutters remain closed until they are forced open by insertion of the circuit breaker. This design maximizes protection for personnel, as compared to shutters which are linked to the racking mechanism. Current Transformers -- Front-access current transformers may be mounted around both the upper and lower stationary primary disconnect bushings. Up to a total of four per phase may be located in each circuit breaker cell. Wiring -- Secondary wiring is neatly bundled and secured on the sides of the cell. Wiring is not routed on the floor of the switchgear as in other manufacturer's designs.

Primary Disconnects -- The cubicle stationary primary disconnect contacts are recessed inside the insulator assemblies, and are located behind grounded steel shutters to prevent accidental contact when the circuit breaker is withdrawn. The primary disconnect finger clusters are mounted on the circuit breaker. Secondary Disconnects -- The cubicle mounted stationary disconnect contacts mate with spring loaded secondary contacts on the side of the circuit breaker. The secondary disconnects automatically engage in both the test and connected positions. Mechanism Operated Cell (MOC) Switch -- When required, up to 24 stages of the MOC auxiliary switch can be mounted in the circuit breaker cell. Truck Operated Cell (TOC) Switch -- When required, up to 12 stages of truck operated cell switch can be mounted in the circuit breaker cell.

CSI Section 16320

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

33

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Construction Details

General

Control Power Transformers -- One single phase control power transformer of up to 15kVA capacity, with its primary current limiting fuses and secondary breaker, may be mounted on the rollout tray of an auxiliary cell. The secondary molded case breaker is interlocked with the rollout tray such that the secondary breaker must be open before the control power transformer primary can be disconnected or connected. This prevents load current interruption on the main primary contacts. With the secondary breaker open and the latch released, the tray can be rolled easily to the disconnect position. As the tray rolls out, the primary fuses are automatically grounded to remove any static charge and insulated shutters close to shield energized conductors. Large single-phase and all three-phase control power transformers are stationary mounted on the floor in the rear of the vertical section, The primary fuses for these large transformers are mounted on the rollout tray in the lower portion of the bottom auxiliary cell, and interlocked with the secondary breaker. Withdrawing the rollout tray closes the insulated shutters. Current Transformers -- Siemens torroidal current transformers comply with ANSI standards, and are mounted at the rear of the circuit breaker cell. Up to four standard accuracy MD current transformers may be mounted on each phase two on the bus side and two on the load side, around the primary disconnect bushings, Current transformers may be added or changed with the cell de-energized without removing bus bar or cable connections. Multi-rate current transformats are available. For higher accuracy, type MDD current transformers are available. Due to their larger physical size, only one MDD CT can be installed on each side of the circuit breaker. Primary Termination Compartment -- The primary termination compartment is located at the rear of the switchgear and is separated from all other compartments by metal barriers. When two circuit breakers are located in the same vertical section, their primary cables are separated by steel horizontal barriers and by an enclosed vertical cable trough (or chimney) where both sets of cables exit in the same direction. Upper and lower bolted rear plates are standard and provide separate access to the cable area for each breaker.

GMI Circuit Breaker on Lift Truck

Auxiliary Positions: k For VTs C k For VTs or CPT D k For VTs E k for VTs or CPT, or Rollout Fuses F for Stationary CPT Components: Rollout VT Rollout CPT Rollout VT Rollout Fuses Stationary Mounted Control Power Transformer (over 15kVA 1; all 3 Units

Auxiliary Cells

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

Floor Rollout / Roll-In

Circuit Breaker Cell Features, cont'd Unobstructed Terminal Block Space -- Terminal block areas are located on each side of circuit breaker or auxiliary cells. Since racking system components are not mounted on the cubicle sides, these terminal blocks are not obstructed as in other designs. Installation of field wiring is simplified, as wiring can be easily laid directly against the side sheet. It is not necessary to "fish" the wiring under, around, and through obstructions. Secondary Control Device Panel -- Each circuit breaker or upper auxiliary cell incorporates its own secondary control device panel. The panel can accommodate pullout fuse holders or molded case breakers to suit the protective practices of the purchaser, and can also accommodate auxiliary relays, transducers, or similar devices. Since each circuit breaker cell has its own secondary control device panel, controls from two or more circuits are not intermingled, reducing the chances of confusion, maintenance errors, and the like.

Auxiliary Cells -- Auxiliary cells are constructed in the same general manner as the circuit breaker cells, except without provisions for a circuit breaker element. Auxiliary cells may be located in the top or bottom of a vertical section. The front door panels may be used to mount meters, relays, or other instrumentation. The cubicle portion of the cell may be used for mounting devices such as voltage transformers, control power transformers, automatic transfer switches, battery chargers, or batteries. Rollout trays may be included for mounting VTs or CPTs. Voltage Transformers -- Up to three VTs with their integrally mounted current limiting fuses may be mounted on each rollout tray. The upper and lower cells can each accommodate up to two rollout trays. When moved to the disconnect position, the,primary fuses are automatically disconnected and grounded to remove any static charge from the windings. When the rollout tray is withdrawn, insulated shutters cover the cubicle primary disconnects, protecting personnel from exposure to energized components.

34

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16320

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Vacuum Circuit Breakers

Bus Joint Insulation -- For normal joint configurations, bolted bus joints are insulated by pre-formed molded polyvinyl boots which are held in place by nylon hardware. Preformed insulating materials eliminate the need for molding and taping joints when connecting shipping groups in the field, reducing installation time and costs. The same pre-formed, high dielectric strength joint boots used in factory assembly are also used in field assembly. For uncommon joint configurations, taped joint insulation is used. Bus Support Insulation -- Track- resistant, flame retardant glass polyester or epoxy insulation components insure a uniformly high level of insulation quality throughout the switchgear. Bus bar supports and primary disconnect bushings are high impact strength-molded insulation with high dielectric strength and low moisture absorption characteristics. Optional Porcelain / Epoxy Supports -- As an option, the bus will be supported on electrical grade porcelain primary disconnect insulator cylinders, and porcelain stand-off insulators. The inter-section insert insulators are cast cycloaliphatic epoxy insulation, which is comparable to porcelain. The stationary primary disconnects incorporate true porcelain line-toground integrity, unlike some other designs which simply add a porcelain component to a glass polyester support, which therefore relies on the glass polyester for the insulation integrity.

General

Cable Termination Area

Circuit Breaker Cell Wiring

Bus Bar System -- The main bus bar system is enclosed by grounded metal barriers and feeds both the upper and lower cells in a vertical section. Full rounded-edge copper bus bar with silver plated joints is standard. Tin-plated copper bus is available as an option. High strength Grade 5 steel hardware with split lock washers assures constant pressure low resistance connections. A copper ground bus is standard in all cubicles. Bus Bar Insulation -- Bus bars have fluidized bed, flame retardant, track resistant epoxy insulation. The epoxy is bonded to the bus bars, virtually eliminating corrosion due to intrusion of gas or moisture between insulation and bus bar.

Wiring -- The secondary and control wiring is connected to terminal blocks which have numbered points for identification. One side of the terminal blocks for all connections leaving the switchgear is reserved for external connections. Secondary and control wire is No. 14 AWG, extra-flexible, stranded type SIS wire, insulated for 600 volts. Insulated barrel, crimp-type locking fork terminals are used for most applications, except where the devices require a different type of terminal. Where they pass through primary compartments, secondary control wires are armored or enclosed in grounded metal wire troughs. Instrumentation and Relays -- Instruments, meters, and relays can be traditional switchboard type, or modern electronic type, depending on the requirements of the specification. If traditional electromechanical devices are used, they have semi-flush cases with dull black covers. Protective relays, if available as standard, are of the drawout type with built-in test facilities. Indicating and recording instruments, meters and relays are of the rectangular type, semiflush mounted. All scales have a suitable range and are designed with black letters on a white background.

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

Main Bus Construction

CSI Section 16320

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

35

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Construction / Accessories

Control and Instrument Switches Switches furnished are rotary, switchboard type and have black handles. Circuit breaker control switches have pistol-grip handles, while instrument transfer switches have round notched handles, and auxiliary or transfer switches have oval handles. Circuit breaker control switches have a mechanical flag indicator showing a red or green marker to indicate the last manual operation of the switch. Outdoor Housings Two types of outdoor housing -- NonWalk-In and Shelter-Clad -- are available to meet almost any application. For both types the underside of the base is coated with a coal tar emulsion. The switchgear is shipped inconvenient grouped for erection in the field Non-Walk-In Design The non-walk-in switchgear consists of indoor type breaker and auxiliary cubicles located in a steel housing of weatherproof construction. Each vertical section has a full height exterior front door with provision for padlocking. Each cell is also equipped with an inner hinged front door for mounting relays, instrumentation, and control switches. Two removable rear panels are included for cable access to the primary termination area. Each cubicle includes a switched lamp receptacle for proper illumination of the cubicle during maintenance and inspection, a duplex receptacle for use with electric tools, and necessary space heaters. A switch for all space heaters is located in one cubicle. Shelter-Clad Design -- Single Aisle The shelter-clad switchgear consists of indoor type circuit breaker and auxiliary cubicles located in a weatherproof steel housing having an operating aisle space of sufficient size to permit withdrawal of the circuit breakers for inspection, test or maintenance. An access door is located at each end of the aisle, arranged so that the door can be opened from the inside regardless of whether or not it has been padlocked on the outside. The aisle space is provided with incandescent lighting which is controlled by means of a three-way switch at each access door. Each cubicle includes necessary space heaters. Each lineup includes two utility duplex receptacles, one at each aisle access door, for use with electric tools, extension cords, etc. The weatherproof enclosure for the aisleway is shipped disassembled for erection in the field. Shelter-Clad Design -- Common Aisle The Shelter-Clad-Common Aisle switchgear consists of two lineups of indoor type circuit breaker and auxiliary units located in a weatherproof steel housing having a common operating aisle space of sufficient size to permit withdrawal of the circuit breakers for inspection, test or maintenance. Otherwise, the construction is as described for single aisle design. Accessories Standard accessories include: ½ Manual Racking Crank ½ Spring Charging Handle ½ Drawout Extension Rails (facilitate handling of circuit breakers in upper cell) ½ Lifting Sling (for breakers above floor level) ½ Contact Lubricant ½ Touch-Up Paint Optional accessories available include: ½ Circuit Breaker Lift Device ½ Split Plug Jumper ½ Test Cabinet ½ Test Plugs (for drawout relays, meters) ½ Electric Racking Motor Assembly ½ Fifth Wheel Handling Device Test provisions, either a split plug jumper or a test cabinet, are available for testing the circuit breaker outside its cubicle. The split plug jumper is used to bridge the secondary disconnects with a flexible cable, so the circuit breaker may be electrically closed and tripped with the control switch on the instrument panel. The test cabinet is used for closing and tripping the circuit breaker at a location remote from the switchgear.

General

Manual Ground and Test Device This is a drawout element that can be inserted into a circuit breaker cell. It opens the shutters, connects to the cell primary disconnecting contacts, and so provides a means to make the primary disconnect stabs available for testing. It is suitable for high potential testing of outgoing circuits or of the switchgear main bus, or for phase sequence checking. It also provides a means to connect temporary grounds to de-energized circuits for maintenance purposes. Electrical Ground and Test Device An electrical ground and test device includes a power operated switch arranged to allow grounding one set of disconnect stabs. Two devices, one each for the upper and lower stabs, are required if grounding is desired to either side of the unit. The device also provides a means of access to the primary circuits for high potential tests or for phase sequence checking. These devices are able to close and latch against short circuit currents corresponding to the ratings of the equipment. Due to the unique requirements frequently involved in such devices, all applications of electrically operated ground and test devices should be referred to Siemens for review. Note: Due to the special nature of ground and test devices, it is recommended that each user develop definitive operating procedures incorporating safe operating practices. Only qualified personnel should be allowed to use ground and test devices.

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

36

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16320

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

ISGSTM Relay, AccessTM System

Application The ISGS protective relay is used to provide all common protective relay functions, metering, indication and control associated with switchgear circuit breaker installations. The ISGS relay replaces separately mounted and wired components simplifying specification and installation while providing increased reliability and functionality. Features: ½ Three phase plus ground time and / or instantaneous overcurrent protection, replacing four separate relays. (50, 50HS, 51, 50N, 50NHS, 51N) ½ 9 selectable time overcurrent curves and 1 custom curve. ½ Large 16 character 2-line, back-lit LCD front panel display for easy review of metered data and settings. ½ Standard metering functions: RMS and average RMS currents Ampere demand (per phase & average) ½ Optional metering functions RMS and average RMS voltages Active power (kWatts) kW demand kW hours Apparent power (kVA) Volt-amperes reactive (kVAR) kVAR hours Power facto Frequency ½ Optional protective functions Over and / or under voltage protection (59 / 27) Phase and ground directional overcurrent ( 67 / 67N) ver and / or under frequency protection (81 O / U) Negative sequence voltage (47N) Voltage phase sequence (47N) ½ Waveform capture (2 buffers at 1 full second duration each), allowing a review of the fault waveforms and line harmonic conditions on your PC. ½ Trip log, recording information on the last eight trip events, including time, date, interrupted amps, time in pickup and other pertinent date to add in quick disturbance analysis. ½ Event Log, monitoring relay functions for status changes and recording data available when one occurs. ½ Min / Max logs, storing data from metering functions, including current, voltage, power and frequency, all with time stamping. ½ Front mounted RS232 port for local access to all data and settings. ½ WisdonTM software is supplied for easy program and fault data extraction via this front RS232 port. ½ Direct connection to the Siemens ACCESS electrical data system via an optional RS485 port for enhanced communications and control. Construction The ISGS relay system does away with the costly wiring, drilling and debugging time required to install multiple electromechanical relays. The ISGS unit is housed in a standard M-1 drawout case and is compatible with commonly used XLA test plugs.

General

Mode of Operation The ISGS relay system allows the addition of options or configuration changes at any time without discarding the basic hardware. New configuration settings are keyed in directly using the ISGS keypad. The ISGS unit also features a local communications port that allows device configuration and communications with a local PC. Siemens ACCESS System Siemens brings the power of communications to medium voltage switchgear. GM switchgear can be provided with a variety of ACCESS-compatible devices for protection, instrumentation, or other needs. ACCESS provides real-time critical operating information for electrical distribution systems. Metering, protection, and event recording are integrated into an easy-to-use package offering: ½ Full Metering Capability ½ RMS Sensing ½ Graphics Display ½ Event Recording ½ Remote Monitoring Contact your local Siemens representative for more information on the ACCESS system and ISGS relay.

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

Type GM Switchgear -- Outfitted with Siemens ACCESS-Compatible Devices

CSI Section 16320

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

37

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Construction Details / Vacuum Circuit Breakers

Non-Walk-In Design The non-walk-in switchgear consists of indoor type breaker and auxiliary cubicles located in a steel housing of weatherproof construction. Each vertical section has a full height exterior front door with provision for padlocking. Each cell is also equipped with an inner hinged front door for mounting relays, instrumentation, and control switches. Two removable rear panels are included for cable access to the primary termination area. Each cubicle includes a switched lamp receptacle for proper illumination of the cubicle during maintenance and inspection, a duplex receptacle for use with electric tools, and necessary space heaters. A switch for all space heaters is located in one cubicle. Shelter-Clad Design -- Single Aisle The shelter-clad switchgear consists of indoor type circuit breaker and auxiliary cubicles located in a weatherproof steel housing having an operating aisle space of sufficient size to permit withdrawal of the circuit breakers for inspection, test or maintenance. An access door is located at each end of the aisle, arranged so that the door can be opened from the inside regardless of whether or not is has been padlocked on the outside. The aisle space is provided with incandescent lighting which is controlled by means of a threeway switch at each access door. Each cubicle includes necessary space heaters. Each lineup includes two utility duplex receptacles, one at each aisle access

General

door, for use with electric tools, extension cords, etc. The weatherproof enclosure for the aisleway is shipped disassembled for erection in the field. Shelter-Clad Design -- Common Aisle The Shelter-Clad-Common Aisle switchgear consists of two lineups of indoor type circuit breaker and auxiliary units located in a weatherproof steel housing having a common operating aisle space of sufficient size to permit withdrawal of the circuit breakers for inspection, test or maintenance. Otherwise, the construction is as described for single aisle design.

Type GMI Vacuum Circuit Breakers -- 5kV, 7.2kV, and 15kV

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

Siemens Type GMI circuit breakers are available in 250 MVA through 1000 MVA nominal interrupting classes, and 1200 through 3000 ampere self-cooled, plus 4000 ampere forced air cooled continuous current ratings. Maintenance Features The GMI circuit breakers incorporate many features designed to reduce and simplify maintenance, including: ½ Virtually Maintenance-Free Vacuum Interrupter ½ 5-Year Maintenance Interval ½ Floor Rollout ½ Front Mounted Operator ½ Common Operator Family ½ Simple Barriers ½ "Universal" Spare Breaker Concept ½ Non-Sliding Current Transfer ½ Rugged Secondary Disconnects Vacuum Interrupters The GMI circuit breakers use the Siemens family of vacuum interrupters, proven in over 100,000 circuit breakers produced since 1976. The cup shaped contacts have chrome-copper arcing rings, with a unique geometry to provide fast interruption with minimal contact erosion. The chrome-copper contact material assures lower chopping currents than with designs employing copper-bismuth contacts.

5-Year Maintenance Interval When applied under mild conditions (ANSI "usual service" conditions), maintenance is only needed at 5-year intervals. Floor Rollout When located in the lower cell, the circuit breakers are arranged to rollout directly on the floor in front of the switchgear. No adapter, hoist, or lift truck is necessary. Stored Energy Operator The Siemens GMI stored energy operator is simple, for long life, high reliability, and ease of maintenance. Parts used in the manufacture of the circuit breaker are precision tooled or produced on numerically controlled equipment. The design includes frequent use of inherent alignment techniques. Mechanism Operation The mechanism is arranged to prestore closing energy in the closing springs. The closing springs are selected so that they provide sufficient energy not only to close the circuit breaker safely into maximum "close and latch" currents, but also to prestore the tripping energy necessary to open the circuit breaker. The springs can be manually charged during maintenance or in emergency conditions, but are normally charged electrically automatically after each closing operation. Interlocks The racking system prevents racking of a closed circuit breaker, and keeps the circuit breaker trip-free during racking. The racking mechanism can be padlocked to prevent unauthorized operation. Padlocks

can also be applied to the cell to maintain the circuit breaker in the trip-free condition.

Removal of Type GMI Circuit Breaker

38

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16320

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Vacuum Circuit Breakers

General

GMI Breaker -- Side View (1200A) -- (Outer barriers removed)

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

GMI Breaker -- Key Components GMI Breaker -- Rear View (2000A)

Type GMI -- 5kV, 7.2kV, and 15kV (cont'd)

Manual Controls and indicators All breaker manual controls and indicators are conveniently located on the front of the breaker. Standard features include manual close button, manual trip button, open-close indicator, stored energy closing spring charge / discharge indicator, manual spring charging access, and close operation counter. Common Operator Family Since the entire GMI range of ratings uses a common stored energy operating mechanism design, less training of maintenance personnel is required, and stocking of spare parts is reduced.

Front Accessible Operating Mechanism The GMI stored energy operator is located at the front of the circuit breaker. The front cover can be easily removed to expose the operator for inspection and maintenance. This feature eliminates the need to tilt or turn over the circuit breaker for normal service. True Trip-Free Design Both electrically and mechanically the mechanism is truly trip-free even if the circuit breaker is in the midst of a closing operation, it can respond to a trip command. Unlike some oil and gas filled breakers, it is not necessary for the contacts to close before the tripping operation can begin.

Plug-in Connections Connections to the close coil, trip coil, and the spring charging motor on the circuit breaker are by means of convenient captive plug type connectors, greatly simplifying replacement or inspection of these devices. Simple Barriers To simplify maintenance, interphase barriers are not required for 1200 ampere circuit breakers. Outerphase barriers, and interphase barriers (when provided), are of very simple design, and located on the circuit breaker, allowing the cell to be free of barriers, except the current transformer barrier located in front of the shutters. The barriers on the circuit breaker remove quickly and easily for maintenance which can be done with the barriers in place.

CSI Section 16320

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

39

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Vacuum Circuit Breakers

Type GMI -- 5kV, 7.2kV, and 15kV (cont'd)

Non-sliding Current Transfer The vacuum interrupter movable stem is connected to the lower disconnect stud of the circuit breaker by a reliable flexible connector, a method pioneered by Siemens in the 1970's. This provides a low resistance current transfer path, not subject to the wear and contamination problems associated with sliding or rolling joints used in some designs. breaker to be inserted in a breaker cell provided that the circuit breaker equals or exceeds the ratings required by the cell.

General

Auxiliary Switch (Breaker Mounted) An eight stage auxiliary switch assembly is mounted on the vacuum circuit breaker with contacts for use in the circuit breaker control circuit and as spare contacts for other use. Normally, four auxiliary switch contacts, two N.O. and two N.C., can be wired out for purchaser use. Mechanism Operated Cell (MOC) Switch When required, 6, 12, 18, or 24 stages of MOC auxiliary switch can be mounted in the circuit breaker cell. This switch is operated by the circuit breaker mechanism, so that the switch contacts change state whenever the circuit breaker is closed or tripped. Normally, the MOC switch is operated only when the circuit breaker is in the connected position, but provisions for operation in both the connected and the test positions can be furnished.

Primary Disconnects

Secondary Disconnects Circuit breaker-to-cubicle secondary disconnects are of the sliding finger design. The secondary disconnects are automatically engaged as the circuit breaker is racked into the test position. They remain engaged as the circuit breaker is racked to the connected position. Since the secondary disconnects automatically engage in both the test and connected positions, there is no need to operate a separate linkage for testing, as other designs require.

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

Current Transfer Path

Primary Disconnects The primary connection between the circuit breaker and the cubicle is made of multiple sets of silver-plated copper finger contacts which engage with silverplated copper stationary contacts. The cubicle primary disconnect studs have a rounded leading edge, which contributes to smooth racking of the circuit breaker. The contacts, mounted on the ends of the breaker disconnect studs, have multiple fingers and are compression spring loaded (one spring per double pair of fingers). This arrangement offers a large number of contact points to ensure proper alignment. The breaker finger assemblies are withdrawn with the breaker, and are available for inspection without deenergizing the switchgear main bus. "Universal" Spare Breaker The physical configuration and interlock logic allow the use of a single circuit breaker to serve as a "universal" spare breaker at an installation site. The interlock logic checks the four principal rating characteristics (continuous current, maximum voltage, interrupting current, and close & latch current), and allows a circuit

Secondary Disconnects: Cubicle portion

Secondary Disconnects: Breaker portion

The secondary disconnects are located on the side of the circuit breaker element, where they are shielded from accidental damage. They are of an extremely rugged design, in contrast to other designs, which employ light duty electronics-style disconnects, located in hidden or inaccessible locations. Alignment of the disconnects can be visually observed, if desired, allowing positive verification of secondary integrity, a feature not possible with designs employing a disconnect underneath or behind the breaker.

Truck Operated Cell (TOC) Switch When required, 4, 8, or 12 stages of truck operated cell switch can be mounted in the circuit breaker cell. The TOC switch contacts change state when the circuit breaker moves into or out of the connected position.

40

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16320

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Vacuum Circuit Breakers

Type GMI -- 5kV, 7.2kV, and 15kV (cont'd)

Surge Limiters Type 3EF surge limiters are available for use in distribution systems to protect motors, transformers, and reactors from the effects of voltage surges associated with breaker operations. These limiters are not designed to protect equipment exposed to lightning surges, for which surge arrestors should be applied. The 3EF surge limiters prevent the development of excessive overvoltages which can result from multiple reignitions or virtual chopping. This is primarily of concern during the starting of motors and switching of some reactive loads. In general, if the impulse capability (BIL) of the protected equipment matches that of the switchgear, no protection is needed due to the surges produced by the opening of the vacuum breaker. Since dry type transformers and rotating machines are generally of lower BIL, surge protection may be necessary. Refer to Table 3.1 for minimum application recommendations for surge limiters. Table 3.1 Surge Limiter Recommendations

Protected (Load) Equipment Liquid Transformers

Standard BIL

General

Vacuum Interrupters

Surge Limiters Recommended

No Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes

½ Ideal Dielectric In a vacuum, the dielectric strength across a contact gap recovers very rapidly allowing a small contact separation and an efficient interrupter design. The vacuum does not interact with the arc or its components as do other dielectrics. ½ Quiet Operation Interruption of currents by a vacuum circuit breaker is very quiet as compared to the loud report which accompanies interruptions in some other types of breakers. ½ Low Current Chopping Characteristics The chrome-copper arcing ring used in Siemens interrupters limits chopping currents to a maximum of 5 amperes. This low value prevents the build-up of unduly high voltages and results in lower stress on the insulation of load equipment.

Dry Type 5kV 60kV BIL Transformers

Motors Reactors Capacitors

7kV or 15kV 95kV BIL Locked Rotor Current <600A Locked Rotor Current >600A

½ No Arc Products Vented to the Atmosphere The sealed vacuum interrupter prevents venting of arc products to the atmosphere, and prevents any possible contamination of the contacts by the atmosphere. The metal vapor of the arc quickly recondenses on the surface of the contacts, although a small amount may recondense on the arc chamber wall. The recondensing metal vapor acts as a "getter" and recaptures more molecules of certain gases that might be liberated during vaporization. This action tends to improve the vacuum in the interrupter during its operating life. ½ Non-Toxic Interruption By-Products The interruption process occurs entirely within the sealed vacuum interrupter. Even if an interrupter is physically broken, the arc products inside the interrupter are not toxic. In contrast, gas-filled interrupters produce toxic arc by-products, requiring special precautions in the event of a ruptured interrupter housing.

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

Not necessary if surge capacitors or surge arrestors are located at transformer terminals. Not necessary if surge capacitors and surge arrestors are located at the machine terminals.

Siemens Vacuum Heritage The GMI Vacuum Circuit Breakers take full advantage of Siemens long history with vacuum interrupters for power applications. While early work was carried out in the 1920's, a successful vacuum interrupter could not be perfected until the high vacuum pump became available in the 1960's. Focused development effort began in 1969, culminating in the introduction of the type 3AF circuit breaker in 1976. The knowledge gained over years of application of this technology in the 3AF circuit breakers is now available in the GMI design. The advantages inherent in vacuum interruption are summarized as follows.

CSI Section 16320

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

41

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Vacuum Circuit Breakers

Type GMI -- 5kV, 7.2kV, and 15kV (cont'd)

½ Fewer Components The vacuum interrupter pole construction is extremely simple and consists of only seven moving parts within the high voltage area and only two moving parts within the interrupter chamber. This means greater reliability and less maintenance with vacuum interrupters as compared to the greater number of parts in other type interrupters, such as air-magnetic, gas or oil. ½ Long Interrupter Life The interrupter has a long expected service life due to the careful selection of components. The chrome-copper contacts allow efficient interruption of both diffused and contracted arcs with very little contact erosion. ½ Immunity to Environment The capability of the vacuum bottle to interrupt current or to withstand voltage is not directly affected by conditions external to the vacuum bottle. High or low altitudes, hot or cold temperatures, moist or dry conditions, or heavy dust conditions do not affect the conditions internal to the interrupter. Conditions external to the interrupter, however, could affect the overall system operation and should be considered in the specifications. ½ Virtually Maintenance Free Interrupter maintenance requires merely wiping dust or other atmospheric elements from the exterior, visually checking the contact wear indicator, and periodic dielectric testing to confirm vacuum integrity. ½ Lower Force Requirements The vacuum interrupter has a very low moving mass compared to the that found in air-magnetic, gas or oil interrupters. This allows a smaller, more compact stored energy operator leading to long life and low maintenance of the circuit breaker. Vacuum Interrupter Principles With Siemens GMI vacuum circuit breakers, the chopping currents are held to 5 amperes or less. This is low enough to prevent the build-up of unduly high voltages which may occur on switching of inductive circuits. The chrome-copper contact material keeps overvoltages to a minimum, so special surge protection is not required in most applications. When the contacts open, the current to be interrupted initiates a metal vapor arc discharge, and current continues flowing through this plasma until the next current zero. The arc is extinContacts guished near the current zero, and the conductive metal vapor recondenses on the contact surfaces and the arc chamber wall within a matter of microseconds. As a result, the dielectric strength of the break recovers very rapidly and contact erosion is almost negligible. The arc drawn in the vacuum interrupter is not cooled. The metal vapor plasma is highly conductive and the resulting arc voltage is only 20 to 200 volts. This low arc voltage, combined with very short arcing times, produces only a very small arc energy in the interrupter, accounting for the long electrical life expectancy of the Siemens vacuum interrupter. There are two types Contact Condition After Interrupting 25kA 100 Times of arc shapes. Up to field causes the arc to travel around approximately 10 kA, the arc remains the contacts. This prevents localized diffused. It takes the form of a vapor disoverheating when interrupting large charge and covers the entire contact surmagnitudes of short circuit current. face. Diffused arcs are easily interrupted. Above 10 kA, the arc is constricted considerably by its own magnetic field, i.e. it contracts essentially to a point arc. If the contracted arc is allowed to remain stationary, it overheats the contact at the arc roots to the point where the molten metal vapor does not allow the dielectric to rebuild during the current zero, and large magnitude currents can not be interrupted. To overcome this, the contacts are designed in a cup shape with oblique slots, so that a self-generated

General

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

42

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16320

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Ratings

Table 3.2 Type GMI Circuit Breaker Ratings

Circuit Breaker Type 5-GMI 5-GMI -250 -350 kV 4.16 4.16 MVA 250 350 E kV RMS 4.76 4.76 K 1.24 1.19 kV RMS 19 19 kV Crest 60 60 1200 1200 Amperes 2000 2000 3000 29 I kA RMS 41 5 Cycles 5 Sec. 2 2 3.85 E/K kV RMS 4 kA RMS 36 49 kA RMS kA RMS kA Crest 36 58 & 78 97 & 132 49 78 132 7-GMI -500 7.2 500 8.25 1.25 36 95 1200 2000 3000 33 5 2 6.6 41 41 66 111 15-GMI -500 13.8 500 15 1.3 36 95 1200 2000 18 5 2 11.5 23 23 37 & 58 62 & 97

Technical

15-GMI -750 13.8 750 15 1.3 36 95 1200 2000 3000 28 5 2 11.5 36 36 58 & 77 62 & 130 15-GMI -1000 13.8 1000 15 1.3 36 95 1200 2000 3000 37 5 2 11.5 48 48 77 130

Measured Parameter General Nominal Voltage Class Nominal 3-Phase MVA Class Max Rated Rated Values Voltage Voltage Range Factor Insulation Levels Rated Withstand Test Voltage Continuous Rated Current Short circuit (at rated max. kV) Interrupting Time Permissible Tripping Delay Y Rated Max. Voltage Divided by K Max. Sym. Interrupting K Times Rated Short Circuit 3-Sec. Short Time Current KI Current Carrying 1.6 K Times Rated Short Circuit Current 2.7 K Times Rated Short Circuit Current Low Frequency Impulse

Related Required Current Capabilities Closing and Latching (Momentary)

High close and latch (momentary) rating available for special application. Maximum voltage for which the breaker is designed and the upper limit for operation. K is the ratio of rated maximum voltage to the lower limit of the range of operating voltage in which the required symmetrical and asymmetrical interrupting capabilities vary in inverse proportion to the operating voltage. 3000 ampere ratings available with increased fan-cooled rating of 4000 amperes. Outdoor requires fans @ 3000 amps. 4000A available in Outdoor. To obtain the required symmetrical interrupting capability of a circuit breaker at an operating voltage between 1/K times rated maximum voltage and rated maximum voltage, the following formula shall be used. Rated Maximum Voltage Required Symmetrical Interrupting Capacity = Rated Short Circuit Current × Operating Voltage For operating voltages below 1/K times rated maximum voltage, the required symmetrical interrupting capability of the circuit breaker shall be equal to K times rated short circuit current. With the limitations stated in 5.10 of ANSI Standard C37.04-1979, all values apply for polyphase and line-to-line faults. For single phase-to-ground faults, the specific conditions stated in 5.10.2.3 of ANSI Standard C37.04-1979 apply. Current values in this row are not to be exceeded even for voltages below 1/K times rated maximum voltage. For voltages between rated maximum voltage and 1/K times rated maximum voltage, follow 5 above. Current values in this row are independent of operating voltage up to and including rated maximum voltage. Included for reference only--not listed in ANSI C37.06.

Table 3.6

Current Transformers

Relay Class C 15 C 20 C 25 C 35 C 40 C 60 C 75 C100 C130 C170 C200 C200 C210 C300 C240 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 60 C 80 C100 C130 C160 C210 C270 C340 C425 C510 C460 C580 C660

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

Table 3.3

Type GMI Circuit Breaker Control Data

Coil Amperes Close 10 4 3 4 3 Trip 10 4 3 -- -- Spring Charging Motor Amperes Charging Run (Avg.) Inrush (Peak) Seconds 8.5 15 10 2.7 10.2 8 1.3 2.4 8 3.3 10.6 8 1.7 7.1 8

Control Voltages, ANSI C37.06 Table 10 Range Nominal Close Trip 38­56 28­56 48 VDC 100­140 70­140 125 VDC 200­280 140­280 250 VDC 104­127 -- 120 VAC 208­254 -- 240 VAC

Current at nominal voltage.

Table 3.5 Table 3.4 Interrupting Capacity Auxiliary Switch Contacts

Type Switch Breaker TOC MOC Continuous Current Amperes 20 15 20 Control Circuit Voltage 120 240 48 125 250 AC AC DC DC DC 20 15 15 20 10 10 20 10 0.5 0.5 10 10 2 0.2 5 Volt. Class 5kV

Voltage Transformers

Accuracy Class at 120V Sec. W,X,Y Z ZZ 0.3 1.2 -- 0.3 1.2 -- 0.3 1.2 -- 0.3 0.3 1.2 0.3 0.3 1.2 0.3 0.3 1.2 0.3 0.3 1.2 VA Thermal Rating 500 500 500 1000 1000 1000 1000

15kV

Ratio 2400/120 4200/120 4800/120 7200/120 8400/120 12000/120 14400/120

60 Hz Metering Accuracy at Burden Ratio B0.1 B0.5 B1.0 B2.0 Type MD Torroidal Standard Accuracy 100:5 2.4 -- -- -- 150:5 0.6 2.4 -- -- 200:5 0.6 1.2 -- -- 250:5 0.6 1.2 2.4 -- 300:5 0.6 0.6 1.2 2.4 400:5 0.3 0.6 1.2 2.4 500:5 0.3 0.3 0.6 1.2 600:5 0.3 0.3 0.6 1.2 800:5 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6 1000:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 1200:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 1500:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 2000:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 2500:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 3000:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 Type MDD Torroidal Special Accuracy 75:5 2.4 4.8 -- -- 100:5 1.2 2.4 -- -- 150:5 0.6 1.2 2.4 4.8 200:5 0.6 1.2 1.2 2.4 250:5 0.3 0.6 1.2 2.4 300:5 0.3 0.6 0.6 1.2 400:5 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6 500:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6 600:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 800:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 1000:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 1200:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 1500:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 2000:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 2500:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 3000:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

1-second through-current and momentary current are equal to the ratings of the associated circuit breakers. Exceeds ANSI C37.20.2 Accuracy Limit. Multi-ratio current transformers available. The accuracy ratings shown apply only to the full secondary winding.

CSI Section 16320

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

43

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Enclosure Dimensions

Weights and Dimensions are Approximate Table 3.7 Cubicle Dimensions -- Per Vertical Section

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Type Indoor Shelter-Clad Single-Aisle Shelter-Clad Common Aisle Aisle-Less Non-Walk-In GM SGM SGM OGM Height 95.25 (2419) 114.75 (2915) 114.75 (2915) 113.62 (2886) Width 36.0 (914) 36.0 (914) 36.0 (914) 36.0 (914) Depth 94.0 (2388) 173.0 (4394) 264.0 (6706) 94.0 (2388) Drawout Aisle 76.0 (1930) Recommended 76.0 (1930) Included 76.0 (1930) Included 76.0 (1930) Recommended Weight in lbs. (kg) 3000 (1364) 4550 (2069) 8100 (3683) 3600 (1637)

Dimensions

Table 3.8 GMI Circuit Breaker Weights in lbs. (kg)

Cont. Current Amps 1200 2000 3000 Circuit Breaker Type 5-GMI -250 385 (175) 425 (193) -- 5-GMI -350 440 (200) 480 (218) 575 (261) 7-GMI -500 425 (193) 465 (211) 560 (255) 15-GMI -500 415 (189) 455 (207) -- 15-GMI -750 425 (193) 465 (211) 560 (255)

Add for roof overhang Rear (Cable Side) Front Non-Walk-In 3.62 (92 mm) 5.37 (136 mm)

15-GMI -1000 440 (200) 480 (218) 575 (261)

Shelter Clad 3.62 in. (92mm) 1.5 in. (38 mm)

Add 6 in. (152 mm) to each end of linup for aisle extension 12.0 in. (305 mm) total)

76 in. (1930 mm) aisle space recommended allows room for interchange of breakers. Minimum aisle space required for handling circuit breaker with lift truck is 61 in. (1549 mm). Minimum aisle space required if all breakers are af floor level is 50 in. (1270 mm)

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

End View of Type GM Indoor Switchgear End View of Non-Walk-In Type OGM Outdoor Switchgear

End View of Single Aisle Type SGM Outdoor Switchgear

End View of Common Aisle Type SGM Outdoor Switchgear

44

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16320

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Floor Plans

Dimensions

Notes: 1. Main bus sizes 1200A, 2000A, 3000A, or 4000A. 2. No rollout auxiliaries allowed in upper cell if lower cell has 3000A breaker. If 3000A breaker is located in upper cell, one roll out auxiliary may be located in the lower cell. 3. Auxiliary cells may each contain 2 rollouts (except as indicated in notes 2 and 5). 4. Fuse rollout for stationary control power transformer must be located in lower rollout position in lower auxiliary cell. 5. For fan cooled 4000A rating, breaker (3000A self-cooled, 4000A fan-cooled) is located in lower cell and fan cooling equipment is located in upper cell. 6. Stacking arrangements are available as shown. Total circuit breaker loading in a vertical unit may not exceed main bus rating. Consult Siemens for specific application assistance regarding total load limits in each unit.

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

Indoor Switchgear

Non-Walk-In Outdoor Switchgear

CSI Section 16320

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

45

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Side Views

1200, 2000, 3000A Breakers / Auxiliary

Dimensions

1200A or 2000A Breaker / 1200A or 2000A Breaker

1200A or 2000A Breaker / Auxiliary

Auxiliary / 1200A or 2000A Breaker

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

Blank / 3000A Breaker (4000A with fan cooling)

3000A / Auxiliary VTs or CPT in position F

Auxiliary / Auxiliary

Bus Tie Breakers

Auxiliary Positions:

k C k D k E k F For VTs For VTs or CPT For VTs For VTs, CPT or Rollout Fuses for Stationary CTP

Unit with Bus Tie Breaker in Lower Compartment

Unit Adjacent to Lower Bus Tie NOTE: Position "F" suitable for VTs or CPT only

Unit with Bus Tie Breaker in Upper Compartment

Unit Adjacent to Lower Bus Tie

Application Notes Regarding Bus Tie Breakers 1. Bus tie breaker (1200A, 2000A, or 3000A) may be in upper or lower compartment, as desired. 3000A bus tie breaker must not have another circuit breaker in the unit which has the 3000A breaker. 2. Adjacent unit must normally have auxiliary compartment at same level as bus tie breaker to accommodate transition bus. Consult Siemens if auxiliary compartment at same level as bus tie breaker is not available. 3. Units with 1200A or 2000A bus tie breakers may have a feeder breaker 1200A or 2000A located in the same unit. 4. Units with 3000A bus tie breaker in lower cell must have a vented auxiliary compartment (no rollout auxiliaries) above the breaker. Units with 3000A bus tie breaker in upper cell may have one rollout auxiliary in position "F". 5. Maximum main bus size 4000A.

46

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16320

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Guide Form Specifications

Note: This specification form requires information to be supplied by purchaser. Those items preceded by check box are alternates or are optional. These items denoted preceded by a __ require a quantity or data to be added. General Description of Switchgear -- Units and Rating The equipment outlined in this specification shall consist of indoor nonwalk-in outdoor Shelter-Clad SingleAisle Shelter-Clad Common Aisle outdoor Metal-Clad switchgear with horizontal drawout, vacuum circuit breakers. General construction features shall be of a coordinated design so that shipping groups are easily connected together in the field into a continuous line-up. Necessary standard connecting materials shall be furnished. Shipping groups ordinarily will not exceed 15 ft. (4572 mm) in length. The general arrangement and single line diagram of the equipment shall be as indicated on Sketch Number dated __. Codes and Standards The equipment covered in this specification, except as noted, shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of the applicable standards of: ANSI American National Standards Institute ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers NEC National Electric Code NEMA National Electric Manufacturers Association Service The switchgear sections shall be 5kV 7kV 15kV class, with a maximum design voltage of 4.76kV 825kV 15kV. This equipment shall operate on a service voltage of _____ volts, 3 phase, 3 wire, 60 hertz. Insulation Levels The assembled switchgear structures shall be designed for the following insulation levels: Maximum Design Voltage 4.76kV 8.25kV 15kV Insulation Test, (60 Hertz) 19kV 36kV 36kV Full-wave Impulse Test (BIL) 60kV 95kV 95kV Dimensions Approximate dimensions of the switchgear shall be as shown on the sketch included with this specification. The circuit breakers shall be removable from the control panel side. An aisle space of 76 in. (1930 mm) is recommended to permit withdrawal of the circuit breaker element. Circuit Breakers The vacuum circuit breakers shall be: Nominal Voltage class -- kV, RMS __ Nominal 3 Phase MVA Class __ Rated Maximum Voltage -- kV, RMS __ Rated Continuous Current at 60 Hz-Amp, RMS __ Rated Short Circuit Current at Max Voltage -- kA, RMS __ Rated Interrupting Time in Cycles __ Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting Capability -- kA, RMS __ Short-Time (3 Sec.) Current Carrying Capability -- kA __ Closing and Latching Capability -- kA, peak __ The circuit breaker shall be three pole, single throw, mechanically and electrically trip free, with position indicator, operation counter, auxiliary switches, primary and secondary disconnecting devices, and mechanical interlocks to prevent making or breaking load current on the primary disconnects. The circuit breakers shall be equipped with a stored energy operator. The control voltages shall be: Spring Charging Motor: 48 125 250 volts DC 120 240 volts AC Spring Release (Close) Coil: 48 125 250 volts DC 120 240 volts AC Trip Coil: 48 125 250 volts DC 120 240 volts AC capacitor trip The source of control power shall be a battery provided in the switchgear a control power transformer in the switchgear a separate supply provided by the purchaser a battery located in the vicinity of the switchgear. Meters and Relays All instruments, meters and relays shall be standard multi-function digital type for mounting on the steel panels. All meters and relays, if provided as standard, shall

Specifications

be of the drawout type with built-in test devices. Indicating and recording instruments, meters and relays shall be of the rectangular type, semi-flush mounted. Control and Instrument Switches All switches furnished shall be switchboard type and shall be of the rotary-type construction, with two contacts per stage. Basic Structure The switchgear assembly shall consist of one or more vertical sections, each of which shall have a main bus compartment and two vertically stacked equipment cells. The cells shall be arranged for circuit breakers or auxiliary devices or shall be blank as indicated in the detailed specification. Each main bus compartment shall contain a set of 1200 2000 3000 4000 ampere copper (silver plated at electrical connection points), 3 wire insulated main bus and connections. Each circuit breaker cell shall contain a manually operated screw type drawout racking mechanism, circuit breaker operated automatic shutters and safety interlocks and shall also include: a. Hinged front panel. b. Primary and secondary disconnecting devices. c. Control circuit cutout device. d. Necessary terminal blocks, small wiring and control buses, where required. e. Engraved nameplate, as required. Each auxiliary cell shall include: a. Hinged front panel, suitable for relays and instruments. b. Necessary terminal blocks, small wiring and control buses, where required. c. Engraved nameplate, as required. High Durability Finish The framework and the panels shall be chemically cleaned, hot phosphate treated, and rinsed, and shall be given an electrostatically applied coat of ANSI 61 polyester urethane paint. Production Tests All switchgear assemblies and circuit breakers shall be inspected and tested as part of the regular manufacturing procedure. The tests and inspections shall conform to ANSI C37.20.2 (clause 5.3) for Metal-Clad Switchgear Assemblies and ANSI C37.09 (clause 5) for AC HighVoltage Circuit Breakers.

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

CSI Section 16320

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

47

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Guide Form Specifications

Weatherproof Housing (Select one weatherproof enclosure design): Shelter-Clad Single Aisle Design Shelter-Clad Common Aisle Design Non-Walk-In Outdoor Design Shelter-Clad Design -- Single Aisle The Shelter-Clad Single Aisle Switchgear shall consist of indoor type circuit breaker and auxiliary cell located in a weatherproof steel housing having an operating aisle space of sufficient size to permit withdrawal of the circuit breakers for inspection, test or maintenance. An access door shall be located at each end of the aisle, with provision for padlocking on the outside, but also arranged so that the door can be opened from the inside regardless of whether or not it has been padlocked on the outside. The aisle space shall have adequate incandescent lighting receptacles which shall be controlled by means of a three-way switch at each access door. Included in the switchgear shall be the following: a. One (1) space heater, 240 volts AC in each cell and cable compartment. b. Two (2) utility duplex receptacles with integral ground fault protection, one at each aisle access door, for electric tools, extension cords, etc. The switchgear shall be shipped in convenient groups for erection in the field, and shipping groups ordinarily shall not exceed fifteen (15) feet (4572 mm) in length. The weatherproof enclosure for the aisleway shall be shipped in sections for erection in the field. The front wall of the aisle shall be shipped attached to the front of the cubicle assembly for ease of handling. Necessary erection hardware will be furnished. Shelter-Clad Design -- Common Aisle The Shelter-Clad Common Aisle Switchgear shall consist of two (2) lineups of indoor type circuit breaker and auxiliary units located in a weatherproof steel housing having a common operating aisle space of sufficient size to permit withdrawal of the circuit breakers for inspection, test or maintenance. An access door shall be located at each end of the aisle with provision for padlocking on the outside, but also arranged so that the door can be opened from the inside regardless of whether or not it has been padlocked on the outside. The aisle space shall have adequate incandescent lighting receptacles which will be controlled by means of a three-way switch at each access door. Included in the switchgear shall be the following items: a. One (1) space heater, 240 volts AC in each cell and cable compartment. b. Two (2) utility duplex receptacles with integral ground fault protection, one at each aisle access door, for electric tools, extension cords, etc. The switchgear shall be shipped in convenient groups for erection in the field, and shipping groups ordinarily shall not exceed fifteen (15) feet (4572 mm) in length. The weatherproof enclosure for the aisleway shall be shipped in sections for erection in the field. Necessary erection hardware shall be furnished. Non-Walk-in Outdoor Design The Non-Walk-In Switchgear shall consist of indoor circuit breaker and auxiliary units located in a steel housing of nonwalk-in weatherproof construction. Each unit shall be equipped with a hinged front door with provision for padlocking. Each auxiliary cell is also equipped with an inner hinged front door for mounting relays and instruments. The following equipment shall be furnished within each unit: a. One (1) lamp receptacle with on-off switch for interior illumination. b. One (1) utility duplex receptacle with integral ground fault protection, for electric tools, etc. c. One (1) space heater, 240 volts AC in each cell and cable compartment. A switch for all the space heaters is located in one cell. The switchgear shall be shipped in convenient groups for erection in the field, and shipping groups will not exceed fifteen (15) feet (4572 mm) in length. Necessary erection hardware will be furnished.

Specifications

Detailed Specifications

The group of indoor outdoor switchgear shall include: 1 Set _____ ampere, 3 phase, main bus. 1 Ground bus. The circuit breaker cells and auxiliary cells shall be as specified in the following paragraphs: Incoming Line Feeder Future Feeder Circuit Breaker Cell(s): (Cell Number(s) ____ ). (Example: 1-A (in section 1, top cell; 2-B (in section 2, bottom cell) Each this cell shall contain the following: 1 Provision only for future vacuum circuit breaker vacuum circuit breaker, rated _____ amperes, type_____. 1 Mechanism operated cell (MOC) auxiliary switch, 6 12 18 24 stage. 1 Truck operated cell (TOC) switch, 4 8 12 stage. __ Current transformer(s) single secondary, __:5 ampere ratio, single ratio multi-ratio. __ Space heater, 240 volts AC. __ Thermostat. Mounted in the cable termination area: 1 Current transformer, zero sequence, 50:5 ampere ratio. __ Set zinc-oxide surge arrestors, __kV, station intermediate distribution class. __ Set cable lugs, __ per phase, set screw mechanical crimp compression type, for __ type cable, __size, __ kV for top bottom entry. __ Set potheads, single conductor, __ kV for -type cable, __ size, for top bottom entry. __ Set of 3 roof bushings, rated __ amperes, __kV. __ Provision for connection to a bar type bus duct rated ___amperes, ___kV, at the top of the unit. __ Provision for connection to the throat of a ___kVA transformer at the side of the unit. __ Space heater, 240 volts AC.

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

48

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16320

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 5 through 15kV

Guide Form Specifications

Detailed Specifications (cont'd)

Mounted on the hinged front panel of the upper cell: __ Circuit breaker control switch, complete with one red and one green indicating light. __ Digital instrument, multifunction, type 4300. __ Indicating light, amber white blue. __ Voltmeter, single phase, indicating recording, 0-___ kV scale. __ Voltmeter transfer switch, 3 phase. __ Ammeter, single phase, indicating recording 0-__ ampere scale. __ Ammeter transfer switch, 3 phase. __ Wattmeter , indicating recording __ MW scale. __ Watthour meter, __ element, with 15 30 minute demand attachment. __ Varmeter, indicating recording __ MVar scale. __ Power factor meter. __ Transducer, current voltage watt var, single three phase. __ Overcurrent relay(s) time, device 51 instantaneous, device 50 time and instantaneous, device 50 / 51 __ Ground overcurrent relay time device 51N instantaneous, device 50N. __ Directional relay(s), phase over current, time, device 67. __ Directional relay, ground overcurrent, time, device 67N. __ Thermal overload relay(s), device 49, single phase. __ Current balance relay, device 46. __ Undervoltage and phase sequence relay, device 47. __ Undervoltage relay(s), device 27, single phase. __ Overvoltage relay(s), device 59, single phase. __ Differential relay(s), device 87. __ Lockout relay, device 86. __ Pilot wire equipment, 3 phase, device 87. __ Pilot wire monitoring relay, device 85. __ Under-frequency relay, device 81. __ Auxiliary relay, device No. ___. __ Reclosing relay, with one three reclosure(s), automatic hand reset, device 79. __ Reclosing relay cutout switch, device 79CO. __ Test Block, Current 6 pole Potential 4 pole. CSI Section 16320 Bus Sectionalizing / Tie Circuit Breaker Cell(s): (Cell Number(s) __ ). Each this cell shall contain the following: 1 Provision only for future vacuum circuit breaker vacuum circuit breaker, rated __ amperes, type __. 1 Mechanism operated cell (MOC) auxiliary switch, 6 12 17 18 24 stage. 1 Truck operated cell (TOC) switch, 4 8 12 stage. __ Current transformer(s) single secondary, __ :5 ampere ratio, single ratio multi-ratio. __ Space heater, 240 volts AC. __ Thermostat. __ Set automatic transfer equipment for transferring secondary control (may be located in adjacent cell). Mounted in the cable termination area: 1 Set of sectionalizing bus work for connection to main bus in rear of adjacent auxiliary cell at the same elevation. (Cell Number_____). __ Set tie bus work for connection to a bar type bus duct rated _ amperes, _ kV, at the top of the unit. __ Set Tie cable lugs, __ per phase, w set screw mechanical w crimp compression type, for __ type cable,__ size, __ kV for w top w bottom entry. __ Space heater, 240 volts AC. Mounted on the hinged front panel of the upper cell: __ Circuit breaker control switch, complete with one red and one green indicating light. __ Indicating light, amber white blue. __ Digital instrument, multifunction, type 4300. __ Ammeter, single phase, indicating recording 0-__ ampere scale. __ Ammeter transfer switch, 3 phase. __ Overcurrent relay(s) time, device 51 instantaneous, device 50 time and instantaneous, device 50:51. __ Ground overcurrent relay time, device 51N instantaneous, device 50N. __ Bus differential relay(s), Device 87B. __ Lockout relay, Device 86. __ Test Block, Current 6 pole Potential 4 pole. Auxiliary Cell(s): (Cell Number(s) __). Each this cell shall contain the following: __ Voltage transformer(s), rollout tray

Specifications

mounted, __-120 volt ratio, complete with primary current limiting fuses and insulating shutter. Control power transformer, rollout tray mounted, __kVA (15kVA maximum), single phase 60 Hertz, dry type,__-120 / 240 volt ratio, complete with primary current limiting fuses and insulating shutter. Control power transformer, stationary mounted on the floor in the rear area of the vertical unit, __kVA, single phase (over 15kVA), three phase (any size), 60 Hertz, dry type,____ volt ratio, complete with rollout tray mounted primary current limiting fuses and insulating shutter. (Rollout fuses tray located in the lower tray of bottom cell only). Battery,__volt, lead acid nickelcadmium type, __cells, with a maximum discharge rate of ___ amperes for one minute to ___ volts per cell, complete with rack and standard accessories. (May be located only in lower cell). Battery charger, static type, with without, voltage regulation, complete with ammeter, voltmeter, and / or rheostat, suitable for use with the above battery. (Requires an auxiliary cell which does not contain any rollout auxiliary trays). Space heater, 240 volts AC. Thermostat.

__

__

__

__

3

Medium Voltage Switchgear

__ __

Accessories: The following accessories shall be supplied, but not housed: 1 Manual racking crank 1 Manual spring charging lever 1 Tube contact lubricant 1 Container touch-up paint 1 Lift sling (for breakers if not at floor level) The following optional accessories shall also be supplied. 1 Split plug jumper 1 Test cabinet 1 Test plug, for drawout relays and watthour meters 1 Lift truck (for circuit breakers if not at floor level) 1 Electric racking motor assembly 1 Spare Circuit Breaker(s) type __-GMI ___, rated ___amperes. 1 Ground and test device, manually operated. 1 Fifth wheel device, for handling of circuit breakers.

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

49

SentronTM Switchboards

Types SB1, SB2, SB3 and RCIII

General

7

Type SB1 Switchboard Pictorial

SentronTM Switchboards

Type SB2 Switchboard Pictorial

Whether the design is for a 240V AC, 400 ampere system; a 600V AC, 4000 ampere system; or something in between, Siemens Switchboards should be considered. Every aspect of design has been aimed at improving layout convenience, reducing installation costs, and minimizing the impact and cost of system changes. These switchboards provide the rugged construction and service flexibility necessary in systems for industrial plants, hi-rise complexes, hospitals, and commercial buildings, and are built to UL-891 and NEMA PB-2 standards. Type SB1 for Limited Space Applications The SB1 switchboard has been specifically designed for those applications where floor space is at a premium. The rear of all sections align so the switchboard can be installed against a wall. The SB1 contains front-connected main protective devices and through-bus ratings up to 2000 amperes at 600V AC.

Type SB2 for Increased Service and More Load Cable Room Siemens SB2 switchboard can have extra depth behind the vertical bus in each distribution section, and contains main protective devices and through-bus rated up to 4000 amperes at 600V AC. The rear of all sections align as a standard. Front and rear alignment is available as an option. Type SB3 For Custom Options The SB3 switchboard is available with main bus up to 6000 amperes. All sections are front and rear aligned. Options include, but are not limited to, incoming and outgoing busway, Siemens ACCESSTM System communications, and cold sequence utility C.T. Compartments. Type RCIII Rear Connected Switchboards The RCIII switchboard differs from the SB3 switchboard primarily in the mounting of the devices in the distribution section. The branch and feeder devices are individually mounted. Because of this method of mounting, access to outgoing cable terminations must be from the rear of the switchboard. Bus bar extensions from the feeder devices are run back to the rear of the unit for easy access.

The front and rear of all sections align, designed for mounting away from the wall. RCIII switchboards will accommodate systems up to 6000 amperes, 600 volts maximum in any three-phase threewire or three-phase four-wire configuration. The main bus can be specified for 600 to 6000 ampere rating. Main devices and bus ties are available up to 5000 amperes, branch devices up to 2000 amperes. As with Type SB3, the RCIII switchboard can be of indoor or outdoor NEMA 3R construction. Switchboard Distribution Sections All standard distribution sections are 90 in. (2286) mm) high and 38 in. (965 mm) wide. Optional height of 70 in. (1778 mm) and optional width of 32 in. (813 mm) and 46 in. (1168 mm) are also available. SB1 distribution sections are 20 in. (508 mm) deep. For deeper sections, SB2 and SB3 switchboards must be chosen. SB2 distribution sections have a standard depth of 20 in. (508 mm) but can also be specified in depth of 28 in. (711 mm) and 38 in. (965 mm) when additional space is required. Rear access is required to make use of the additional depth of the SB2 and SB3 switchboards, and to provide access to bus connections, where required. SB2 may be installed against a wall.

See Section 1 of this Guide for a complete discussion of Siemens ACCESSTM system.

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

99

SentronTM Switchboards

Types SB1, SB2, SB3 and RCIII

General

7

Type SB1 Switchboard Pictorial

SentronTM Switchboards

Type SB2 Switchboard Pictorial

Whether the design is for a 240V AC, 400 ampere system; a 600V AC, 4000 ampere system; or something in between, Siemens Switchboards should be considered. Every aspect of design has been aimed at improving layout convenience, reducing installation costs, and minimizing the impact and cost of system changes. These switchboards provide the rugged construction and service flexibility necessary in systems for industrial plants, hi-rise complexes, hospitals, and commercial buildings, and are built to UL-891 and NEMA PB-2 standards. Type SB1 for Limited Space Applications The SB1 switchboard has been specifically designed for those applications where floor space is at a premium. The rear of all sections align so the switchboard can be installed against a wall. The SB1 contains front-connected main protective devices and through-bus ratings up to 2000 amperes at 600V AC.

Type SB2 for Increased Service and More Load Cable Room Siemens SB2 switchboard can have extra depth behind the vertical bus in each distribution section, and contains main protective devices and through-bus rated up to 4000 amperes at 600V AC. The rear of all sections align as a standard. Front and rear alignment is available as an option. Type SB3 For Custom Options The SB3 switchboard is available with main bus up to 6000 amperes. All sections are front and rear aligned. Options include, but are not limited to, incoming and outgoing busway, Siemens ACCESSTM System communications, and cold sequence utility C.T. Compartments. Type RCIII Rear Connected Switchboards The RCIII switchboard differs from the SB3 switchboard primarily in the mounting of the devices in the distribution section. The branch and feeder devices are individually mounted. Because of this method of mounting, access to outgoing cable terminations must be from the rear of the switchboard. Bus bar extensions from the feeder devices are run back to the rear of the unit for easy access.

The front and rear of all sections align, designed for mounting away from the wall. RCIII switchboards will accommodate systems up to 6000 amperes, 600 volts maximum in any three-phase threewire or three-phase four-wire configuration. The main bus can be specified for 600 to 6000 ampere rating. Main devices and bus ties are available up to 5000 amperes, branch devices up to 2000 amperes. As with Type SB3, the RCIII switchboard can be of indoor or outdoor NEMA 3R construction. Switchboard Distribution Sections All standard distribution sections are 90 in. (2286) mm) high and 38 in. (965 mm) wide. Optional height of 70 in. (1778 mm) and optional width of 32 in. (813 mm) and 46 in. (1168 mm) are also available. SB1 distribution sections are 20 in. (508 mm) deep. For deeper sections, SB2 and SB3 switchboards must be chosen. SB2 distribution sections have a standard depth of 20 in. (508 mm) but can also be specified in depth of 28 in. (711 mm) and 38 in. (965 mm) when additional space is required. Rear access is required to make use of the additional depth of the SB2 and SB3 switchboards, and to provide access to bus connections, where required. SB2 may be installed against a wall.

See Section 1 of this Guide for a complete discussion of Siemens ACCESSTM system.

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

99

SentronTM Switchboards

Types SB1, SB2, SB3, and RCIII

General

7

SentronTM Switchboards

RCIII Switchboard ­­ Fixed Mounted Devices

Table 7.2

Switchboard Type SB1 SB2 SB3 RCIII

Main Devices

Molded Case Circuit Mounting Breaker Individual Panel Fixed Yes 400-2000A 400-1200A Yes Yes 400-3200A 400-1200A Yes Yes 400-3200A Yes 400-1200A Yes No 400-3200A VacuBreak Fusible Switch Fixed 800-1200A 400-600A 400-1200A 400-600A 400-1200A 400-600A 400-1200A HCP Fusible Switch 400-1200A 400-1200A 400-1200A 400-1200A 400-1200A 400-1200A 400-1200A Bolted Pressure Fusible Switch Fixed 800-2000A -- 800-4000A -- 800-4000A -- 800-4000A Insulated Case Breaker -- 800-4000A -- 800-5000A -- 800-5000A Fixed / Drawout LV Power Circuit Breaker -- -- -- 800-4000A Drawout

RCIII Switchboard ­­ Drawout Mounted Devices

Table 7.3

Switchboard Type SB1 SB2 SB3

Branch Devices

Molded Case Circuit Mounting Breaker Individual Panel Fixed No 15-1200A Yes Yes -- 15-1200A Yes Yes 400-3000A Yes No 15-1200A 100-2000A VacuBreak Fusible Switch Fixed 30-600A 800-1200A 30-600A 800-1200A 30-600A 100-1200A HCP Fusible Switch 400-1200A 400-1200A 400-1200A 400-1200A 400-1200A 400-1200A Bolted Pressure Fusible Switch Fixed -- -- -- 800-4000A -- 800-4000A Insulated Case Breaker -- -- -- 800-2000A -- -- 800-4000A Fixed / Drawout LV Power Circuit Breaker -- -- -- -- -- 800-1600A Drawout

Table 7.1

General

Install Against Wall? Yes Yes No No

Main Switch- Bus board Ampere Rating Type SB1 to 2000 SB2 to 4000 SB3 to 6000 RCIII to 6000

Connected Front Front Front Rear

Access Front Front Rear Rear

RCIII

Yes-Rear

Distribution section with two high 800 or 1200A Vacu- Break is 28 in. (711 mm) deep. Distribution section with two high bolted pressure switch is 38 in. (965 mm) deep minimum. Width depends on branch device. See page 128. Fixed mounted only. Drawout or fixed mounted.

Table 7.4

Switchboard Type SB1 SB2 SB3 RCIII

Distribution Sections

Dimensions in inches (mm) Height Width Std. Opt. Std. 90 (2286) -- 38 (965) 90 (2286) 90 (2286) -- 70 (1778) 38 (965) 38 (965) Depth Std. 20 (508) 20 (508) 20 (508)

Access Front Front Front & Rear Rear

Opt. 32 or 46 (813 or 1168) 32 or 46 (813 or 1168) 32 or 46 (813 or 1168) 32 or 46 (813 or 1168)

Opt. -- 28 or 38 (711 or 965) 28, 38, 48, or 58 (711, 965, 1219 or 1473) --

90 (2286)

70 (1778)

25, 32, 38, (635, 813, or 965)

48 or 58 (1219 or 1473)

100

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

SentronTM Switchboards

Types SB1, SB2, SB3, and RCIII

Service Sections

Bussed or Non-Bussed Pull Sections With Siemens switchboards, a nonbussed pull section, or a cross-bussed pull section for underground feed can be selected. The unique cross-bussed section permits cable to be run straight from underground to the bus bars at the top of the section. Non-bussed pull sections have openings for carrying the underground feed cables to the service section bus. Typical switchboards consist of a service section, and one or more distribution sections. Service sections can be fed directly from overhead by cable or busway. When fed from underground, a separate pull section is usually added. The service section is then fed from the adjacent underground pull section. Bolted Pressure Switches, Vacu-Break® and HCP Switches equipped for bottom feed will accept cable directly from underground into the service section. Service Section Options Utility Metering In addition to the main disconnect, the service section usually contains utility metering provisions. "Hot" metering (CT`s on the line side of the main disconnect) is normal, but "cold" metering provisions (CT`s on the load side of the main disconnect) can also be furnished. Whether hot or cold metering is required, the CT's provided by the utility company will be mounted in a completely separate compartment. The compartment will be built to utility company standards, with hinged doors and provisions for metering equipment provided by the utility. with the main disconnect. A separate section would be needed only if a large instrument or an unusual number of instruments were required.

General

Extra Heavy Duty Breakers High-interrupting-capacity thermalmagnetic breakers, 400 ­ 2000 amperes, 600 volts AC, provide increased protections where high available fault currents exist, with the same convenience and accessory feature offered in standard interrupting capacity breakers. Solid-State Sensitrip® Full function breakers 400 ­ 3200 amperes, 600 volts AC, have solid-state circuitry which assures minimal damage through the quick interruption control of fault currents, and includes short-time delay and ground fault trip for branch device coordination. Fuseless Current Limiting Molded case breakers, 400 ­ 1600 amperes, 600 volts AC, with thermalmagnetic protection provide coordinated protection for branch devices and circuits where extremely high fault currents are available. Solid state current limiting molded case breakers also available in ratings of 400 ­ 1600A. Fusible Switches Vacu-Break® Fusible Switches, 400 ­ 1200 amperes, 600 volts AC, provide protection, coordination with branch protective fusible switches, and application flexibility in systems where high available fault currents are encountered. HCP Fusible Switch HCP switches, 400 ­ 1200 amperes, 600 volts AC, combine economy with extremely high interrupting capacity in conjunction with Class J and Class L fuses. Has visible contacts and optional auxiliary contacts, shunt trip and ground fault relaying. Bolted Pressure Switches Bolted pressure switches, 800 ­ 4000 amperes, 480 volts AC, combine economy with extremely high interrupting capacity in conjunction with Class L fuses. Options include short trip, ground fault relaying, and a wide range of other accessories.

Main Disconnect Options

Main protective devices can be mounted individually for quick access in an emergency. Switchboards will accommodate a variety of main protective devices. Selection depends on the characteristics of each electrical system. Type RL Power Circuit Breakers Power circuit breakers, 800 ­ 5000 amperes, 600 volts AC, with solid-state overcurrent trip devices offer storedenergy tripping plus optional ground fault protection, selective tripping, and a broad range of accessories.

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Type RL, LV Power Circuit Breaker

Type SB Encased Systems Breakers Insulated case circuit breakers, 800 ­ 5000 amperes, 600 volts AC, with solid-state trip devices, offer stored energy tripping plus optional ground fault protection, selective tripping, and a broad range of accessories.

Type SB Encased Systems Breaker Customer Metering Compartment

Customer Metering The service section often provides space for many user instrument requirements. Ammeters, voltmeters, and their associated selector switches can be mounted in the service section along

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Heavy Duty Standard interrupting capacity, thermalmagnetic breakers, 400 ­ 2000 amperes, 600 volts AC, provide protection that allows "immediate restoration of power" for normal system requirements. A wide range of accessory options is available, including shunt trip, motor operator, auxiliary switches, alarm switches, and others.

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

Ground Fault Relays All main protective devices, except Vacu-Break fusible switches, can be equipped with ground fault relays to comply with the National Electrical Code (Section 230-95) ground fault protection requirements.

CSI Section 16470

101

SentronTM Switchboards

Front-Connected Construction ­­ Types SB1, SB2, and SB3

Bus Bars Design Siemens switchboard bus bars are available in standard tin-finished aluminum or optional silver-finished copper. Standard bus is sized to limit heat rise to 65°C above an ambient temperature of 40°C maximum in accordance with UL 891. As an option, conductor material can be sized according to density limits, based on bus material. The applicable limits are: Aluminum -- 750 amperes / sq. in. Copper -- 1000 amperes / sq. in. In accordance with NEMA and UL 891 standards, at each distribution section, the through-bus capacity is reduced as load is taken off. The through-bus is tapered to a minimum of one-third the ampacity of the incoming service mains. If required by special system characteristics, switchboards can be supplied with optional full-capacity bus; i.e., the ampacity of the through-bus remains at the full ampacity of the main throughout the switchboard. Splice Plates All splice plates can be accessed, bolted, and unbolted from the front of the switchboard to make connection of adjacent sections easy. Each splice plate is attached with one 1/2-inch grade 2 bolt, and a 2-inch or 3-inch Belville washer on each end. This reduces installation time while increasing contact pressure at the joint. To make installation and servicing of the splice plates easier, all phase and neutral through-busses are stacked one above the other, eliminating the need to stuff bolts in between bus bars that are stacked one behind the other in the same horizontal plane. Disconnect Links in Service Entrance Equipment In switchboard service sections to be used as service entrance equipment on 1Ø3W and 3Ø4W systems, provisions must be included to isolate the neutral bus from the grounded service neutral. This removable link gives you the ability to check branch neutral continuity on the load side of the main disconnect. To maintain a service ground to the switchboard frame while the neutral link is removed, a bonding strap is connected from the switchboard frame to the neutral bus on the line side of the removable link. UL and "SUSE" (suitable for use as service entrance) labels will be furnished on

General

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Bus Bars and Lug Construction

Splice Plates

service sections specified for service entrance. Cable Terminals Screw mechanical connectors (lugs) are provided as standard equipment on all devices. However, compression connectors are available as an option on all main lugs, main bolted pressure switches, main power circuit breakers, main molded case, main fusible devices, and main insulated case circuit breakers. Distribution Sections Siemens switchboard distribution sections are engineered for accessibility and expanded use. For expanded wiring room and exceptional accessibility, generous top and bottom gutters have been created by locating through-bus in the rear center of the distribution section. In cable entrance sections, no obstructions are less than 8 in. (203 mm) above the floor, and no live bus bars are located less than 10 in. (254 mm) off the floor. So there is plenty of room to run cables into the distribution section for connections. Standard bolted gutter covers give complete access to load conductors. Optional hinged gutter covers can be furnished where quick access to load connectors is desired. Heavy channels form a rigid ring at the base and top of each section, and heavy gauge structural members are used for the vertical corner posts eliminating encroachment of additional bracing into the top and bottom gutter areas. To provide additional room for top load cable routing where needed, pull box extensions are available in heights of 10,15, 20, 25, and 30 in. (254, 381, 508, and 762 mm) to mount on any standard distribution section. Top plates on all sec-

Screw Mechanical Connectors

tions are easily removed in the field for drilling, punching, and cutting conduit entry holes. Because all distribution sections can accommodate any combination of panelmounted branch devices, including molded case circuit breakers, Vacu-Break fusible switches, and motor starters, future system modifications are easier to handle without adding switchboard sections. To make additional distribution sections easier to install when they are necessary, the through-bus in each distribution section is extended, and the end is predrilled to accept splice plate bolts. To add a section to an existing switchboard, set the new section flush against the side of the existing distribution section, and bolt together the bus bar splice plates.

102

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

SentronTM Switchboards

Front Connected Construction ­­ Types SB1, SB2, and SB3

Distribution Sections (cont'd) Distribution sections of SB1, SB2, and SB3 switchboards can accept any combination of molded case circuit breakers and fusible switches. If the system calls for a mixture of these devices, there is the option of grouping the devices in logical patterns within a single section. A separate section is not needed for each type of device. And because all types of devices can be put in a single section, the total number of sections required in the system can be reduced. For future modifications, devices can be added or replaced as the system grows and changes. If a motor starter has to be added after the installation, an entire switchboard section need not be provided to house it. It can be installed in any distribution section with available unit space. Operating Temperatures All distribution sections contain louvers both at the top and bottom to assure cool operation in accordance with UL Standard 891. Bus Location All through-bus to adjoining sections is located in the rear center of the distribution section. This design provides large, unobstructed wiring gutters at the top and bottom of each section. Wiring takes less time and costs less to install. Motor Starter Switchboards Type SB3 switchboards offer a complete line of group-mounted starters that provide a compact and convenient method of combining power distribution and control circuits in one location. Motor starter units are available with fully bussed circuit breaker or fusible VacuBreak units, factory-wired on the load side to full voltage, non-reversing starters to reduce installation time. Type A wiring is standard without terminal blocks. The fusible switch, circuit breaker, or starter unit is factory wired; however, control and load cabling is connected by the installer directly onto the starter. Type B wiring is available as an option. Control wiring is brought out to terminal blocks and identified. Starter load terminals are conveniently located near the vertical wiring gutters and adjacent to control terminal blocks. No wiring external to the unit is furnished. Type C wiring is not available in motor starter switchboards.

General

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Front Connected Switchboards, Type SB1

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

103

SentronTM Switchboards

Rear Connected Construction -- Type RClll

RClll Construction Details -- Distribution Feeder Section

Siemens Type RClll switchboard differs from front connected switchboards primarily in the distribution section. The branch and feeder devices are individually mounted. Because of this method of mounting, access to outgoing cable terminations must be from the rear. Bus bar extensions from the feeder devices are run back to the rear of the unit for easy access.

General

7 Molded Case Circuit

Breakers

Fixed or Plug-in Individually Mounted Devices This design consists of a front section where the distribution devices are mounted, a bus section in the center, and a cable termination area in the rear. The front metal cover represents a grounded protection for the operator at the front of the switchboard. The main through-bus runs near the bottom of the switchboard. Section bus risers from the main bus are located in the center of the distribution section with taps to branch breakers. The load side terminals of each front mounted device are extended through the bus compartment into the rear cable compartment. These bus extensions are insulated where necessary as they pass SentronTM Switchboards

Front View

Rear View

Type RClll Switchboard with Individually Mounted Molded Case Circuit Breakers

the main bus bars. Additional protection can be provided with optional barriers between devices and bus compartment, between individual devices, between bus and cable compartment, and between stationary frame. The drawout design of insulated case circuit breakers makes it possible to place the breaker in a fully withdrawn, disengaged test, or engaged position. The load side of each breaker has bus bars extending into the rear cable

vertical sections. For further information on Siemens molded case circuit breakers, see Section 17.

Type SB Encased Systems Breakers

Drawout or Fixed Mounted Devices Insulated case circuit breakers are individually mounted in their own compartments as standard. Metal barriers are provided at the sides of each compartment and an insulation horizontal barrier is located between breakers in the same vertical section. Access is provided through a removable cover on fixed mounted breakers and a hinged access door on drawout breakers. The insulated case circuit breaker drawout assembly is a self-contained, integral unit that permits quick circuit breaker replacement or inspection and maintenance of breakers without de-energizing the entire switchboard. The easily accessible and maintainable spring loaded primary disconnect fingers are mounted on the breaker. The drawout assembly consists of a stationary frame and a movable carriage to support the breaker. The secondary disconnects for accessory control circuits are mounted on the movable carriage. A matching set is mounted on the

compartment. Additional protection can be provided with optional barriers between the bus and cable compartment and between vertical sections. For further information on Siemens SB breakers, see Section 16.

Type RClll Switchboard with SB Encased Systems Breakers. Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

104

CSI Section 16470

SentronTM Switchboards

Rear Connected Construction -- Type RClll

Distribution Feeder Section Type SB Encased Systems Breakers

General

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Front View of Incoming Service and Distribution Feeder Section

Rear View of Bus and Cable Compartment of Feeder System ­­ Barriers Installed

Rear View of Bus and Cable Compartment of Feeder System ­­ Barriers Removed

Type RL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Transformer Connection

Front View Incoming Service and Distribution Feeder Section for Type RL Drawout LV Power Circuit Breakers.

Rear View

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

105

SentronTM Switchboards

Rear Connected Construction -- Type RClll

Type RL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers (cont'd)

Distribution Feeder Section Drawout low-voltage power circuit breakers are also individually mounted in their own compartments as standard. Metal barriers are provided at the sides and rear of each compartment and a horizontal metal barrier is located between breakers in the same vertical sections. Access is provided through a hinged metal door on each breaker compartment.

General

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Safe Closed-Door Drawout Mechanism The low voltage power circuit breaker can be moved from "connect" through "test" to "disconnect" position without opening the door. In the "connect" position, both the primary and secondary disconnects are engaged. In the "test" position, the primary disconnect terminals are disengaged; however, the secondary disconnects are maintained to permit operation of the circuit breaker. In the "disconnect" position, the primary and secondary disconnects are disengaged and separated a safe distance from the corresponding stationary terminals. In the "fully withdrawn" position, both primary and secondary contacts are disconnected and the circuit breaker may be inspected or removed for more complete accessibility. The load side of each breaker has bus bars extending from the rear of the primary disconnect through the bus compartment into the rear cable compartment. Additional optional barriers can be provided between bus and cable compartments and between vertical sections. Testing Testing conducted by Siemens includes both production testing of switchboard sections for compliance with UL requirements, and developmental, design verification, and quality control testing. Production tests check structural integrity and are performed on all switchboard sections in accordance with UL procedures. A test voltage equal to twice the rated voltage plus 1000 volts (Vt = 2Vr + 1000) is applied for one minute to each switchboard section to check the integrity of the conductor and insulator materials, and the switchboard assembly. These tests are performed routinely to verify proper equipment fabrication and assembly.

Type RCIII Cutaway Side View

For more sophisticated design verification and developmental testing a separate laboratory is used. This test lab is fully instrumented for advanced, multi-phase electrical test work over a wide range of system conditions. Among the tasks performed is the determination of heat rise at busway connections, and at protective device terminations on both line and load sides. All heat rise tests are conducted in strict accordance with applicable UL standards. Heat rise data from the tests are carefully compared to UL allowable levels.

Another important laboratory program is the systematic verification of short circuit withstand capabilities for all switchboard conductor materials. Switchboard bus has been thoroughly tested and is UL short circuit withstand rated (UL File #E-22578). Switchboard sections with designs conforming to test specifications will carry a label noting the short circuit current withstand rating applicable to that section. For additional information on Siemens RL breakers, see pages 54-61.

106

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

SentronTM Switchboards

Modifications and Accessories

Metering

Utility Metering Requirements for power company metering and instrument transformer requirements vary with serving utility. Typically, utility company current transformers require a 30 in. (762 mm) high compartment in SB1, SB2, SB3, and RCIII construction. Service sections meet most utility metering standards. Customer Metering A full compartment of switchboard instruments with appropriate current transformers, potential transformers and selector switches are available in all Siemens switchboards. The meters and instrument switches are mounted on hinged panels with potential transformers and fuses behind the door. Current transformers are mounted on the main bus or, in the case of branch feeder metering, at the load terminals of the branch protective device and normally do not require additional unit space. 4300, 4700 and 4720 Power Meters The 4300 Power Meter is provided as a standard metering option for SB1, SB2, SB3, and RCIII switchboards. Alternate metering options for SB3 and RCIII See Section 1 include the higher accuracy 4700 Power Meter or analog metering equipment if specified. The 4300, 4700 and 4720 Power Meters are microprocessor-based, three-phase meters that provide advanced features at an affordable price. These meters are designed as an alternative to full-featured digital instrumentation packages, providing highly accurate, reliable, transient surge and hipot-withstand capabilities. Voltage and amperage measurements are true RMS, including harmonics. The 4300, 4700 and 4720 Power Meters can be configured to operate in Wye (Star), Delta, or single-phase voltage modes. The meter is equipped to monitor the measurements shown in Table 7.5. The display module has a high visibility, liquid crystal display (LCD). Functions buttons display measured data, including volts, amperage, power function, all three voltage and amperage phases. Replacing analog meters and selector switches, the two-module design simplifies wiring and reduces installation time. This makes the Power Meter ideally suited for economical metering on threephase industrial and commercial switchboards. A communications port allows the power meter to be used as a standalone power monitoring station or as one element in a large energy-management network. When used as part of a Siemens ACCESS installation, the 4300, 4700 and 4720 Power Meters can communicate with up to 128 ACCESS-compatible devices. Using a direct PC connection or a dial-up modem, the module interfaces with Siemens SIEServeTM on-line software that monitors any ACCESS component on the electrical distribution system. Ammeters and Voltmeters (Analog) Ammeters are switchboard type with ±1% accuracy, 0 to 6000 amperes maximum. The included instrument switch will provide positions to read each phase and will include an OFF position. Panel type ammeters with ±3% accuracy, 800 ampere maximum, can be furnished for branch feeder metering to conserve panel space. Voltmeters are switchboard type with ±1% accuracy, 0 to 600 volts AC. The included instrument switch provides positions to read each phase-to-phase voltage and each phase-to-neutral voltage, and has an OFF position. Current Transformers / Potential Transformers Potential transformers are recommended wherever the system voltage exceeds 150 volts AC phase-to-neutral to lower voltage levels for instrument switches and meters mounted on the switchboard front panel.

General

4 digit indicator

4 digit

5 digit / 8 character

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Siemens 4300 and 4700 Power Meters

Table 7.6--Power Meter Features

Metering Features Phase currents Avg. phase current Ampere demand Phase voltages Avg. phase voltage Line voltages Avg. line voltage kW kVA kVAR kW demand kW hours kVAR hours Power factor Frequency Hz Power Meter Accuracy 4300 ± 0.5% ± 0.5% N/A ± 0.5% ± 0.5% ± 0.5% ± 0.5% ± 1.0% ± 1.0% ± 1.0% ± 1.0% ± 1.0% N/A ± 2.0% 0.2Hz 4700 ± 0.2% ± 0.2% ± 0.2% ± 0.2% ± 0.2% ± 0.2% ± 0.2% ± 0.4% ± 0.4% ± 0.4% ± 0.4% ± 0.4% ± 0.4% ± 1.0% 0.2Hz 4720 ± 0.2% ± 0.2% ± 0.2% ± 0.2% ± 0.2% ± 0.2% ± 0.2% ± 0.4% ± 0.4% ± 0.4% ± 0.4% ± 0.4% ± 0.4% ± 1.0% 0.2Hz

Table 7.7 Available CT Ratios -- Ampere Rating

100:5 150:5 200:5 300:5 400:5 500:5 600:5 800:5 1000:5 1200:5 1500:5 2000:5 2500:5 3000:5 4000:5 5000:5 6000:5

Table 7.5--Number of CT's and or PT's required for Typical Meters Applied on Selected System Voltages

Watthour Meters System 1Ø3W 3Ø3W 3Ø4W Volts 120/240 240 480 120/240 120/208 277/480 Ammeter C/T 2 2 2 3 3 3 Voltometer P/T Scale -- -- 2 -- -- 3 0-300 0-300 0-600 0-300 0-300 0-600 2 Element C/T P/T 2 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 2.5 Element C/T P/T -- -- -- 3 3 3 -- -- -- -- -- 2 3 Element C/T P/T -- -- -- -- 3 3 -- -- -- -- -- 3 Wattmeter C/T P/T 2 2 2 3 3 3 -- 2 2 2 -- 2 Varmeter C/T P/T 2 2 2 3 3 3 -- 2 2 2 -- 2 Power Fac- Frequency Synchrotory Meter Meter scope C/T 1 1 1 1 1 1 P/T -- 2 2 2 2 2 P/T -- -- 1 -- -- 1 P/T -- 2 2 -- -- 2

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

107

SentronTM Switchboards

Modifications and Accessories

Motor Control

Table 7.8

NEMA Size 0, 1 2 3 4 FVNR 50 VA 100 VA 150 VA 250 VA

General

½ Auxiliary Switch A or B Type for Molded Case Breakers (not available on Vacu-Break units) Application Note: Mounting Height of FVNR Motor Starter Increases by 2.5 in. (64 mm) when Control Transformer is Furnished Master Control Power Transformers require individual starter secondary disconnecting means (1996 NEC 430-74).

½ Standard Control Power Transformers: 480 / 240 / 120 Volts AC ½ Pushbutton: Two-Unit Start-Stop, Open-Close, Etc.

½ Selector Switch: 1-Pole, DoubleThrow (ON / OFF); 2-Pole, DoubleThrow (hand / off / auto) ½ Pilot Lights: Red or Amber (neon type); Green (incandescent type, includes auxiliary interlock); Transformer and Push-to-Test type Pilot Lights Available ½ Auxiliary Interlocks: Sizes 1­4 ½ Control Relays (may increase mounting height)

7 Type RL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Static Trip® III Microprocessor-Based Tripping The Static Trip III trip unit comes in four models for maximum flexibility. Table 7.9 shows the functions of the various models. (See pages 13, 56-57). The parameters measured by the Static Trip IIIC / CP trip units are shown in Table 7.11. For protective relay functions, Table 7.10 shows how the Static Trip IIICPX trip unit can be used. All communicating Static Trip III trip units include a local communication port that supports the breaker mounted display unit or BDU. The BDU features a highStatic Trip III Model III IIIC

SentronTM Switchboards

visibility alphanumeric display. Real-time metered values, min / max values, event log data and setpoint data can be read on the BDU in straightforward engineering units. Alarm and relay setpoint can be configured using the BDU keypad. For complete information on Type RL breakers, see pages 54­61. Table 7.11--Static Trip III Trip Unit Settings

T: Long Time Setting (X Sensor Rating) .5, .55, .6, .65, .7, .75, .8, .85, .9, .95, 1.0 S: Short Time Pickup (X LT Setting) 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 12 I: Instantaneous Pickup (X Sensor Rating) 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 15 G: Ground Fault Pickup (% Ground Sensor) 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, Delay (Seconds @ 6X Setting) 3.5, 6, 10 17, 30 Delay (Seconds) .08, .15, .22 .30, 40 Delay (Seconds) No Intentional Delay Delay (Seconds) .10, .25, .40

Table 7.9--Static Trip III Trip Unit Functions

Functions Self-Powered Overcurrent Protection RMS Sensing Switchable Thermal Memory Ground Fault Protection LCD Target Protective Microprocessor Watchdog Pickup LEDs Zone Interlocking Retrofit Universal Mounting Package RS-485 Communications Port Breaker Display Unit Port Communications Microprocessor Watchdog Comm Watch LED Backup Shadow Protection Trip Log Alarm Relay Output Trip Unit Status Indication Breaker Position Indication Breaker Operation Counter Communication Open/Close/Trip Event Log Phase Current Metering Ground Current Metering Neutral Current Metering Min/Max Current Log Power Metering Functions Min/Max Power Log Extended Protective Relaying Extended Trip Log

Requires additional wiring to meet specific application. Supports optional Breaker Display Unit Accessory. Included when ground fault protection specified.

IIICP

IIICPX

opt.

opt.

opt.

opt.

opt. opt. -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

opt. opt.

opt. opt.

opt. opt.

opt.

opt.

opt.

opt.

opt.

opt.

Pickup is fixed at 1.1 times long time setting.

Table 7.12--Static Trip III Metering Functions

Measured Parameters Phase Current Avg. Phase Currents Ground Current Neutral Current Phase Voltages Avg. Phase Voltage Line Voltages Avg. Line Voltage kW kW Demand kW Hours kW Hours Reverse kVA kVAR kVAR Hours Power Factor Frequency Model IIIC IIICP

opt.

opt.

opt.

-- -- -- --

-- --

opt. -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

opt.

Requires "N" option and neutral current sensor. Open command uses alarm relay output and restricts use for other alarm functions. Close command requires electrically operated breaker.

Table 7.10--Static Trip IIICPX Protective Relay Functions

Protective Function Current Unbalance Voltage Unbalance Overvoltage Undervoltage Reverse Power Overfrequency Underfrequency Setting Range 5­50% 5­50% 60­660V 60­660V 10­2000kW 50.0­70.0Hz 45.0­60.0Hz Typical Applications Motors Generators

-- -- -- --

--

Mains --

-- --

-- --

Included when ground fault protection specified. Requires "N" option and neutral current sensor. Only displayed for four wire systems.

108

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

SentronTM Switchboards

Modifications and Accessories

SB Encased Systems Breakers

½ ½ ½ ½ ½ ½ ½ ½ ½ ½ Shunt Trip Auxiliary Switches, up to 6 N.O. / N.C. Undervoltage Release Electronic "Bell Alarm" Module Electric Charging Motor Operator with Electronic Controller Integral Local Electric Close Option Integral Kirk-Key Interlock on SB Close Blocking Device Trip Padlock Device Position Padlock Device (Drawout) ½ Cell Switches, 4 N.O. / N.C. (Mounted on Drawout Stationary Element) ½ Automatic Safety Shutters ½ Kirk-Key Provision (Mounted on Drawout Stationary Element) ½ Mechanical Interlock ½ Capacitor Trip Device ½ Remote Indication / Relay Panel ½ Auxiliary Power Module (for benchtesting trip unit) ½ TS 31 Universal Test Set

Frame Ampere Rating (In) 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000

General

Table 7.13--Available Rating Plugs

Rating Plug Amperes (Ir) 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 600, 700, 800, 1000, 1200 800, 1000, 1200, 1600 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000 1600, 2000, 2500 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200, 4000 2500, 3000, 3200, 4000, 5000

For additional SB breaker information, see Section 16.

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Table 7.14--SB Breaker Trip Unit Ratings (Ir = Rating Plug Value; In = Frame Ampere Rating)

Current Setting (x Current Rating P/US) Long Time (T) Short Time (S) Pickup Delay (Sec.) 2.5, 5.5, 8, 10, 14, 17, 21, 25, 30 800­2000A 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 .07, .1, .15, .2, .3 seconds .07, .1, .15, .2, .3 seconds 800­2000A 25kA 800­1200A 25kA 2000A 35kA 3200A 50kA 2500­5000A 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 4000­5000A 65kA 2500­5000A 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 Frame Amp Rating Pick up (xIr) Delay (I2t) out Delay (I2t) in Adjustable Instantaneous Pick-up (I) Instantaneous Override Ground Fault (G) Frame Amp Rating Pick up (xIr) Frame Amp Rating Fixed Frame Amp Rating In 400, 800, 1200 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Delay (Fixed) Delay (I2t) Current equal to 6 times Ir Current equal to 8 times Ir .5, .6, .65, .7, .75, .8, .85, .9, .95, 1.0

Available Setting (In) 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 20, 26, 32, 38, 44, 50, 56, 62, 68, 75 20, 23, 27, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44, 48 20, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31, 33, 35, 37 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30 Setting fixed at 1200A .1, .2, .3, .4, .5 seconds @ .5 = In .1, .2, .3, .4, .5 seconds @ .5 = In .500 seconds maximum No trip point setting exceeds 1200 amperes

1

23

22

18

19

21

20

SB Trip Unit Replaceable Rating Plugs Adjustable From 50­100% of Frame Rating. Continuous Self-Diagnostic "Watchdog" Integral Test Functions for Phase and Ground Fault (Trip and No-Trip Tests) External Power Source Allows Bench Testing of Stand-Alone Trip Unit Plug-in Display Modules for Current and Energy Display Capabilities Long Time Continuous Current Setting Long Time Delay Band Setting

Static Trip III Trip Unit Short TIme Pickup Setting Short Time Delay Band Setting Instantaneous Pickup Setting Integral LED Trip Indicators Full Communications Capability Via Siemens ACCESS Network LCD Target Thermal Memory Switch Short Time I2t Ramp Switch Zone Interlock Switch

21 22 23

SB-EC Trip Unit Zone Interlocking Input / Output and Future Options LCD Display Key Pad Test Connector Serial Port System Check Leds System Status Leds

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

109

SentronTM Switchboards

Modifications and Accessories

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

½ Alarm Switch for remote indication and / or pilot device operation when breaker is tripped automatically. ½ Shunt Trip (electric open-manual close) for remote tripping of breaker. Includes cut-off switch. Specify control voltage. ½ Undervoltage Trip automatically trips breaker when voltage is reduced 35%­70% of coil rating. Specify Control Voltage. ½ Auxiliary Switch 1A and 1B, 2A and 2B, etc. ½ Telemand Motor Operator (electric open and close). Operating Voltage 48V DC; 120, 240V AC. ½ Ground Fault Relay (requires shunt trip). Table 7.15

Maximum Ampere Rating 600 1200 1600

General

Maximum Continuous Current Range Ground Fault Range Percentage of Max. Time in Cont. Amps Seconds 20-70% 0.10-0.40 20-70% 0.10-0.40 20-70% 0.10-0.40

Sensitrip® Breaker Adjustment Range Overview

Available Amperage Percentage Maximum Range of Max. Range 200-600 20-100% 40-600 600-1200 20-100% 120-1200 1200-1600 20-100% 240-1600 More Details on Page 329330

Breaker Frame SJD, SLD SMD, SND SPD

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Table 7.16

Function Continuous Ampere (Ir)

Breaker Functions (In = Nominal Rating of Circuit Breaker)

Performance Varies the level of current the circuit breaker will carry without tripping. Completely adjustable from 20 to 100% of breaker's continuous ampere rating. (Ir = % of In) Referred to as the "overload" position, this function controls the breaker's "pause-in-tripping" time to allow low level, temporary inrush currents such as those encountered when starting a motor to pass without tripping. Adjustable settings from 3 or 25 seconds at 6 x Ir are possible. Controls the amount of high current the breaker will remain closed against for short periods of time, allowing better coordination. Adjustable between 1.5 to 10 times the continuous ampere setting of the circuit breaker (i.e., adjustable from 1.5 to 10 times Ir). Controls the amount of time (from .05 to .2 seconds in fixed time, or .2 seconds at 6 x lr in the l2t ramp mode) a breaker will remain closed against high fault current. This function is used in concert with the Short-Time Pickup function to achieve selectivity and coordination. (A pre-determined override automatically preempts the setting at 10.5 times the maximum continuous ampere setting In.) Determines the level at which the circuit breaker trips without an intentional time delay. The instantaneous pickup function is adjustable from 2 to 40 times the continuous ampere setting (lr) of the breaker. (Anytime an overlap exists between the instantaneous and short-time pickup settings the instantaneous automatically takes precedence.) Controls level of ground fault current which will cause circuit interruption to ocurr. Complies with National Electric Code, Article 230, Section 95(a) for maximum trip point settings. Adjustable from 20 to 70 percent of the breaker's maximum continuous ampere setting (In). Adds a predetermined time delay to the trip point once ground fault pickup level is reached. Inverse l2t ramp is standard which provides better tripping selectivity between the main and feeder or other downstream breakers.

Vacu-Break® Fusible Switches

All Vacu-Break fusible switches include: ½ Voidable Cover Interlock ½ Quick-Make, Quick-Break Operation ½ Positive ON / OFF Action ½ Padlockable Handle Design (at ON or OFF) ½ Vacu-Break Arc Control (i.e., enclosed arc chamber, double-break magnetic arc blowout) ½ Clampmatic Pressure Spring Force On Closed Contacts ½ Spring-Reinforced Fuse Holders For 250V switches (30 to 600A): ½ Class R Rejection Type Fuse Holders for all units except the 2.5 in. (64 mm) high unit, which is suitable only for NEC Class H, K1 and K5 fuses. For 600V switches (30 to 600A): ½ Class R Rejection Type Fuse Holders or Class J Fuse Holders.

Long-Time Delay

Short-Time Pickup

Short-Time Delay

Instantaneous Pickup

Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay

Bolted Pressure Switches

These switches are suitable for use on systems capable of delivering fault current up to 200,000 amperes symmetrical RMS when equipped with Class L fuses. All bolted pressure switches include: ½ Fuse Door Interlock ½ Quick-Make, Quick-Break Operation ½ Bolted Pressure Force on Operation ½ Bolted Pressure Force on Closed Contact ½ Padlockable Handle (in the "open" position only)

Accessories and modifications: ½ Shunt Trip (electrical open-manual close) ½ 120V AC Standard Control Voltage ½ Electrical Operator (electrical open specify system voltage) ½ Ground Fault Relay (requires shunt trip) ½ Blown Fuse Trip (switch opens when any one fuse blows -- requires shunt trip) ½ Blown Fuse Indicating Lights ½ Phase Failure Relay with Capacitor Trip (detects failure of any one phase and opens switch -- requires shunt trip, specify system voltage) ½ Auxiliary Contacts

HCP Fusible Switches

Rated 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical when equipped with Class L fuses. Standard features include: ½ High Contact Silver Alloy Contacts ½ Heavy Duty Quick-Make, Quick-Break Accessories include: ½ Undervoltage Release -- Instantaneous ½ Remote Spring Release Closing ½ Remote Trip Signaling ½ Bell Alarm with Lockout ½ Shunt Trip with Standard Control Voltages of 120, 240, 480V AC; 12, 24, 48 and 125V DC.

110

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

SentronTM Switchboards

Interrupting Ratings of Disconnect Devices

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Normal and Heavy Duty Normal duty breakers are designed for commercial, industrial, institutional and other heavy duty applications and rated to 600 volts AC; 250 volts DC. Heavy Duty breakers have higher interrupting ratings than normal duty.

Table 7.17 Interrupting Ratings of Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Maximum Interrupting Capacity Symmetrical RMS Amperes VAC 240V 480V 600V In DC Amperes (VDC) 250V 500V Maximum Available Ampere Amperage Breaker Rating Range Type Normal Duty -- Thermal-Magnetic BQH 100 15-100 BLH BQD 125 15-125 BL 225 60-225 QJ2 400 200-400 JXD2 Heavy Duty -- Thermal-Magnetic 100 15-100 ED2 ED4 125 15-125 ED6 225 60-225 QJH2 250 70-250 FXD6/FD6 400 200-400 JXD6/JD6 600 250-600 LXD6/LD6 LMXD6/LMD6/ 800 500-800 MXD6/MD6 1200 800-1200 NXD6/ND6 1600 1200-1600 PXD6/PD6 2000 1600-2000 RXD6/RD6 Heavy Duty -- Solid-State Trip 400 200-400 SJD6 600 200-400 SLD6 800 200-400 SMD6 1200 800-1200 SND6 1600 200-400 SPD6 3200 2000-3200 STD6 Extra Heavy Duty -- Thermal-Magnetic 100 15-100 HBL 15-125 HED4 15-125 HHED6 125 60-225 QJ2-H 70-250 HFD6 250 70-250 HHFD6 200-400 HJD6/HJXD6 400 200-400 HHJD6/HHJXD6 200-600 HLD6/HLXD6 600 400-600 HHLD6/HHLXD6 500-800 HLMD6/HLMXD6 800 500-800 HMD6/HMXD6 1200 800-1200 HND6/HNXD6 1600 1200-1600 HPD6/HPXD6 2000 1600-2000 HRD6/HRXD6 Extra Heavy Duty -- Solid-State Trip SHJD6 SHLD6 SHMD6 SHND6 SHPD6 SHTD6 3200 2000-3200 SHHTD6 Current-Limiting -- Thermal-Magnetic 125 15-125 CED6 250 70-250 CFD6 400 200-400 CJD6 600 400-600 CLD6 800 500-800 CMD6 1200 800-1200 CND6 1600 1200-1600 CPD6 Current-Limiting -- Solid-State Trip 400 40-400 SCJD6 600 60-600 SCLD6 800 120-800 SCMD6 1200 160-1200 SCND6 400 600 800 1200 1600 40-400 60-600 120-800 160-1200 240-1600

Technical

22,000 -- 10,000 65,000 10,000 65,000 22,000

-- 14,000 -- -- -- 18,000 25,000 -- 35,000

-- -- -- -- -- -- 18,000 -- 22,000

-- -- -- 30,000 5,000 30,000 --

-- -- -- -- -- -- 18,000 -- 18,000

7

SentronTM Switchboards

65,000 25,000 50,000

30,000 25,000

Type FD6, FXD6 Heavy Duty Thermal-Magnetic Breaker

35,000 65,000 50,000 85,000 65,000 100,000 42,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 65,000 -- 42,000 65,000 -- 65,000 100,000 65,000 100,000 65,000 100,000 50,000 -- -- 25,000 -- 25,000 25,000 35,000 50,000 35,000 50,000 25,000 -- 30,000 -- -- 30,000 -- 30,000 -- 30,000 -- -- -- -- -- 25,000 -- 25,000 -- 35,000 -- 25,000 -- --

Extra Heavy Duty These are designed for heavy duty applications where the interrupting requirements exceed the ratings of heavy duty breakers. They are rated up to 600 volts AC and 250 volts DC. Solid State Trip Equipped with solid state tripping, and available in heavy duty and extra heavy duty interrupting ratings at 600V AC.

100,000

65,000

50,000

30,000

50,000

35,000 100,000 65,000 50,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 150,000 65,000 100,000 -- --

Type JD / LD Extra Heavy Duty Solid-State Trip

Current-Limiting These breakers incorporate the exclusive Siemens blow-apart interruption principle and meet the NEC requirements for current-limiting breakers. Current-limiting circuit breakers can limit the let-through l2t to a value less than the l2t of onehalf cycle wave of the symmetrical prospective current without any fusible elements when operating within their current-limiting range.

All breakers are 2-pole for DC rating. Extra heavy duty breakers are inherently fungus-proof an do not require special fungus treatment.

200,000 150,000

200,000 100,000 150,000 30,000 65,000 50,000

100,000

100,000

150,000 200,000 100,000

100,000 -- 65,000 --

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

111

SentronTM Switchboards

Interrupting Ratings of Disconnect Devices

Table 7.18 Type RL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Insulation Level Dielectric WithRated stand Rated Max. Voltage Voltage Volts Voltage Rating Short Time Rating Symmetrical Amperes 30,000 42,000 22,000 50,000 65,000 85,000 65,000 85,000 100,000 85,000 30,000 42,000 22,000 50,000 65,000 85,000 65,000 85,000 100,000 85,000 30,000 42,000 22,000 50,000 65,000 85,000 65,000 85,000 100,000 85,000 Short Circuit Rating Symmetrical Current With Without InstantInstantaneous aneous Trip Trip Amperes Amperes 30,000 30,000 65,000 42,000 42,000 22,000 65,000 50,000 65,000 65,000 85,000 85,000 85,000 65,000 100,000 85,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 85,000 30,000 30,000 65,000 42,000 100,000 22,000 65,000 50,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 85,000 85,000 65,000 100,000 85,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 85,000 42,000 30,000 65,000 42,000 100,000 22,000 65,000 50,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 85,000 85,000 65,000 130,000 85,000 130,000 100,000 130,000 85,000 Continuous Current Rating Amperes 75-800 75-800 75-800 75-1600 75-2000 75-2000 600-3200 800-4000 800-4000 2500-5000 75-800 75-800 75-800 75-1600 75-2000 75-2000 600-3200 800-4000 800-4000 2500-5000 75-800 75-800 75-800 75-1600 75-2000 75-2000 600-3200 800-4000 800-4000 2500-5000

Technical

Table 7.20 Switches Vacu-Break® Fusible

Maximum Interrupting Capacity In Symmetrical RMS Amperes, 240 to 600V AC 10,000 200,000 200,000 100,000

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Frame Size Breaker Amperes Type RL-800 RLE-800 800 RLI-800 RL-1600 1600 RL-2000 2000 RLE-2000 3200 RLE-3200 RL-4000 4000 RLE-4000 RL-5000 5000 RL-800 RLE-800 800 RLI-800 RL-1600 1600 RL-2000 2000 RLE-2000 3200 RLE-3200 RL-4000 4000 RLE-4000 RL-5000 5000 RL-800 RLE-800 800 RLI-800 RL-1600 1600 RL-2000 2000 RLE-2000 3200 RLE-3200 RL-4000 4000 RLE-4000 RL-5000 5000

Max. Ampere Rating 30 to 600

Fuse Class H, K1, K5 RK1, RK5 J

600

635

2200

Fuse Holder NEC Standard Class R Rejection Type Rejection Type --

800 1200

L

Table 7.21 Bolted Pressure Switches. All 600V AC Maximum 2 or 3 Poles

Ampere Rating 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 Class L Fuse Rating (Amperes) 601, 700, 800 1000, 1200 1500, 1600 1800, 2000 2500 3000 3500, 4000 5000 Fuse Interrupting Rating (Sym. RMS Amps)

480

508

2200

200,000

240 and 208

254

2200

Table 7.22

HCP Fusible Switches

Fuse Interrupting Rating (Sym. RMS Amps)

Table 7.19

Frame Size Amperes 800 1600 2000 3200 4000 5000

Type RLF Fused Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Voltage Rating Rated Volts Rated Max. Volts Insulation Level Dielectric Withstand Volts 2200 2200 600 2200 2200 200,000 200,000 4000- 6000 6000 Short Circuit Ratings Symmetrical Amps 200,000 200,000 Range Of Fuse Ratings Amperes 250-1600 800-3000 4000 2000- 5000 Continuous Current Rating Amperes 75- 800 75-1600 75-2000 600- 3200 800-4000* 800- 3200 2500- 5000

Fuse Class (Amperes) Ampere J T Rating L -- -- 400 400 -- -- 600 600 600, 601, -- 800 800 800 1200 -- 1000, 1200 1000, 1200

200,000

Type RLF-800 RLF-1600 RLF-2000 RLF-3200 & RFC-3200 Fuse Carriage RLF-4000 & RFC-4000 Fuse Carriage RLF-5000 & RFC-5000 Fuse Carriage

208 to 600

With the addition of fan cooling and 5000A copper main bus, a 4200A continuous rating is available. For complete details on Siemens RL Power Breakers, see pages 54 to 62. All circuit breakers (and drawout fuses and carriage, if applicable) are UL listed. For further information on Vacu-Breaker switches, see pages 355 to 370. 200,000A max. on 800A switch with "L" or "T" fuses and 1200A switch at 240V with "L" fuses. 5000A bolted pressure switch not UL listed. For use at 240V maximum system.

112

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

SentronTM Switchboards

Pressure Wire Connectors

Table 7.24

Breaker Type BQH BLH HBL BQD

Technical

Table 7.24

Breaker Type

Pressure Wire Connectors

Connector Applied to Amperage Range Cables per Connector Connector Wire Ranges Available

Pressure Wire Connectors (cont'd)

Connector Applied to Amperage Range Cables per Connector

Normal Duty -- Thermal-Magnetic #14 - #6 AWG Cu #12 - #8 AWG Al #8 - #6 AWG Cu 35 ­ 50 1 #8 - #4 AWG Al #8 - #4 AWG Cu 55 ­ 70 1 #8 - #2 AWG Al #4 - #1/0 AWG Cu 80 ­ 100 1 #2 - #1/0 AWG Al #2 - #1/0 AWG Cu BL 110 ­ 125 1 #1/0 - #2/0 AWG Al #6 AWG - 250 kcmil Cu QJ2 QJH2 60 ­ 225 1 pc. #6 AWG - 300 kcmil Cu QJ2-H #4 AWG - 300 kcmil Al #6 AWG - 300 kcmil Cu JXD2 200 ­ 400 1 pc. #4 AWG - 300 kcmil Al Heavy/Extra Heavy Duty, Current-Limiting -- Thermal-Magnetic #14 - #10 AWG Cu ED2 15 ­ 20 1 pc. ED4 #12 - #10 AWG Al ED6 25 1 pc. #10 AWG Cu. or Al HED4 HHED6 30 ­ 60 1 pc. #10 - #4 Cu. or Al CED6 1 Pole, CED6 30 ­100 1 pc. #10- #1/0 AWG Cu. or Al 15 ­ 30 1 30­60 1 Pole, CED6 110 ­125 30 ­125 2 ­ 3 Pole FXD6/FD6 HFD6, CFD6 HHFD6 JXD6/JD6 HJD6/HJXD6 HHJD6/HHJXD6 CJD6 LXD6/LD6 HLD6/HLXD6 HHLD6 CLD6 70 ­ 250 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. #4- #1/0 Cu. or Al #3/0 - 3 Cu #2/0- 1 Al #10 - #3/0 Cu. Only #6 AWG - 250 kcmil Cu #6 AWG - 350 kcmil Cu #4 AWG - 350 kcmil Al 3/0 - 500 kcmil Cu 4/0 - 500 kcmil Al 1 pc. 250 ­ 600 1-2 pcs. MXD6/MD6 NXD6/ND6 HND6/HNXD6 CMD6, CND6 LMD6, LMXD6 HLMXD6 500 ­ 600 1-2 pcs. 1-2 pcs. 700 ­ 800 1-3 pcs. 3/0 ­ 600 kcmil Cu 500 ­ 600 kcmil Cu 500 ­ 750 kcmil Al 3/0 - 500 kcmil Cu 4/0 - 500 kcmil Al #1 AWG - 500 kcmil Cu or Al 600 ­ 750 kcmil Cu 600 ­ 750 kcmil Al #1 AWG- 350 kcmil #1/0 AWG-500 kcmil Cu or Al 250 ­ 400 kcmil Cu 500 ­ 750 kcmil Cu 250 ­ 400 kcmil Al 500 ­ 750 kcmil Al 250 ­ 500 kcmil Cu or Al 750 kcmil Al 300 ­ 600 kcmil Cu or Al 300 ­ 600 kcmil Cu or Al 300 ­ 600 kcmil Cu or Al

Connector Wire Ranges Available Heavy / Extra Heavy Duty, Current-Limiting -- Solid-State Trip 3/0 - 500 kcmil Cu SJD6, SHJD6 200­400 1-2 pcs. SCJD6 4/0 - 500 kcmil Al 3/0 - 500 kcmil Cu SLD6, SHLD6 1-2 pcs. 250­600 SCLD6 4/0 - 500 kcmil Al #1 AWG - 500 kcmil SMD6, SHMD6 1-2 pcs. 500­600 Cu or Al SCMD6 SND6, SHND6 #1/0 AWG - 500 kcmil 1-3 pcs. 700­800 SCND6 Cu or Al 800­1200 SPD6 / SHPD6 STD6 / SHTD6 / SHHTD6 1200­1600 2000 3200 1-4 pcs. 1-5 pcs. 1-4 pcs. 1-6 pcs. 1-4 pcs. 250 ­ 500 kcmil Cu or Al 300 ­ 600 kcmil Cu or Al 750 kcmil Cu or Al 250 ­ 600 kcmil Cu or Al 4/0 - 750 kcmil Al or Cu

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Table 7.25 Vacu-Break Fusible Switches (Branch Connectors)

Ampere Rating 30 (2.5 in.) (64 mm) 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 1200 Cables per Connector 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 Wire Range #14 - #8 AWG #14 - #4 AWG #14 - #4 AWG #1/0 AWG #6 AWG - 350 kcmil #4/0 AWG - 500 kcmil #4/0 AWG - 500 kcmil #4/0 AWG - 500 kcmil #4/0 AWG - 500 kcmil Type Cu Cu or Al Cu or Al Cu or Al Cu or Al Cu or Al Cu or Al Cu or Al Cu or Al

Table 7.26 HCP Fusible Switches (Branch Connectors)

Ampere Rating 400 ­ 600 400 ­ 600 400 ­ 800 400 ­ 800 800 ­ 1200 800 ­ 1200 Cables per Connector 2 2 3 3 4 3 Wire Range #1 AWG-500 kcmil #1 AWG-500 kcmil #1 AWG-500 kcmil #1 AWG-350 kcmil #1 AWG-500 kcmil #250-500 kcmil Type Cu or Al Cu only Cu or Al Cu only Cu or Al Cu only

200 ­ 400

1-2 pcs.

Table 7.27 Fusible Bolted Pressure Switches (Branch Connectors)

Ampere Rating 800 1200 1600 2000 Cables per Connector 2 4 6 6 Wire Range #4/0 AWG - 750 kcmil #4/0 AWG - 750 kcmil #4/0 AWG - 750 kcmil #4/0 AWG - 750 kcmil Type Cu or Al Cu or Al Cu or Al Cu or Al

800 ­1200

1-3 pcs. 1-4 pcs.

Table 7.28

NEMA Size 00-1 2 3

Starters and Contactors (Lug Data)

Lugs per Pole 1 1 1 Wire Range #14 - #8 AWG #14 - #4 AWG #14 - #1/0 AWG Type Cu Only Cu Only Cu/Al

PXD6/PD6 HPD6/HPXD6 CPD6 PXD6/PD6 HPD6/HPXD6 RXD6/RD6 HRD6/HRXD6

1200 ­1600

1-5 pcs. 1-4 pcs.

1600 ­ 2000 1-6 pcs.

Terminals are UL listed for 60/75°C conductors; CSA listed for copper wire only. Optional -- use only in cases allowed by local codes. Use on load side only. This connector is of aluminum construction, but rated for copper cable only. 200A -- Apply this connector when continuous current setting is adjusted for lower ampacities. Not available with breaker or switch. Requires bussing to install.

114

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

SentronTM Switchboards

Standard C.T. Compartments

Dimensions

Service entrance switchboards often require that a utility current transformer compartment be included. The National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) has created a section covering utility C.T. compartments for inclusion in PB-2, the existing standard for switchboards. Siemens C.T. compartments have been designed to conform to this standard. All specific utility requirements take precedence but in the absence of any special requirements, the standard will be used.

Figure 1

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Figure 2

PB-2 5.06 Utility Transformer Compartment Switchboard assemblies containing current transformer compartments for utility metering shall be arranged as shown in Figures 1 through 4. All indicated dimensions are minimum except the mounting for the current transformer. Mounting shall be for either bar or window type transformers. The front of the compartment shall be accessible through a sealable hinged, single or double door or removable cover. Barriers shall be installed as required to prevent access through other than sealable doors or covers. EUSERC Member Utilities For all cases where incoming service is from below, underground pull sections are required. For EUSERC member utilities, underground pull sections require nonbussed sections for 400 ampere, lug landings for 600 and 800 ampere and bussed pull sections above 800 ampere. Other Utilities For all other utilities, non-bussed or bussed pull sections are required per local utility and code requirements.

Notes: The utility C.T. compartments may be in the upper or lower portion of the Service Section. Neutral may be located to the rear alongside ØA or ØC; -- alternate rear location between ØA and ØB, or ØB and ØC. All dimensions are shown in inches and mm. The neutral need not be located in the C.T. compartment, provided its location complies with 1993 NEC. article 300-20, and with UL as they relate to induced currents. Quantity and size of aluminum and copper bus per UL 891, or manufacturers' UL Listed sizes, based on temperature rise. Barrier material and thickness per UL 891. This standard is intended for C.T.'s built to ANSI C12.11-1978.

Figure 3

Figure 4

Table 7.29

Ampere Rating

NEMA Standard Only

Dimensions In Inches (mm) A B C F 10.00 9.00 6.44 7.50 (254) (229) (164) (191) 10.00 9.00 10.88 7.50 (254) (229) (276) (191) 7.50 11.50 6.02 9.00 (191) (292) (153) (229) 7.50 11.50 6.82 9.00 (191) (292) (173) (229) 7.50 11.50 7.07 9.00 (191) (292) (180) (229) 7.50 11.50 7.07 9.00 (191) (292) (180) (229)

Compartment Bus Dimensions In Inches (mm) Drilling Fig. H W D Figure 30 38 20 3 1 400­800 (762) (965) (508) 30 38 28 2 3 400­800 (762) (965) (711) 30 38 28 2 4 1200­2000 (762) (965) (711) 30 38 38 2 4 1200­2000 (762) (965) (965) 30 38 38 2 4 2500 (762) (965) (965) 30 38 38 2 4 3000­4000 (762) (965) (965)

G 10.50 (267) 17.50 (445) 17.50 (445) 19.00 (483) 19.00 (483) 19.00 (483)

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

115

SentronTM Switchboards

Service Sections -- Utility Metering and Multi-Main Disconnects

Hot Sequence Only

Top Entrance Cables or Busway Bottom Entrance Cables Only Non-Bussed Pull Section Bottom Entrance Cables Invert For Top Feed

Dimensions

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Standard Utility Metering Table 7.31 Standard Utility Dimensions

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Ampere Rating (MLO) 400 600 800 1000 1200 1600 2000 90 (2286) 15 (381) 30 (762) 65 (1651) 38 (965) 32 or 38 (813 or 965) All Types H1 Pull Box H2 Unit Space H3 H4 Width Minimum All Types W1 All Types W2 Depth - Minimum -- Letters Reference Chart Below D2 D1 Bussed Pull Section Distribution Section SB1 SB2 SB3 SB1 SB2 SB3 SB1 SB2 SB3 A C E A C E A C E A A B B B B C C D D D D E E F F F F A A B B B B C C D D D D E E F F F F A A A A A A C C C C C C E E E E E E

EUSERC Utility Metering Table 7.32 EUSERC Utility Dimensions

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Ampere Rating (MLO) 400 600 800 1000 1200 1600 2000 90 (2286) -- -- -- All Types H1 Pull Box H2 Unit Space H3 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) -- -- -- H4 65 (1651) 65 (1651) 65 (1651) 65 (1651) 65 (1651) 65 (1651) 65 (1651) -- -- -- Width Minimum All Types W1 32 or 38 (813 or 965) All Types W2 Depth - Minimum -- Letters Reference Chart Below D2 D1 Bussed Pull Section Distribution Section SB1 A A 32 or 38 (813 or 965) A A -- -- -- SB2 C C C C -- -- -- SB3 E E E E -- -- -- SB1 A A A A B B B SB2 C C C C D D D SB3 E E E E F F F SB1 A A A A A A A SB2 C C C C C C C SB3 E E E E E E E

Verify dimensions with local utility requirements. See page 129 for dimensions. See page 129 for unit space of disconnect devices. EUSERC Utility Notes: Not applicable for EUSERC. Busway available for SB3 only. Not allowed by Los Angeles Department of Water and Power or San Diego Gas & Electric. Some jurisdictions do not allow multi-main service equipment. 400 / 1000A fed by 500 KCMIL -- No pull box required. 400 / 1000A fed by 750 KCMIL -- 10.0" pull box required.

Depth Reference Chart

A B C 20 in. (508 mm) 28 in. (711 mm) 20, 28, 38 in. (508, 711, 965 mm) D E F 28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm) 20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in. (508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm) 28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)

120

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

SentronTM Switchboards

Service Sections -- Utility Metering & Single Main Disconnects (Standard Utilities)

Table 7.33 Standard Utility -- Hot Sequence (C.T.'s on Line Side of Main)

Depth Available Letters Reference Chart Below D SB1 SB2 SB3 RCIII A -- -- A C -- A -- -- B -- -- B -- -- B -- -- B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- A A A A B B B B B B -- -- -- -- -- C C -- C E -- C C -- D D -- D D -- D D -- D D G G G D D D G G G -- -- -- -- -- -- C C C C D D D D D D D D G G G E E E E J E E E E F F F F F F F F F F F H H H F F F H H H J J J J J J E E E E F F F F F F F F G G G J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J

Minimum widths shown. Refer to page 129 for optiona widths. Not required. C.T. compartment must be mounted in a bussed pull section. For Types SB3 and RCIII, drawout SB breakers are available as an option. Minimum depth SB3 ­ 38 in. (965 mm), RCIII ­ 48 in. (1219 mm). For fusible RLF breaker, utility compartment must be mounted in a bussed pull section. Busway available for Type SB3 only.

Dimensions

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width Pull Section Device Applies NonBussed Max. Pull To Switchboard Bussed UG Amp. Device Box Rating Type SB1 SB2 SB3 RCIII H1 H2 W1 W2 W3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers JXD2, JXD6, · · · · JD6, HJD6 400 14 (356) SJD6 · · · CJD6, SCJD6 · · · · · · LXD6, LD6, HLD6 20 (508) · · · · 600 SLD6 · · CLD6, SCLD6 · · · · LMXD6, LMD, HLMXD6, HLMD6, 800 MXD6, MD6, HMD6 · · · SMD6 20 (508) · · CMD6, SCMD6 32 (813) · · · · NXD6, ND6, HND6 1000 · · · SND6 · · 90 38 CND6, SCND6 (2286) (965) · · · · NXD6, ND6, 15 (381) HND6 1200 · · · SND6 · · CND6, SCND6 · · · · PXD6, PD6, HPD6 1600 · · · SPD6 -- · · CPD6, SCPD6 · · · · RXD6, RD6, 32 (813) 2000 HRD6 · · · SB2000S · · · -- SB2500S 2500 20 (508) · · · -- SB3000S 3000 25 (635) 3200 STD6, SHTD6, SHHTD6 · · · -- Insulated Case Circuit Breakers -- Stationary Mounted 800 · · · 10 (254) 32 (813) 20 (508) 1600 · · · Type SB 15 (381) -- 2000 · · · 90 38 Encased (2286) (965) Systems 2500 · · · 32 (813) Breaker 3000 · · · 20 (508) -- 4000 · · · Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers -- Draw-Out Fusible and Non-Fusible 800 · · 10 (254) 32 (813) 20 (508) 38 Type RL, 1600 · · RLF Low 15 (381) (965) -- 2000 · · 90 Voltage (2286) Power 2500 · · 32 (813) Circuit 3000 · · 20 (508) 46 (1168) -- Breaker · · 4000 Switches · · · · 14 (356) 400 · · · · 20 (508) 600 HCP · · · · 800 15H (381) · · · · 1200 800 · · · · 20 (508) 38 1000 · · · · Vacu-Break 32 (813) (965) · · · · 1200 90 · · · · 800 15 (381) (2286) · · · · 1000 · · · · 1200 1600 · · · · Bolted Pressure 2000 · · · · 2500 · · · -- 32 (813) 46 3000 · · · 20 (508) (1168) · · · 4000

Top Entrance Cables or Busway

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Bottom Entrance with Non-Bussed Pull Section Cables Only

Bottom Entrance with Bussed Pull Section Cables Only

Depth Reference Chart

A B C D 20 in. (508 mm) 28 in. (711 mm) 20, 28, 38 in. (508, 711, 965 mm) 28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm) E F G H J 20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in. (508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm) 28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm) 38 in. (965 mm) 38, 48, 58 in. (965, 1219, 1473 mm) 48, 58 in. (1219, 1473 mm)

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

121

SentronTM Switchboards

Service Sections -- Utility & Metering Single Main Disconnects (EUSERC Utilities)

Table 7.34 EUSERC Utility -- Hot Sequence (C.T.'s on Line Side of Main)

Depth Available Letters Reference Chart Below D SB1 SB2 SB3 RCIII A -- -- A -- -- A -- -- B -- -- B -- -- B -- -- B -- -- -- -- C C -- C C -- C C -- C C -- D B -- D B -- D B G G G E E E E E E E E E E E E B B B B B B B B H H H J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width Device Minimum Device Applies Applies Max. Pull Fig. Fig. To Switchboard To Figure Fig. 3 Amp. Device Box 1-3 2 Rating Type SB1 SB2 SB3 RCIII 1 2 3 H1 H2 W1 W2 W3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers JXD2, JXD6, · · · · JD6, HJD6 14 400 (356) SJD6 · · · CJD6, SCJD6 · · LXD6, LD6, HLD6 · · · · 20 32 600 SLD6 · · · (508) (813) CLD6, SCLD6 · · 32 (813) · · · · MXD6, MD6, HMD6 800 · · · SMD6 · · CMD6, SCMD6 NXD6, ND6, · · · · HND6 32 1000 (813) SND6 · · · 38 CND6, SCND6 90 · · (965) NXD6, ND6, (2286) · · · · HND6 1200 SND6 · · · CND6, SCND6 · · PXD6, PD6, · · · · HPD6 1600 20 38 SPD6 · · · (508) (965) -- 46 CPD6, SCPD6 · · (1168) RXD6, RD6, · · · · 2000 HRD6 · · · SB2000S · · · -- SB2500S 2500 -- · · · SB3000S 3000 -- · · · -- 32 3200 STD6, SHTD6, 52 (813) SHHTD6 (1321) Insulated Case Circuit Breakers -- Stationary Mounted 10 32 32 · · · 800 (254) (813) (813) 1600 · · · 15 Type SB -- (381) 38 90 · · · 46 2000 Encased (1168) (965) Systems (2286) · · · 2500 Breaker · · · 3000 -- 20 (508) 52 · · · 4000 (1321) Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers -- Draw-Out Fusible and Non-Fusible 32 32 10 · · 800 (254) 38 (813) (813) Type RL, · · -- (965) 1600 RLF Low -- 90 · · -- 2000 46 Voltage (1168) (2286) -- 46 Power · · 2500 Circuit (1168) -- · · 3000 -- Breaker · · 52 4000 -- -- (1321) Switches -- · · · · 400 · · · · 600 10 (254) HCP 800 · · · · 32 32 20 (508) (813) (813) 1200 · · · · · · · · 800 10 (254) Vacu-Break · · · · 1000 38 38 -- (965) 20 (508) (965) · · · · 1200 90 · · · · -- 800 32 32 (813) (813) (2286) · · · · 1000 -- 38 (965) · · · · -- 1200 · · · · -- 1600 Bolted Pressure 46 · · · · -- -- 2000 (1168) · · · -- 2500 · · · -- 46 3000 -- (1168) · · · 4000 52 (1321)

Dimensions

Top Entrance Cables or Busway

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Bottom Entrance with Non-Bussed Pull Section Cables Only

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- A A A A B B B B B B B B -- -- --

D D D G G G -- -- -- -- -- -- C C C C D D D D D D D D G G G

F F F H H H J J J J J J E E E E F F F F F F F F H H H

J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J

Bottom Entrance with Bussed Pull Section Cables Only

Depth Reference Chart

A B C D 20 in. (508 mm) 28 in. (711 mm) 20, 28, 38 in. (508, 711, 965 mm) 28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm) E F G H J 20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in. (508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm) 28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm) 38 in. (965, mm) 38, 48, 58 in. (965, 1219, 1473 mm) 48, 58 in. (1219, 1473 mm)

Minimum widths shown. Refer to page 129 for optional widths. Not required. C.T. compartment must be mounted in a bussed pull section. For Types SB3 and RCIII drawout SB breakers are available as an option. Minimum depth SB3 ­ 38 in. (965 mm), RCIII ­ 48 in. (1219 mm). For fusible RLF breaker, utility compartment must be mounted in a bussed pull section. Busway available for Type SB3 only.

122

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

SentronTM Switchboards

Service Sections -- Non-Utility Type with / wo Customer Metering & Main Disconnect

Table 7.35

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width Pull Box Device Applies NonBussed Max. To Switchboard Bussed UG Amp. Device Rating Type SB1 SB2 SB3 RCIII H1 W1 W2 W3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers JXD2, JXD6, · · · · JD6, HJD6 400 14 (356) SJD6 · · · CJD6, SCJD6 · · 32 (813) · · · · LXD6, LD6, HLD6 600 · · · SLD6 · · CLD6, SCLD6 MXD6, MD6, HMD6, · · · · LMXD6, LMD6, HLMD6, HLMXD6 800 · · · SMD6 20 (508) · · CMD6, SCMD6 32 (813) NXD6, ND6, HND6 · · · · 1000 SND6 · · · CND6, SCND6 · · 90 (2286) NXD6, ND6, · · · · HND6 38 (965) 1200 SND6 · · · CND6, SCND6 · · PXD6, PD6, · · · · HPD6 1600 SPD6 · · · -- CPD6, SCPD6 · · 32 (813) RXD6, RD6, HRD6 · · · · 2000 SB2000S · · · SB2500S · · · -- 2500 · · · SB3000S 3000 38 (965) -- STD6, SHTD6, 3200 32 (813) · · · SHHTD6 Insulated Case Circuit Breakers -- Stationary Mounted · · · 20 (508) 20 (508) 800 · · · 1600 Type SB · · · 2000 90 Encased 32 (813) -- (2286) 38 (965) Systems · · · 2500 Breaker · · · 3000 38 (965) · · · 4000 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers -- Draw-Out Fusible and Non-Fusible · · 20 (508) 20 (508) 800 Type RL, · · 38 (965) 1600 RLF Low -- · · 2000 90 Voltage 32 (813) (2286) Power · · 2500 Circuit · · 46 (1168) -- 3000 Breaker · · 38 (965) 4000 Switches 14 (356) 400 · · · · 600 · · · · HCP 800 · · · · 1200 · · · · 800 · · · · 20 (508) 32 (813) · · · · 1000 Vacu-Break 38 (965) · · · · 1200 90 (2286) · · · · 800 · · · · 1000 · · · · 1200 1600 · · · · Bolted Pressure 2000 · · · · 32 (813) · · · -- 2500 · · · 46 (1168) 3000 · · · 38 (965) 4000 Depth Available Letters Reference Chart Below D SB1 SB2 SB3 RCIII A -- -- A -- -- A -- -- A -- -- A -- -- B -- -- B -- -- -- C C -- C C -- C C -- C C -- C C -- D D -- D D B G E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E F F F F F H H J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J

Dimensions

Top Entrance Cables Pull Box

7

Bottom Entrance with Non-Bussed Pull Section

SentronTM Switchboards

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- A A A A B B B B B B B B -- -- --

D D D G G G -- -- -- -- -- -- C C C C D D D D D D D D G G G

F F F H H H J J J J J J E E E E F F F F F F F F H H H

J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J

Bottom Entrance with Bussed Pull Section

Bottom Entrance

Depth Reference Chart

A B C D 20 in. (508 mm) 28 in. (711 mm) 20, 28, 38 in. (508, 711, 965 mm) 28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm) E F G H J 20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in. (508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm) 28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm) 38 in. (965, mm) 38, 48, 58 in. (965, 1219, 1473 mm) 48, 58 in. (1219, 1473 mm)

For Types SB3 and RCIII, drawout SB breakers are available as an option. Minimum depth SB3 38 in. (965 mm), and RCIII 48 in. (1219 mm). For fusible RLF breaker, utility compartment must be mounted in a bussed pull section.

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

123

SentronTM Switchboards

Combination Sections -- Types SB1, SB2, and SB3

Combination Service Disconnect and Distribution Sections -- MCCB Main

SB1 and SB2 combination service / distribution sections house both a main service disconnect device and branch distribution disconnects. Switchboards can be furnished with "Suitable for Use as

400-1200A Main Breaker Without GFP

Dimensions

Service Equipment" labels, but include no provisions for utility metering or customer metering. Branch circuit device unit space varies, depending on the rating and consequent

1600-2000A Main Breaker With or Without GFP

physical size of the main disconnect device. If more unit space is required than is shown in the tables below, one or more additional distribution sections must be added.

1600-2000A MCCB With Line Through Bus

400-1200A Main Breaker With GFP

400-1200A MCCB With Line Through Bus

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Fig. 1 Top Entrance

Fig. 2 Bottom Entrance

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Unit Space U1 Pull Box Load Through-Bus H2 Without With

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

Table 7.36

Main Breaker with or without Ground Fault Protection

Width Depth Available Conduit Area Letters Reference Chart Below Main Mtg. Svc. D1 D2 Loca- Posi- Ent. SB1 SB2 SB3 SB1 SB2 SB3 K L tion tion Lbl. A C E B D F C -- C C -- C C C -- C C -- D D -- D D -- D E E E E E E E E E E E E E E F F F F F B B B B B A B B B B B B B B B B B B B D D D D D C D D D D D D D D D D D D D F F F F F E F F F F F F F Yes F F F F F F

Max. Amp. Breaker Rtg. Type JXD2, JXD6, JD6, HJD6 400 SJD6 CJD6, SCJD6 LXD2, LXD6, 600 HLD6, SLD6 CLD6, SCLD6 LMD, HLMD MXD6, MD6, HMD6 SMD6 CMD6,SCMD6 NXD6, ND6, HND6 SND6 CND6, SCND6 NXD6, ND6, HND6 SND6 CND6, SCND6 PXD6, PD6, HPD6 SPD6 CPD6, SCPD6 RXD6, RD6, HRD6

Device Applies To Switchboard SB1 SB2 SB3 H1 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·

Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. 4 & Unit 5 1 2 3 Space U2 W1 W2 W3 W4

46.25 56.25 (1429) 53.75 (1365) (1175)

32 32 (813) (813)

32 (813) or 38 (965)

800

· ·

--

·

1000

90 (2286)

53.75 (1365) 52.50 (1334) 42.50 (1080) 52.50 (1334) 52.50 (1334)

53.75 (1365) 45.00 52.50 (1334) (1143) 40.00 (1016) -- 52.50 (1334) 52.50 (1334) 38 38 (965) (965)

--

45.00 42.50 (1080) 40.00 (1016) (1143) 52.50 (1334) 52.50 (1334) 52.50 (1334) 52.50 (1334) 42.50 (1080) 40.00 (1016) 52.50 (1334) 52.50 (1334) -- -- 30.00 (762)

-- -- A -- -- A A -- -- -- 38 A (965) -- -- -- 38 A (965)

Yes

Top or Bottom 2.50 3.00 (64) (76)

Horiz.

1200

1600 2000

--

--

·

-- -- -- B 38 38 (965) -- (965) -- B

Top

Vert.

Depth Reference Chart

A B C 20 in. (508 mm) 28 in. (711 mm) 20, 28, 38 in. (508, 711, 965 mm) D E F 28, 38in. (711, 965 mm) 20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 508, 711, 965, 1219, 1437 mm) 28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 711, 965, 1219, 1437 mm)

Unit may be inverted. Load cables must exit bottom. Refer to Table 7.41 for dimensions. Not available with load through bus. Ground fault, if applied, uses 10 in. (254 mm) of unit space. See page 128 for unit space of disconnect devices. 46 in. (1168 mm) wide if 750 kcmil lugs required. Service entrance label at 480V requires ground fault. Pull box height: Standard 500 kcmil lugs = 10 in. (254 mm) Alternate 750 kcmil lugs = 15 in. (381 mm) For use with 100% rated breakers. Vertical mounted when using 100% rated devices.

124

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

SentronTM Switchboards

Combination Sections -- Types SB1, SB2, and SB3

Combination Service Disconnect and Distribution Sections Main Vacu-Break®

400 and 600A Vacu-Break 800 and 1200A Vacu-Break 400 and 600A Vacu-Break 800 and 1200A Vacu-Break

Dimensions

400 & 600A Vacu-Break Main Switch

7

H3

SentronTM Switchboards

Top Entrance and Invert for Bottom Entrance

Top Entrance and Invert for Bottom Entrance

Bottom Entrance Invert for Top Entrance

Bottom Entrance Invert for Top Entrance

Table 7.37--400­1200A Vacu-Break Switch Main

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Unit Space - H3 Top With Without Maximum Applies To Pull Load Load Switchboard Ampere Box Through Through SB1 SB2 SB3 H1 Rating H2 Bus Bus 400 600 800 1200 · · · · · · · · · · · · -- 90.00 (2286) 10.00 (2.54) 43.75 (1111) 41.25 (1048) 30.00 (762) 36.25 (921) 33.75 (857) 30.00 (762) 30.00 (762) Width Depth Available Letters Reference Chart Below

Unit Space H4 43.75 (1111)

W 38.00 (965) 38.00 (965)

Conduit D1 D2 Area SB1 SB2 SB3 SB1 SB2 SB3 K L C C D D E E F F B B B B D D D D F F F F 2.50 (64) 3.00 (76)

Service Main Entrance Location Label Top or Bottom Top or Bottom Yes Yes

A A B B

Depth Reference Chart

A B C D E F 20 in. (508 mm) 28 in. (711 mm) 20, 28, 38 in. (508, 711, 965 mm) 28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm) 20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm) 28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)

Load cables must exit bottom. Refer to page 129 for dimensions. Service entrance label at 240V only.

38 in. (965 mm) wide standard, 32 in. (813 mm) wide available as an option. See page 130 for unit space of disconnect devices. 15 in. (381 mm) pull box when alternate 750 kcmil lugs.

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

125

SentronTM Switchboards

Combination Sections -- Types SB1, SB2, and SB3

Combination Service Disconnect and Distribution Sections HCP Switch and Bolted Pressure Switch

400A ­ 1200A HCP 400 ­ 1200A HCP

Dimensions

400-1200A HCP Main Switch

400-1200A HCP Main Switch

7

H3

SentronTM Switchboards

Top Entrance and Invert for Bottom Entrance

Bottom Entrance Invert for Top Entrance

Table 7.38 400­1200A HCP Switch Main

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Maximum Applies To Switchboard Height Ampere Rating SB1 SB2 SB3 H1 400 · · · · · · 90.00 600 800 · · · (2286) 1200 · · · Depth Available Letters Reference Chart Below D1 D2 SB1 SB2 SB3 SB1 SB2 SB3 A C E B D F A C E B D F B D F B D F B D F B D F Service Main Entrance Location Label Top or Bottom Yes

Unit Space H3 46.25 (1175)

Width W 38.00 (965)

Conduit Area L K 2.50 (64) 3.00 (76)

Table 7.39--800­2000A Bolted Pressure Switch Main, with or without Ground Fault

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Top Pull Box -- H2 Maximum Applies To 500 750 Switchboard Ampere kcmil kcmil SB1 SB2 SB3 H1 Rating Lugs Lugs 800 1200 1600 2000 · · · · · · · · · · · · Depth Available Letters Reference Chart Below D SB1 SB2 B D D D D B B B

Unit Space H3

SB3 F F F F

Conduit Area K L

Service Main Entrance Location Label Yes Top

90.00 (2286)

10 (254)

20 (508)

30 (762)

2.50 (64)

3.00 (76)

Yes

Depth Reference Chart

Conduit Area Top or Bottom Conduit Area Top or Bottom

A B C D E F

20 in. (508 mm) 28 in. (711 mm) 20, 28, 38 in. (508, 711, 965 mm) 28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm) 20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm) 28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)

Load cables must exit bottom. See page 129 for dimensions. See page 130 for unit space of disconnect devices. On bolted pressure switch rated 1000A or greater without ground fault, service entrance label for 240V only. Not available with load thru bus. Conduit restricted to rear 10 in. (254 mm) for inverted bottom entrance.

38 (711 mm)

38 (711 mm)

Top Entrance

Bottom Entrance

126

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

SentronTM Switchboards

Distribution Sections -- Types SB1, SB2, and SB3

Main Lug Only ­­ 400A through 2000A

Top Feed Bottom Feed

Dimensions

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Bottom Entrance

Table 7.40--Main Lug Only Unit Space

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Suitable for Use As Service Entrance Equipment Yes Yes Yes Yes 42,000 100,000 Single without Through-Bus Only 1200 Multi With Through-Bus Single without Through-Bus Only 1600 Multi With Through-Bus Single without Through-Bus Only 2000 Multi With Through-Bus Yes 100,000

46 in. (1168) width available as an option. See page 130 for unit space of disconnect devices. Maximum of 6 disconnect devices only. SUSE service disconnects 1000A or higher on sodily grounded wye systems of more than150V to ground required ground fault protection. Ground fault uses 10 in. (254 mm) of unit space. See NEC 230-95 for additional details. This applies to branch devices 1000A or larger on non-service equipment unless ground fault protection is provided upstream at the service. See NEC 240-13 for further information.

Height Distribution Unit Space Lugs AIC Rating H1 Standard 500 kcmil 62.50 (1588) 60.00 (1524) 58.75 (1492) 51.25 (1302) 45.00 (1143) 57.50 (1461) 50.00 (1270)

Width

Depth Available Letters refer To Chart Below D SB1 SB2 SB3 A C C C E E E

Maximum Ampere Rating 400 600

Section Configuration Single without Through-Bus Only Single without Through-Bus Only Single without Through-Bus Only Multi With Through-Bus

Alternate Crimp 750 kcmil 600 kcmil Max. W 60.00 (1524) 56.25 (1429) 52.50 (1334) 45.00 (1143) 38.75 (984) 50.00 (1270) 42.50 (1080) 55.00 (1397) 55.00 (1397) 53.75 (1365) 46.25 (1175) 45.00 (1143) 53.75 (1365) 46.25 (1175)

K

L

200,000

32 or 38 (813 or 965)

A A

800

38 (965) 32 or 38 (813 or 965) 38 (965)

A A

C C

E E

Yes Yes

200,000 42,000 100,000

90.00 (2286)

2.50 (64)

3.00 (76)

A

C

E

Yes Yes

200,000 42,000 100,000 45.00 (1143) 38.75 (984) 45.00 (1143)

A A 38 (965)

C C

E E

Yes

200,000 42,000

A

C

E

A

C

E

Depth Reference Chart

A C E 20 in. (508 mm) 20, 28, 38 in. (508, 711, 965 mm) 20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in. (508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

127

SentronTM Switchboards

Distribution Sections -- Types SB1, SB2, and SB3

Unit Space for Disconnect Devices

Table 7.41 Unit Space Requirements -- Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Device Applies To Switchboard SB1 SB2 SB3 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1 · · · · · · · · · · · · -- 1 --

Conduit Area Top or Bottom Conduit Area Top or Bottom

Dimensions

2 High Vacu-Break Distribution Section

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width Height Total Poles Available 1P 2P 3P 18 6 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 -- 1 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 8.75 (222) 1 -- 32.00 (813) 6 -- 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 Unit Space H2 Twin Single Mounted Mounted 10.00 (254) 3.75 (95) 6.25 (159) 3.75 (95) 6.25 (159) 5.00 (127) 5.00 (127) -- -- 8.75 (222) 5.00 (127) 8.75 (222) -- 32.00 (813) 32.00 (813) 38.00 (965)

D for Type SB2 = 28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm) D for Type SB3 = 28, 38, 48, 58 in. (711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Max. Amp. Device Rating Type Branch Breakers BL, BLH, HBL, BQD 100 ED2, ED4, HHED6 ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HHED6 HED4, HHED6, ED2, ED4, 125 ED6 With Accessories CED6 CED6 With Accessories 225 QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H, HQJ2-H FXD6, FD6, HFD6, HFXD6, 250 HHFD6, HHFXD6 CFD6 JXD2, JXD6, JD6, HJD6, HJXD6, HHJD6, HHJXD6 400 SJD6, SHJD6 CJD6 SCJD6 LXD6, LD6, HLD6, HLXD6, HHLD6, HHLXD6 600 SLD6, SHLD6 CLD6 SCLD6 LMD6, LMXD6, HLMD6, HLMXD6 MXD6, MD6, HMD6, 800 HMXD6 SMD6, SHMD6 CMD6 NXD6, ND6, HND6, HNXD6 1200 SND6, SHND6 CND6, SCND6 Main Breakers FXD6, FD6, HFD6, HFXD6 250 CFD6 JXD2, JXD6, JD6, HJD6, HJXD6, HHJD6, HHJXD6 400 SJD6, SHJD6 CJD6, SCJD6 LXD6, LD6, HLD6, HLXD6, HHLD6, HHLXD6 600 SLD6, SHLD6 CJD6, SCJD6 LMD6, LMXD6, HLMD6, HLMXD6 MXD6, MD6, HMD6, 800 HMXD6 SMD6, SHMD6 CMD6 NXD6, ND6, HND6, HMXD6 1200 SND6, SHND6 CND6, SCND6

Enclosure Minimum W

Conduit Area Top or Bottom

--

32.00 (813)

--

·

· ·

2 High Bolted Pressure Switch Distribution Section

·

·

-- 1 --

10.00 (254)

38.00 (965)

· ·

· · ·

-- 5.00 (127) 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 8.75 (222) 1 -- 1 --

32.00 (813)

·

· ·

--

SB3 only Vacu-Break Combination Distribution Section

10.00 (254) 38.00 (965)

·

·

Table 7.42

Max. Amp. Rating 30-30 30-30 30-60 60-60 60-100 100-100 200-200 100 200 400 600 400-1200

Unit Space Requirements -- Branch Switches

Device Applies To Switchboard SB1 SB2 SB3 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Dimensions in Inches (mm) Mounting Height 240V 600V Twin Single Twin -- 2.50 (64) 5.00 (127) 7.50 (191) 10.00 (254) 7.50 (191) 10.00 (254) -- 15.00 (381) 16.25 (413) 10.00 (254) -- -- -- 7.50 (191) 10.00 (254) 15.00 (381) 16.25 (413)

D for Type SB2 = 28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm) D for Type SB3 = 28, 38, 48, 58 in. (711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)

Width Enclosure Minimum W

Switch Type

Single

--

7.50 (191)

--

32.00 (813)

Vacu-Break

38.00 (965)

HCP

The 2.5 in. (64) high unit is suitable for NEC Class H, K1, and K5 fuses only. Class R rejection type fuse holders are not available. Unit rated 600V, factory configured to accept 250V class H, K or R Fuses. Field convertible to accept class J Fuses. Factory configure to accept Class J Fuses only.

128

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

SentronTM Switchboards

Distribution Sections -- Types SB1, SB2, and SB3

Through-Bus Fed

Table 7.43 Through-Bus Fed Dimensions

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width Maximum Riser Amperage 2000 With Maximum Through-Bus Amperage 2000 3000 4000 4000 As Applied to Switchboard SB1 SB2 SB3 H1 · · · · · 90.0 · · (2286) · · Unit Space H2 W 65.0 (1651) 62.5 (1588) 32.0 or 38.0 (965) (813) 38.0 or 46.0 (965) (1168) Depth Available Letters Reference Chart Below D SB1 SB2 SB3 A C E -- C E -- G H -- G H

Dimensions

Through-Bus Fed Distribution Sections

Conduit Area K L

2.5 3.0 (64) (76)

3000

See page 128 for unit space of disconnect devices. 46.00 (1168) width optional

Depth Reference Chart

A B C 20 in. (508 mm) 28 in. (711 mm) 20, 28, 38 in. (508, 711, 965 mm) E G H J 20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in. (508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm) 38 in. (965, mm) 38, 48, 58 in. (965, 1219, 1473 mm) 48, 58 in. ( 1219, 1473 mm)

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Non-Bussed and Bussed Pull Sections

Table 7.44 Non-Bussed & Bussed Pull Sections -- Standard Utilities and EUSERC Utilities

Depth Available Letter Reference Chart Above With Utility D Metering SB1 SB2 SB3 A,B 20 (508) A,B A,B A,B A,B A,B A,B -- -- -- 52 (1321) 46 (1168) 46 (1168) -- -- C C C C C C C G G G -- -- E E E E E E E H H H H H EUSERC Pull Section Dimensions in Inches (mm) Hgt. Width Depth Available Letter Reference Chart Above Bussed with Utility Bussed Metering D SB2 SB3 Std. Std. Opt. RCIII H SB1 J 32 (813) J J J J J J J J J J J -- -- 38 (965) 32 (813) 38 (965) A,B A,B A,B A,B B B B C C C C B,G B,G B,G G G G -- E E E E B, H H H H H H -- Standard Pull Section Dimensions in Inches (mm) Hgt. Width Non-Bussed Amp. Rtg. H 400 600 800 1000 1200 90 1600 (2286) 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 6000 Bussed Std. with Customer Metering

Std. 14 (356) 20 (508)

Opt. 20 (508) 32 (813)

RCIII J J J J J J J J J J J J

32 (813)

38 (965)

38 (965) or 46 (1168) 32 (813)

38 (965) 90 (2286) 46 (1168)

38 (965) 46 (1168)

38 (965) 46 (1168)

46 (1168)

52 (1321) --

--

--

--

Top or bottom feed. Pull sections without utility meters can be 28 in. (711 mm) deep minimum. Determined by specific utility used.

Non-Bussed Pull Section

Bussed Pull Section

Bussed Pull Section with Utility Compartment

H

H

H

Width

Width

Width

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

129

SentronTM Switchboards

Distribution Sections -- Type SB3 Only

Molded Case Circuit Breakers for Combination Motor Starter Applications Application Note: ETI instantaneous- trip circuit breakers are recommended for use in combination motor starters to provide selective short circuit protection for the motor branch circuit. The adjustable instantaneous-trip feature provides for a trip setting slightly above the peak motor inrush current. With this setting, no delay is introduced in opening the circuit when the fault occurs. Since these circuit breakers have no time-delay trip element, they must be used in conjunction with, and immediately ahead of, the motor-running overcurrent protective device.

Dimensions

The voltage and interrupting rating of the circuit breaker should be checked to assure that they are adequate for the electrical system. ETI circuit breakers are UL recognized components and must be used if the switchboard section is also to be UL Listed.

7

SentronTM Switchboards

Table 7.45 ETI Circuit Breakers (Instantaneous Trip Only) For Branch-Circuit Use with AC Full Voltage Motor Starters

Maximum 3Ø Ratings Ampere Rating 3 5 10 25 50 100 150 225 Breaker Type 220(208)V -- 0.5 2 5 15 30 40 50 240V 480V -- 1 0.5 2 2 3 5 10 15 30 30 60 40 75 50 100 Mounting Height in Inches (mm) Min. Section Width inches (mm) Twin Single -- 5 (127) 32 (813) -- 5 (127) 32 (813) -- 5 (127) 32 (813) -- 5 (127) 32 (813) -- 5 (127) 32 (813) -- 5 (127) 32 (813) -- 5 (127) 32 (813) -- 5 (127) 32 (813)

Table 7.47 Full Voltage Non­Reversing Starters Class A20

NEMA Starter Size Left Right -- 0 0 0 -- 1 0 1 1 1 -- 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 -- 3 0 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 -- Unit space Mtg. Ht. In. (mm) 5 (127) 5 (127) Min. Encl. Width In. (mm) 32 (813) 32 (813)

ED

FJ6 FJ6, CFD

10 (254)

32 (813)

Table 7.46 Vacu-Break Fusible Switches For Branch Circuit Use with AC Combination Full Voltage Starters

Horsepower Ratings Mounting Height in Inches (mm) 240V AC 480V AC 240V AC 480V AC Min. Ampere With NEC With DualWith NEC With DualSec. Rating Fuse Element Fuse Fuse Element Fuse Twin Single Twin Single Width 2.50 -- -- -- -- -- 3 7.5 32 30-30 (64) 30-30 30-60 60-60 60-100 100-100 100 200 200-200 400 600 3 3­7.5 7.5 7.5­15 15 -- 25 -- 50 75 7.5 7.5­15 15 15­30 30 -- 50 50 100 100 5 5­15 15 15­25 25 25 50 -- 100 -- 10 25 25 25­50 50 50 100 100 -- -- 5.00 (127) 5.00 (127) 5.00 (127) 7.50 (191) 7.50 (191) -- -- 10.00 (254) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 10.00 (254) -- 15.00 (381) 15.00 (381) 7.50 (191) 7.50 (191) 7.50 (191) 7.50 (191) 7.50 (191) -- -- 10.00 (254) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 7.50 (191) 10.00 (254) -- 15.00 (381) 15.00 (381) 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 38 38

15 (381)

32 (813)

15 (381)

32 (813)

Increase to 7.50 in. (191 mm) when pilot light or control transformer is required.

Table 7.48 Maximum 3 Phase Horsepower Rating

NEMA Starter Size 0 1 2 3 4 Voltage AC 220(208)V 3 7.5 10 25 40 240V 3 7.5 15 30 50 480V 5 10 25 50 100

The 2.50 in. (64 mm) high unit is suitable for NEC Class H and K5 fuses only. Class R rejection type fuse holders are not available. 100,000 kA at 480V with E­Frame and CFD­Frame breakers. 65,000 kA at 480V with F­Frame Breakers. 100,000 kA at 480V with Class J or Class RK5 fuses.

130

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

SentronTM Panelboards

Circuit Breaker, Fusible, Lighting, Power and Distribution

The end product of an outstanding ancestry, the current Sentron panelboard design represents the high level of engineering innovation expected from Siemens. Additional strength has been added to an already rugged and durable panelboard design. At the same time, the exterior size of many models has been trimmed, adding flexibility, taking up less space and making them easier to install. This newer design also simplifies wiring and reduces material requirements, saving additional installation time. The design still features the Fas-Latch trim that is so popular with installers, the jacking screw system that permits adjustments even after wiring has been installed, and other features such as exclusive split neutral. Many Sentron panelboards have the capability of mixing and matching breakers of different sizes and ratings -- or changing from main lug to main breaker, or adding subfeed breakers without changing box size. Other models accept a wide range of fuse types, including exclusive Vacu-BreakTM technology.

General

Features Overview

Siemens offers a complete line of lighting, and power & distribution panelboards. At the heart of the product line is the extensive research and technology found among Siemens circuit protection devices -- both fusible switches and molded case circuit breakers. The complete family of Sentron Panelboards employs numerous features -- all industry-leading, many exclusive: Note the following, all found in the innovative S1 and S2 lighting panelboards: ½ Symmetrical Interiors -- No Top or Bottom! To change from top to bottom (or vice-versa), simply invert the interior. The deadfront labeling is always right-side up.

½ First in the Industry Ratings of 125A / 250A Main Lug and Main Breaker. Now up to 600A Main Lug and Main Breaker ½ Field Convertible from Main Lug to Main Breaker and Vice Versa -- with No Increase in Enclosure Height. ½ Field Addability of Feed-Thru Lugs or Sub-Feed Circuit Breaker Without Increasing Enclosure Size. ½ Neutral System is Field Upgradeable to 200% up to 400 Amp Capacity -- Another Industry First. ½ Three Circuit Sizes Means Only Four Box Heights, Regardless of Main Configuration. ½ Suitable for Use as Service Entrance Given Compliance with NEC. ½ Bonding Screw is Shipped with Each Panel. ½ 240V and 480Y / 277V Versions Utilize Identical Boxes and Fronts.

The SE panel has many of the Same Characteristics as the S1 / S2 Panelboards. ½ Symmetrical interims for field Convertibility. ½ Main Lug and Main Breaker Ratings from 125A to 600A ½ Various voltage ratings (accepts AC / DC voltage) ½ Two Circuit Sizes and Three Box Heights, regardless of Main Configurations. ½ 200% Neutral Capacity up to 400 Amps. ½ Suitable for use as Service Entrance. The S3 lighting & appliance panelboards, Type S4 and S5 power panelboards, and Types F1 and F2 fusible panelboards employ many of the attributes listed above, as well as additional features shown in Table 9.1 on the next page.

9

SentronTM Panelboards

Circuit Breaker Lighting Types S1, S2, SE

Circuit Breaker Lighting Types S3

Circuit Breaker Power and Distribution S4, S5

Vacu-Break® Power and Distribution F1, F2

CSI Section 16471

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

155

SentronTM Panelboards

Circuit Breaker, Fusible, Lighting, Power and Distribution

The end product of an outstanding ancestry, the current Sentron panelboard design represents the high level of engineering innovation expected from Siemens. Additional strength has been added to an already rugged and durable panelboard design. At the same time, the exterior size of many models has been trimmed, adding flexibility, taking up less space and making them easier to install. This newer design also simplifies wiring and reduces material requirements, saving additional installation time. The design still features the Fas-Latch trim that is so popular with installers, the jacking screw system that permits adjustments even after wiring has been installed, and other features such as exclusive split neutral. Many Sentron panelboards have the capability of mixing and matching breakers of different sizes and ratings -- or changing from main lug to main breaker, or adding subfeed breakers without changing box size. Other models accept a wide range of fuse types, including exclusive Vacu-BreakTM technology.

General

Features Overview

Siemens offers a complete line of lighting, and power & distribution panelboards. At the heart of the product line is the extensive research and technology found among Siemens circuit protection devices -- both fusible switches and molded case circuit breakers. The complete family of Sentron Panelboards employs numerous features -- all industry-leading, many exclusive: Note the following, all found in the innovative S1 and S2 lighting panelboards: ½ Symmetrical Interiors -- No Top or Bottom! To change from top to bottom (or vice-versa), simply invert the interior. The deadfront labeling is always right-side up.

½ First in the Industry Ratings of 125A / 250A Main Lug and Main Breaker. Now up to 600A Main Lug and Main Breaker ½ Field Convertible from Main Lug to Main Breaker and Vice Versa -- with No Increase in Enclosure Height. ½ Field Addability of Feed-Thru Lugs or Sub-Feed Circuit Breaker Without Increasing Enclosure Size. ½ Neutral System is Field Upgradeable to 200% up to 400 Amp Capacity -- Another Industry First. ½ Three Circuit Sizes Means Only Four Box Heights, Regardless of Main Configuration. ½ Suitable for Use as Service Entrance Given Compliance with NEC. ½ Bonding Screw is Shipped with Each Panel. ½ 240V and 480Y / 277V Versions Utilize Identical Boxes and Fronts.

The SE panel has many of the Same Characteristics as the S1 / S2 Panelboards. ½ Symmetrical interims for field Convertibility. ½ Main Lug and Main Breaker Ratings from 125A to 600A ½ Various voltage ratings (accepts AC / DC voltage) ½ Two Circuit Sizes and Three Box Heights, regardless of Main Configurations. ½ 200% Neutral Capacity up to 400 Amps. ½ Suitable for use as Service Entrance. The S3 lighting & appliance panelboards, Type S4 and S5 power panelboards, and Types F1 and F2 fusible panelboards employ many of the attributes listed above, as well as additional features shown in Table 9.1 on the next page.

9

SentronTM Panelboards

Circuit Breaker Lighting Types S1, S2, SE

Circuit Breaker Lighting Types S3

Circuit Breaker Power and Distribution S4, S5

Vacu-Break® Power and Distribution F1, F2

CSI Section 16471

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

155

SentronTM Panelboards

Circuit Breaker, Fusible, Lighting, Power and Distribution

Sentron Lighting and Appliances Panelboards Sentron Power Panelboards SE S3

General

Sentron Fusible Panelboards F1 -- F2 --

Table 9.1--Key Panelboard Features

Lighting and Applications Power and Panelboard Applications Convertible from Top Feed to Bottom Feed or Vice Versa Change from Main Lug to Main Breaker or Add Subfeed without Changing Enclosure Size Space-Saving, Horizontally Mounted Main Breaker Short-Circuit Rating Label Giving Performance Level Standard Aluminum Ground Bus Blank End-Walls Standard Bolted Current-Carrying Parts Split Neutral Connection Accessible from Front Screw-Type Mechanical Lugs Time-Reducing Wing Nuts to Secure Interior without Tools 200 Ampere Rated Branch Breaker Connector Main and Branch Devices Connected with Case-Hardened Hardware Flush Lock, Concealed Door Hinges / Trim Screws Multiple Subfeed Breaker Mounting Capability Symmetrical Interior Mounting Studs to Eliminate Upside Down Mounting of Box Jacking Screw Interior Adjustment Star Nut Interior Adjustment Mix and Match Fusible Switch Circuit Breaker Capability Shallow Depth Accepts a Wide Range of Fuse Types Accepts Vacu-Break® Fusible Switch Accepts a Wide Range of Sentron Circuit Breakers Accepts ACCESSTM Communications Tie-In Optional Compression Lugs TVSS (Transient Voltage Surge Supression)

S1

S2

--

--

--

-- --

S4 --

S5 --

-- --

-- --

-- -- --

-- -- --

--

--

--

-- -- -- -- --

--

--

--

--

-- --

-- --

-- --

-- --

-- -- -- -- -- -- --

-- -- -- -- -- -- --

-- -- -- -- -- -- --

--

--

--

--

-- --

-- -- --

-- --

--

-- --

--

Panelboards equipped with Siemens Sensistrip® circuit breakers can be integrated into Siemens ACCESSTM electrical monitoring system. Bolted directly to the Interior Bus.

(See section 1)

9

SentronTM Panelboards

TVSS Unit

Field Addable Main and Subfeed Breakers

Connected Bus Main Breakers

Lay-in Main Lugs -- for wiring ease

Field Addable 200% Capacity Neutral Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

Field Convertible Interiors

156

CSI Section 16471

SentronTM Panelboards

Circuit Breaker, Fusible, Lighting, Power and Distribution

Class CTL Panelboards Class CTL panelboards incorporate physical features which, in conjunction with the physical size, configuration, or other means provided in Class CTL circuit breakers, are designed to prevent the installation of more overcurrent protective poles than that number for which the device is designed and rated, per UL 67. Service Entrance Equipment When a panelboard is used as service entrance equipment, it must be located near the point of entrance of building supply conductors. In a panel having main lugs only, the number of breakers or switches directly connected to the main bus must be limited to six. In a panel having a main breaker or main switch, the number of circuits are not limited except as may be provided under other panelboard requirements, i.e. lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards. Also the panel must include a connector for bonding and grounding neutral conductor. Panelboard Code Data 42-Circuit Rule: NEC Paragraph 384-14 defines a lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard as one having more than 10 percent of its overcurrent devices rated 30 amperes or less, for which neutral connectors are provided. NEC paragraph 384-15 states that not more than 42 overcurrent devices (other than those provided for in the mains) of a lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboard shall be installed in any one cabinet. For the purpose of this article a two pole circuit breaker shall be considered two overcurrent devices; a three pole circuit breaker shall be considered three overcurrent devices. (NEC 384-14 and -15 do not apply to panelboards feeding communication circuits. Panelboards for this application must be so marked.) Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating "Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating" refers to the application of series connected circuit breakers in a combination that allows some breakers to have lower individual interrupting ratings than the available fault current. This is permitted as long as the series combination has been tested and certified by UL.

General

Standards NEC 1996: Meets latest NEC wire bending requirement, section 373-6. NEMA: PBI, 250 UL: 67 and 50. Listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., under "Panelboards" File #E2269, and #E4016. Meets Federal Specification W-P-115c dated 1990, for Type 1, Class 1. Seismic Qualification All Siemens panelboards are independently tested and seismically qualified. Each panelboard meets or exceeds requirements of the Uniform Building Code (UBC) 1994 and California Code Title 24.

Table 9.2

Description Max. Voltage System

Sentron Panelboard Ratings

Sentron Lighting and Appliance Panelboards S1 S2 SE 240V 1-phase 3-wire 3-phase 4-wire 480Y / 277V 3-phase 4-wire 600 V 1-phase 3-wire 3-phase 4-wire 3-phase 3-wire 125A, 600A 100A­600A -- 30, 42 15­100A ED Breakers Sentron Power Panelboards S3 600 V 1-phase 3-wire 3-phase 4-wire 3-phase 3-wire 100A­600A 100A­600A -- 18, 30, 42, 54 15­100A BL, BQD, ED QJ2 Breakers S4 600 V 1-phase 3-wire 3-phase 4-wire 3-phase 3-wire 400A­1200A 400A­600A 100A­200A -- 15­600A ALL 15­600A Breakers S5 600 V 1-phase 3-wire 3-phase 4-wire 3-phase 3-wire 800A­1200A 800A­1200A 400A­ 1200A -- 15­1200A ALL 15­1200A Breakers Sentron Fusible Panelboards F1 600 V 1-phase 3-wire 3-phase 4-wire 3-phase 3-wire 225A­1200A 400A­600A 100A­200A -- 30­200A 30A­200A VB Switches F2 600 V 1-phase 3-wire 3-phase 4-wire 3-phase 3-wire 800A­1200A 800A­1200A 400A­1200A -- 30­600A 30A­600A VB 800A, 1200A HCP Switches --

Mains Main Lugs Main Breaker Main Switch Circuits Branch Ratings Siemens Branch Disconnect Devices Siemens Subfeed Circuit Breakers Enclosure Heights­in (mm) Standard Trims

125A, 600A 100A­600A -- 18, 30, 42 15­100A BL, BHL, HBL Breakers

125A, 600A 100A­600A -- 18, 30, 42 15­100A BQD Breakers

9

SentronTM Panelboards

ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HHED6, QJ2, QJH2, QJ2­H, FXD6, FD6, HFD6, JXD6, HJD6, LXD6, HLD6 32, 38, 44 (813, 965, 1118) 68 @ 400A / 600A (1727) Fas­Latch Surface or Flush

ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HHED6, FXD6, FD6, HFD6, HJD6, JXD6, HJD6, LXD6, HLD6 32, 38, 44 (813, 965, 1118) 68 @ 400A / 600A (1727) Fas­Latch Surface or Flush

FXD6, FD6, HFD6 JXD6, HJD6, LXD6, HLD6

FXD6, HFD6, JXD6, HTD6

--

--

--

44, 50, 68 (1118, 1270, 1727)

23­77 (584­1956)

60, 75, 90 (1524, 1905, 2286)

60, 75, 90 (1524, 1905, 2286)

60, 75, 90 (1524, 1905, 2286)

60, 75, 90 (1524, 1905, 2286)

Fas­Latch Surface or Flush

Fas­Latch Surface or Flush

Four Piece No Door

Four Piece No Door

Four Piece No Door

Four Piece No Door

S1, S2 and SE panels can have 1 subfeed breaker up to 250A. 400 / 600 amp S1 may have up to 2 QJ subfeeds.

225 and 400A breaker except for QJ are mounted subfeed. Limitations apply.

S1, S2 and SE enclosures.

CSI Section 16471

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

157

SentronTM Panelboards

Circuit Breaker, Fusible, Lighting, Power and Distribution

Modifications

Table 9.3--Typical Sentron Panelboard Modifications

Box Type 3R / 12 Type 4, 4X Drip Proof Drip Proof Hood Only Sealed Box Gasketed Trim Wider Box Deeper Box Front Hinged Front Door in Door Front Common Front Split Door Special Locks Nameplate Interior Aluminum Equipment Ground Bar Copper Equipment Ground Bar Insulated Equipment Ground Subfeed Lugs Feed-Thru Lugs Split Bus Compression Lugs Copper Lugs 200% Neutral Copper Main Bus Temp. Rise over Ambient -- Aluminum Temp. Rise over Ambient -- Copper 750 Ampere / in -- Aluminum Only 100 Ampere / in -- Copper Only Aluminum Plating -- Tin Plate (Alstan Process) Copper Plating -- Silver or Tin Remote Control Switches Time Clocks Circuit Breaker Shunt Trips R, J and T Fuse Clips TVSS

Standard per UL 67 and above. Per UL requirements, copper plating required at 600 amps.

General

Fusible Panelboards F1 F2

Lighting and Appliance Panelboards S1 S2 SE S3

Power Panelboards S4 S5

--

--

--

--

Standard

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

--

--

--

--

--

--

Standard Optional Optional Optional Standard --

Standard Optional Optional Optional Standard --

--

Standard Optional Optional Optional Standard Silver

Standard Optional Optional Optional Standard Silver

Standard Optional Optional Optional Standard Silver

Standard Optional Optional Optional Standard Silver

Standard Optional Optional Optional Standard Silver

Standard Optional Optional Optional Standard Silver

--

--

--

--

--

--

-- --

--

--

250A and below.

9

SentronTM Panelboards

Time Clock

Molded Case Switch Remote Control Switch

TVSS Unit Remote Control Lighting Contactor Types 3R, 3R / 12 Enclosures Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

158

CSI Section 16471

SentronTM Panelboards

Lighting and Distribution

Types S1 and S2 Main Lug / Main Breaker

S1 and S2 main lug panelboards are preengineered to accept the most common modifications without increasing box height. The enclosure size for an S1 or S2 panelboard is determined by the number of circuits as shown in Tables 9.4 and 9.5. Box size is determined only by the number of circuits, not by main lug or main circuit breaker. All S1 or S2 main lug or main breaker panelboards have space built-in to accept either feed-thru lugs or one subfeed circuit breaker up to 600 amperes without increasing box height.

Dimensions

Main Lug Unit Space Dimensions

Main Breaker Unit Space Dimensions

Main Breaker Panelboard

Table 9.4--Main Lugs

Max Amp. Rating 125 Max No. of Poles 18 30 42 18 30 42 42 42

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Unit Spaces Height A B 9 (229) 15 (381) 21 (533) 9 (229) 15 (381) 21 (533) 21 (533) 21 (533) 32 (813) 38 (965) 44 (1118) 32 (813) 38 (965) 68 (1727) 68 (1727) 68 (1727)

Weight in lbs. (kg) 100 (45) 115 (52) 135 (61) 100 (45) 115 (52) 175 (80) 175 (80) 175 (80)

Connectors Suitable for Cu or Al (1) #6 AWG-350 kcmil

250

(1) #6 AWG-350 kcmil (2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil (2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil

400 600

Branch Breaker Side Gutters

A B BL, BLH, HBL BLF, BLHF BQD BL, BLH, HBL BLF, BLHF BQD A B C D E

Table 9.5

Main Breakers

Max No. of Poles 18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30 42 42 42 42 42

Main Max Amp. Breaker Rating Type 100 BL, BLH, HBL, ED4, BQD 125 ED4, ED6 HED4, HHED6 QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H FXD6, FD6, HFD6, JXD6, HJD6 FXD6, FD6, HFD6 JXD6 HJD6 600 LXD6 HLD6

225

250

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Horiz. Main Unit Breaker Spaces Height A B C 8.50 (216) 9 (229) 32 (813) 15 (381) 38 (965) 21 (533) 44 (1118) 9 (229) 32 (813) 15 (381) 38 (965) 21 (533) 44 (1118) 7.50 (191) 9 (229) 32 (813) 15 (381) 38 (965) 21 (533) 44 (1118) 5 (127) 9 (229) 32 (813) 15 (381) 38 (965) 21 (533) 44 (1118) 5 (127) 9 (229) 32 (813) 15 (381) 38 (965) 21 (533) 44 (1118) 21 (533) 21 (533) 21 (533) 21 (533) 68 (1727) 68 (1727) 68 (1727) 68 (1727) 8 (203) 8 (203) 8 (203) 8 (203)

C Weight lbs. (kg) 105 (48) 120 (55) 135 (61) 110 (50) 125 (57) 140 (64) 110 (50) 125 (57) 140 (64) 115 (52) 130 (59) 145 (66) 115 (52) 130 (59) 145 (66) 185 (84) 185 (84) 190 (86) 190 (86) (2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil Cu or (2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil Al Connectors Suitable for Cu or Al D E F G (1) #12­1/0 AWG

ED, ED4, ED6, HED4, HHED6 QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H FXD6, FD6, HFD6 JXD6, HJD6 LXD6, HLD6 Panel Width 20 in. (508 mm) 24 in. (610 mm) for 400A and 600A

9

SentronTM Panelboards

F G

(1) #1 AWG-300 kcmil

Side Gutter Wiring Space Inches (mm)

Reference Letter A B C D E F G Panel Width 20 in. 6.375 (162) 5.500 (140) 6.125 (156) 6.500 (165) 5.250 (133) -- -- Panel Width 24 in. 7.750 (197) 7.125 (181) 6.000 (152) 8.500 (216) 7.250 (184) 8.000 (203) 8.000 (203)

(1) #6 AWG-300 kcmil

(1) #6 AWG-350 kcmil

400

Subfeed mounting limit 1 per panel.

CSI Section 16471

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

159

SentronTM Panelboards

Lighting and Distribution

Table 9.6--Alternate Main Breakers -- Type S1

Ampere Rating 100 Breaker Type BL BLH HBL ED4 HED4 HHED6 QJ2 QJH2 QJ2-H FXD6 FD6 HFD6 JXD6 HJD6 LXD6 HLD6 Maximum Interrupting Rating (kA) 10 22 65 65 100 100 10 22 42 65 65 100 65 100 65 100 Available Trip Values 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600

Technical

Table 9.7--Alternate Main Breakers -- Type S2

Amp. Rating 100 Breaker Max. IR (kA) Available Trip Values Type BQD ED4 ED6 HED4 ED4 ED6 HED4 FXD6 FD6 HFD6 250 FXD6 FD6 HFD6 JXD6 HJD6 LXD6 HLD6 10 18 25 65 18 25 42 35 35 65 35 35 65 35 65 35 65 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 110, 125 110, 125 110, 125 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 250 250 250 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400

125

125

225

225

250

400 600

400 600

Table 9.8--Subfeed Breakers -- Type S1 and S2 (Limit One Per Panel)

Maximum Interrupting Rating (kA) Breaker Type QJ2 QJH2 QJ2-H ED4 HED4 HHED6 FXD6 FD6 HFD6 JXD6 HJD6 LXD6 HLD6 Number of Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 Type S1 -- Type S2 -- 240V 480Y / 277 10 22 42 65 100 100 65 65 100 65 100 65 100 -- -- -- 18 42 65 35 35 65 35 65 35 65 Available Trip Values 60, 70, 80, 90,100,110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 60, 70, 80, 90,100,110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 60, 70, 80, 90,100,110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 70, 80, 90,100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 65, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600

When applying in 42 circuit panel, see lighting and appliance panelboard definition on page 155. Also reference NEC article 384­16. No increase in box height. Space is already built into S1 panel. Interchangeable trip breaker must be mounted at top only in column width panels. Limit two per panel on 400A and 600A SI panel.

9

SentronTM Panelboards

160

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16471

SentronTM Panelboards

Lighting and Distribution

Table 9.9--Branch Circuit Breakers -- Type S1 120 / 240 and 240 Volts AC & Type S2 480Y / 277 Volts AC

Maximum Interrupting Rating (kA) Breaker Type BL 120V / Number of Poles 120V 240V 240V 1 10 -- -- 2 10 -- -- 2 -- 10 -- 3 -- 10 -- 1 -- 22 -- 2 -- 22 -- 3 -- -- 22 1 -- 65 -- 2 -- 65 -- 3 -- -- 65 1 10 -- -- 2 -- 10 1 22 -- -- 2 -- 22 2 10 -- -- -- 3 -- 10 1 10 -- -- 1 2 3 1 2 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 277V -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 14 -- -- -- -- -- 480Y / 600Y / 277V 347V 347V -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 14 14 -- -- -- -- -- -- 14 -- -- -- -- -- -- 14 14 Ampere Ratings for Load Connectors Load Connectors Aluminum Wire (1) #12­#8 AWG (1) #8­#4 AWG Copper Wire (1) #14­#8 AWG (1) #8­#6 AWG

Technical

BHL

HBL

BLF BLHF BGL BLE BQD

Available Trip Values 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 15­30A 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 90, 100 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 35­50A 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 55, 60, 70 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 90, 100 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 55­60A 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 1 & 2 Pole 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70 BL 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 15, 20, 30 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 55­70A 15, 20, 30 Except 1 & 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 2 Pole BL 15, 20, 30 15, 20, 30 80­100A 15, 20, 30 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 15­40A 45­100A 15­40A 45­100A

(1) #8­#3 AWG

(1) #8­#6 AWG

(1) #8­#2 AWG

(1) #8­#4 AWG

(1) #2­#1 / 0 AWG (1) #1 / 0­#2 / 0 AWG (1) #12­#6 AWG (1) #14­#6 AWG

(1) #6­#1 / 0 AWG (1) #8­#1 AWG (1) #12­#6 AWG (1) #14­#6 AWG

BQD6

(1) #6­#1 / 0 AWG (1) #8­#1 AWG

CSA listed only at 600Y/347V AC.

9

SentronTM Panelboards

CSI Section 16471

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

161

SentronTM Panelboards

Lighting and Distribution

Types S1 / S2 Column Width

Table 9.10 S1 / S2 Main Lugs Only 240 Volts Maximum

Maximum Maximum Box Ampere 1-Pole Height Rating Circuits In. (mm) 125 18 30 42 18 30 42 48 (1219) 73 (1854) 85 (2159) 48 (1219) 73 (1854) 85 (2159) Connectors Suitable for Cu or Al (1) #6 AWG350 kcmil (1) #6 AWG350 kcmil

Dimensions

20.00 in. (508 mm) 14.00 in. (356 mm) Pull Box 5.25 in. (133 mm) 11.00 in. (279 mm)

Weight -- Approximate Total panelboard weight when filled with a normal quantity of breakers and accesories is about 31 lbs. (1 kg) per inch (54g per mm) of box height. Column Extensions Available in various standard lengths, extensions are 5.25 in. (133 mm) deep with a width of 7 in. (178 mm). (These are outside dimensions). Designed to fit into an 8 in. (203 mm) structural WF beam. Column panels may also be surface mounted. Pull Boxes Two styles of pull boxes are available, top and front mounted. When the panel and its extensions are mounted in a structural WF Beam, a front-mounted pull box is required. When the panels are surfacemounted, top-mounted pull box may be

14.00 in. (356 mm) Pull Box Additional Extensions If Required Top Extension (For Front Mtg.) 53.99 in. (1346 mm)

Additional Extensions If Required

250

H Box Height

H Box Height

Table 9.11 S1 / S2 Main Circuit Breaker 240 Volts Maximum

Maximum Maximum Box Ampere 1-Pole Height Rating Circuits In. (mm) 100 18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30 42 48 (1219) 73 (1854) 85 (2159) 48 (1219) 73 (1854) 85 (2159) 48 (1219) 73 (1854) 85 (2159) 48 (1219) 73 (1854) 85 (2159) Connectors Suitable for Cu or Al (1) #141/0 AWG (1) #41/0 AWG (1) #4-AWG300 kcmil (1) #4 AWG350 kcmil Al (1) #6 AWG350 kcmil Cu

7.00 in (178 mm)

5.25 in (133 mm)

used. Provisions are made so that the neutral bar may be mounted in the pull box when required.

Table 9.13 Box Sizing Certain modifications such as subfeed breakers and feed-thru lugs require additional unit space. Use this table to determine proper enclosure size.

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width Depth S1 S2 S1

125

225

Panel Configuration Main Lug

250

Main Lug with Feed-Thru Lugs Main Lug with Subfeed Breaker Main Breaker

Table 9.12

Ampere Rating Type S1 125 S2 S1 250 S2

Gutters

Dimensions in Inches (mm) End Gutters (Minimum) 6 (152) 6 (152) 6 (152) 6 (152) Side Gutters (Minimum) 5.00 (127) 3.50 (89) 5.00 (127) 3.50 (89)

Main Breaker with Feed-Thru Lugs Main Breaker with Subfeed Breaker

9

SentronTM Panelboards

No. of Circuits 18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30 18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30

Height 48 (1219) 73 (1854) 85 (2159) 73 (1854) 86 (2184) 85 (2159) 73 (1854) 85 (2159) 48 (1219) 73 (1854) 85 (2159) 73 (1854) 85 (2159) 85 (2159) 73 (1854) 85 (2159)

S2

7.62 (194)

8.50 (216)

5.75 (146)

5.7 (146)

Telephone Cabinets

Telephone Cabinets Conform to requirements of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., for all cabinets and boxes bearing their label. Surface enclosures, box and front constructed of codeguage steel. Entire cabinet finished with light gray, ANSI-61. Flush enclosures, box constructed of code-guage galvanized steel, front only finished with light gray, ANSI-61. Boxes Standard construction has blank ends, without knockouts. Front Concealed hinges standard on fronts. Double doors supplied when door

width exceeds 24 in. (610 mm). 3-point catch and vault handle supplied with double doors; two spring catches supplied on doors more than 48 in. (1219 mm) high. Table 9.14

Box Width --in. (mm) 0 (0)­20 (508) 21 (533)­24 (610) 25 (635)­36 (914) 25 (635)­36 (914) 37 (940)­38 (965) 49 (1245)­60 (1524) Door Single Single Single Double Double Double

Backboard 0.75 in. (19mm) plywood backboard supplied when specified.

Depth 0.75 in. (19 mm) Surface Mounting 0.75 in. (19 mm)

Trim Overlap Flush Mounting

Depth

All available with 0.75 in. (19 mm) backboard. Depth 12 in. (305 mm) or less. Height 72 in. (1829 mm) or less. Specify Mounting -- Surface or Flush. Box width minus 5 in. (127 mm) equals door width.

162

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16471

SentronTM Panelboards

Lighting and Distribution

Type SE Main Lug / Main Breaker

SE main lug panelboards are pre-engineered to accept the most common modifications without increasing box height. The enclosure size for an SE panelboard is determined by the number of circuits as shown in the main lug Table 9.15 or the main circuit breaker Table 9.16. Box size is determined only by the number of circuits, not by main lug or main circuit breaker. All SE main lug or main breaker panelboards have space built in to accept either feed-thru lugs or one subfeed circuit breaker up to 600 amperes without increasing box height.

Dimensions

Table 9.15

Max Amp. Rating 125 250 400 600

Main Lug

Max No. of Poles 30 42 30 42 42 42

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Unit Spaces A 15 (381) 21 (533) 15 (381) 21 (533) 21 (533) 21 (533) Height B 44 (1118) 50 (1270) 44 (1118) 50 (1270) 68 (1727) 68 (1727) Height Neutral C 19 (483) 22 (589) 19 (482) 22 (589) 27.66 (686) 27.66 (686) Weight in lbs. (kg) 115 (52) 135 (61) 115 (52) 135 (61) 165 (75) 165 (75)

Connectors Suitable for Cu or Al (1) #6 AWG-350 kcmil (1) #6 AWG-350 kcmil (2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil (2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil

Box Depth 7.75 in. (197 mm) for all Ampere ratings.

Branch Breaker Side Gutters

A

Table 9.16 Main Breaker

Main Max Amp. Breaker Rating Type ED4, ED6 125 HED4, HHED6 FXD6, FD6, 250 HFD6 JXD6, HJD6 400 600 LXD6, HLD6 Max No. of Poles 30 42 30 42 42 42

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Unit Spaces A 15 (381) 21 (533) 15 (381) 21 (533) 21 (533) 21 (533) Height B 44 (1118) 50 (1270) 44 (1118) 50 (1270) 68 (1727) 68 (1727) Neutral C 19 (483) 22 (589) 19 (483) 22 (589) 27.60 (686) 27.60 (686) Horiz. Main Breaker Weight lbs. (kg) D 115 (52) 8.50 (216) 135 (61) 115 (52) 7.25 (184) 135 (61) 8.00 (203) 8.00 (203) 175 (80) 175 (80) Connectors Suitable for Cu or Al (1) #12 ­1/0 AWG (1) #6 AWG-350 kcmil (2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil Cu (2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil Al

B C D

ED2, ED4, ED6 ED2, ED4, ED6 HED4, HHED6 HED4, HHED6 FXD6, HFD6 JXD6, HJD6 LXD6, HLD6

A B C D

9

SentronTM Panelboards

Panel Width 24 in. (210mm)

Side Gutter Wiring Space Inches (mm)

Reference Letter A B C D

Subfeed mounting limit 1 per panel.

Panel Width 24 in. (609 mm) 6.00 (152) 7.25 (184) 8.00 (203) 8.00 (203)

Box Depth 7.75 in. (197 mm) for all Ampere ratings.

CSI Section 16471

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

163

SentronTM Panelboards

Lighting and Distribution

Table 9.17

Ampere Rating 100

Technical

Alternate Main Breakers -- Type SE

Breaker Type ED4 ED6 HED4 HHED6 ED4 ED6 HED4 HHED6 FXD6 FD6 HFD6 FXD6 FD6 HFD6 JXD6 HJD6 LXD6 HLD6 Max IR (kA) 240V 480V 600V 65 65 100 100 65 65 100 100 65 65 100 65 65 100 65 100 65 100 18 25 42 65 18 25 42 65 35 35 65 35 35 65 35 65 35 65 -- 18 -- 25 -- 18 -- 25 22 22 25 22 22 25 25 35 25 35 Available Trip Values 50, 60, 70, 80, 90,100 50, 60, 70, 80, 90,100 50, 60, 70, 80, 90,100 50, 60, 70, 80, 90,100, 110, 125 110, 125 110, 125 110, 125 50, 60, 70, 80, 90,100, 110, 125 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 250 250 250 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600

125

225

250

400 600

Table 9.18--Subfeed Breakers

Breaker Type FXD6 HFD6 JXD6 HJD6 LXD6 HLD6 Number of Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 Max IR (kA) 240V 480V 600V 65 100 65 100 65 100 35 65 35 65 35 65 22 25 25 35 25 35 Available Trip Values 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600

Table 9.19

Max Amp Rtg.

Branch Breakers

Maximum Interrupting Rating (kA) Volts -- AC 120 240 277 -- -- 10,000 -- -- 10,000 -- -- 10,000 -- 65,000 22,000 -- -- 65,000 -- -- 65,000 -- -- 65,000 -- -- 65,000 -- 100,000 65,000 -- 100,000 25,000 -- -- 100,000 -- -- 100,000 -- -- 100,000 -- -- 100,000 -- -- 100,000 -- -- 100,000 -- -- 100,000 -- -- 100,000 -- -- 65,000 -- -- -- -- -- -- 65,000 100,000 65,000 100,000 65,000 100,000 -- -- -- -- -- -- Ampere Ratings DC for Load 250 Connectors -- 5,000 -- 15­125A -- 30,000 -- ED4 1-Pole 30,000 30­60A -- 70­100A -- -- 30,000 All 2, 3-Pole 30,000 30­100A -- 110­125A -- -- All 2, 3 Pole -- -- 30­100A -- 30,000 All 2, 3 Pole 70­250A Load Connectors Aluminum Wire Copper Wire (1) #14­#8 AWG (1) #14­#10 AWG

Bolt-on Number Breaker of Amp Type Poles Rating ED2 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 15 ­100 15 ­100 15 ­100 15 ­100 15 ­125 15 ­125 15 ­125 15 ­125 15 ­ 30 35 ­100 15 ­100 110 ­125 15 ­100 110 ­125 15 ­100 110 ­125 15 ­100 110 ­125 70 ­250 70 ­250 70 ­250 200 ­ 400 200 ­ 400 250 ­ 600 250 ­ 600

ED4 ED6

9

SentronTM Panelboards

125 HED4

2 HHED6 250 FXD6 FD6 HFD6 400 JXD6 HJD6 600 LXD6 HLD6

15­30A 35­100A

3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3

480 -- -- -- -- 18,000 18,000 25,000 25,000 -- -- 42,000 42,000 42,000 42,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 35,000

600 -- -- -- -- -- -- 18,000 18,000 -- -- -- -- -- -- 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 22,000

(1) #12­#10 AWG

(1) #10­#4 AWG (1) #4­#1 / 0 AWG

(1) #10­#4 AWG (1) #4­#1 / 0 AWG

(1) #10­#1 / 0 AWG (1) #3­#1 / 0 AWG

(1) #10­#1 / 0 AWG (1) #3­#1 / 0 AWG

(1) #10­#1 / 0 AWG (1) #3­#1 / 0 AWG

(1) #10­#1 / 0 AWG (1) #3­#1 / 0 AWG

35,000 22,000 30,000 65,000 25,000 30,000 35,000 22,000 30,000 65,000 25,000 30,000 35,000 25,000 30,000 65,000 35,000 30,000

(1) #6 AWG­ 350 kcmil

(1) #6 AWG­ 350 kcmil

All 2, 3 Pole 200­400A

(2) #4/0­ 500 kcmil

(2) #3/0­ 500 kcmil

All 2, 3 Pole 250­600A

(2) #4/0­ 500 kcmil

(2) #3/0­ 500 kcmil

164

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16471

SentronTM Panelboards

Lighting and Distribution

Type S3 Main Lug / Main Breaker

These charts are for standard panelboards with a maximum of 42 total poles of one breaker type. Combinations, including subfeed breakers or modifications shown on page 166 will be larger than dimensions shown here. Add Main Breaker dimensions from appropriate table to Unit Space (A) dimension in chart below, then go to box selection table on page 166 for box height. Main Lug

Dimensions

Box Depth = 5.75 in (146 mm) for 100A, 225A, and 400A Box Depth = 7.75 in (197 mm) for 400A and 600A

Table 9.20 Main Lug

Maximum Amp Rating 100 225 400 Maximum No. of Poles 18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30 42 54 18 30 42 54 Dimensions in Inches (mm) Box Height Unit Space B A 9 (229) 23 (584) 15 (381) 29 (737) 21 (533) 35 (889) 9 (229) 26 (660) 15 (381) 32 (813) 21 (533) 38 (965) 9 (229) 32 (813) 15 (381) 38 (965) 21 (533) 44 (1118) 27 (686) 50 (1270) 9 (229) 38 (965) 15 (381) 44 (1118) 21 (533) 50 (1270) 27 (686) 56 (1422) Main Lug C 5.5 (143) 7.0 (178) 11.0 (279) Neutral D 6.87 (175) 8.37 (213) 12.19 (310) Connectors Suitable for Cu or Al (1) #12 ­ 1/0 AWG (1) #6 AWG ­ 300 kcmil (1) 250-500 kcmil or (2) #3 / 0 AWG ­ 250 kcmil (2) #3 / 0 AWG ­ 500 kcmil

Box Depth = 5.75 in (146 mm) for 100A, 225A, and 400A Box Depth = 7.75 in (197 mm) for 400A and 600A A 7.75 in. (197 mm) deep box is required for 400 ampere panels when main bus is 750 amps / square inch aluminum or 1000 amps / square inch copper, or when JXD6, JD6 or HJD6 breakers are used as subfeed breakers.

600

14.0 (356)

16.89 (429)

Table 9.21

Max Amp Rating 100 125

Main Breaker

Max No. of Poles

18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30 42 30 42 18 30 42 54 18 30 42 54 18 30 42 54 30 42

Lug is single barrel construction, rated for (2)-250 kcmil or (1)-500 kcmil cable.

Main Breaker Type

BL, BLH,HBL BQD, BQD6 ED4, ED6 HED4, HHED6 CED6

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Horizontal Main Vertical Main Breaker Breaker Unit Connectors Space Height Neutral Neutral Suitable for Cu E C B A D F or Al

9 (229) 115 ( 381) 21 (533) 9 (229) 15 ( 381) 21 (533) 9 (229) 15 ( 381) 21 (533) 9 (229) 15 ( 381) 21 (533) 15 ( 381) 21 (533) 9 (229) 15 ( 381) 21 (533) 27 (686) 9 (229) 15 ( 381) 21 (533) 27 (686) 15 ( 381) 21 (533) 15 ( 381) 21 (533) 23 (584) 29 (737) 35 (889) 29 (737) 35 (889) 41 (1041) 29 (737) 35 (813) 41 (1041) 32 (813) 38 (965) 44 (1118) 50 (1270) 56 (1422) 47 (1194) 53 (1346) 59 (1499) 65 (1561) 56 (1422) 62 (1575) 68 (1727) 74 (1880) 50 (1270) 56 (1422) 62 (1575) 68 (1727) 65 (1651) 71 (1803) 5.75 (146) 5.75 5.5 (140) 5.5 __ __ (1) #12 ­ 1 / 0 AWG (1) #1 AWG ­ 300 kcmil (1) #6 AWG ­ 300 kcmil 10.5 (267) 14.0 (365) 25.5 (648) 27.0 (686) (1) #6 AWG ­ 300 kcmil (1) #3 / 0 AWG ­ 500 kcmil Cu #4 / 0 AWG ­ 500 kcmil Al or (2) #3 / 0 AWG ­ 250 kcmil Cu #4 / 0 AWG ­ 250 kcmil Al (2) #3 / 0 AWG ­ 500 kcmil Cu or (2) #4 / 0 AWG ­ 500 kcmil Al (1) #12 ­ 1 / 0 AWG

Branch Breaker Side Gutters Branch Breaker Side Gutters A B C BL, BLH, HBL BLF, BLFH BQD, BQD6 ED, ED4, ED6 HED4, HHED6 QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H Panel Width 20 in. (508 mm) BL, BLH, HBL BLF, BLFH BQD, BQD6 ED, ED4, ED6 HED4, HHED6 A B C D

9

SentronTM Panelboards

225

QJ2 QJH2 QJ2-H FXD6 FD6 HFD6 CFD6 JXD6 JD6, HJD6 SJD6, SHJD6 CJD6 SCJD6

5.00 (127) __ __

7.00 (178) __ __

__

__

D

400

__

__

Table 9.22 Side Gutter Wiring Space -- in. (mm)

Reference Point A B C D Panel Width 20 in. (508) 5.750 (146) 5.125 (130) 4.000 (102) 5.000 (127)

600

LXD6, LD6 HLD6, SLD6 SHLD6, SCLD6 CLD6 SCLD6

__ __

__ 15.5 (394) __ 28.5 (724)

Single branch mounting construction

CSI Section 16471

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

165

SentronTM Panelboards

Lighting and Distribution

Type S3 Main Lug / Breaker, cont'd

Table 9.23--S3 Box Width / Depth

Ampere Rating 100A 225A Dimensions in inches (mm) Width Depth 5.75 (146) 20 (508) 5.75 (146) 7.75 (197) 7.75 (197) 8.75 (222)

Dimensions

box is required, not a 20 in. (508 mm) wide 26 in. (660 mm) high box. This panel will contain provisions for 4-poles of BL and 2-poles of ED4 frame breakers although the order does not call for these provisions. Examples: 100 Ampere MLO Panelboard with 18 in. (457 mm) of unit space, requires a 20 in. (508 mm) wide 32 in. (813 mm) high box. 400 Ampere Main JXD6 Breaker Panelboard with 21 in. (533 mm) of unit space. requires a 20 in. (508 mm) wide 59 in. (1499 mm) high box.

½ About 5 Ibs. (2 kg) per in. (91g per mm) of box height if most of the breakers are E frame. Sizing the Box When branch breakers of different frame sizes are mixed in the same panel, breakers of the same frame must be in modules of 3 in. (76 mm) when sizing the box. Example: A 225A MLO panel with 8-poles of BL and 10-poles of ED4 type breakers. The BL breakers will require 6 in. (152 mm) of panel height (not 4 in. [102 mm]); and the ED4 type breakers will require 6 in. (152 mm) of panel height (not 5 in. [127 mm]). A 20 in. (508 mm) wide 29 in. (737 mm) high Table 9.27

Box

Type Temp Rise 750A / in. Al or 1000A in. Cu Temp Rise 400A 400 / 600A 750A / in. Al or 1000A in. Cu Temp Rise 600A Type 3R All

All Panels ½ Add height of modifications to branch circuit height before selecting box. Tables 9.24 and 9.25. ½ End walls are blank as standard. End walls with knockouts will be supplied on 5.75 in. (146 mm) deep panels if requested. ½ Knockouts not available on 7.75 in. (197 mm) deep panels. Table 9.24--Subfeed Breakers

Mounting Position When Used As Subfeed Breaker Horiz. Vert. Single Double Single Double -- Single -- Single Additional Unit Space in inches (mm) When Used As Subfeed Breaker Single Double 9 (229) 21 (533) 9 (229) 24 (610) -- 24 (610) --

Box Selection

Breaker Type FXD6 HFD6 JXD6 HJD6

Limit one type mounting per panel. Single mounting in conjunction with double mounting not available. Twin mounted HFD6 subfeed breakers are mounted at bottom of panelboard only. HJD6 subfeed breaker is mounted at bottom of panelboard only.

9

SentronTM Panelboards

Table 9.25 Branch Breaker Unit Space

Ampere Rating 100 125 225 Breaker Type BL, BLH, HBL, BQD ED4, ED6, HED6 QJ2, HJH2, QJ2-H No. of Poles 1 2 3 2, 3 Unit Space -- in. (mm) 1 (25) 2 (51) 3 (76) 6 (152)

Table 9.26 Gauge Steel of Boxes / Front Surface and Flush

Dimensions in in. (mm) Height Width 23 ­ 77 20 (584 ­1956) (508) Gauge Steel Box Front #16 #14

Box Ht. -- in. (mm) 23 (584) 26 (660) 29 (737) 32 (813) 35 (889) 38 (965) 41 (1041) 44 (1118) 47 (1194) 50 (1270) 53 (1346) 56 (1422) 59 (1499) 62 (1575) 65 (1651) 68 (1727) 71 (1803) 74 (1880) 77 (1956)

Maximum Available Branch Circuit and Modification Unit Space in Inches (mm) Breakers are Double Branch Mounted Except QJ2 AND QJ2H and all Subfeed Main Lugs Main Circuit Breakers 100A 225A 400A 600A 100A 100A 225A 225A 225A 400 400A 600A 600A BL, BLH, HBL, BQD, ED4, ED6, HED4 -- -- -- 9 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 9 -- (229) (229) 9 -- -- 12 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 12 -- (229) (305) (305) 12 -- -- 15 9 9 -- -- -- -- -- 15 -- (305) (381) (229) (229) (381) 15 9 -- 18 12 12 9 -- -- -- -- 18 -- (381) (229) (457) (305) (305) (229) (457) 18 12 -- 21 15 15 12 -- -- -- -- 21 -- (457) (305) (533) (381) (381) (305) (533) 21 15 9 24 18 18 15 -- -- -- -- 24 -- (533) (381) (229) (610) (457) (457) (381) (610) 24 18 12 27 21 21 18 -- -- -- -- 27 -- (610) (457) (305) (686) (533) (533) (457) (686) 27 21 15 30 24 24 21 9 -- -- -- 30 -- (686) (533) (381) (762) (610) (610) (533) (229) (762) 30 24 18 33 27 27 24 12 9 -- -- 33 -- (762) (610) (457) (838) (686) (686) (610) (305) (229) (838) 33 27 21 36 30 30 27 15 12 -- 9 36 -- (838) (686) (533) (914) (762) (762) (686) (381) (305) (229) (914) 36 30 24 -- 33 33 30 18 15 -- 12 -- -- (914) (762) (610) (838) (838) (762) (457) (381) (305) -- 33 27 -- 36 36 33 21 18 9 15 -- -- (838) (686) (914) (914) (838) (533) (457) (229) (381) -- 36 30 -- -- -- 36 24 21 12 18 -- 9 (914) (762) (914) (610) (533) (305) (457) (229) -- -- 33 -- -- -- -- 27 24 15 21 -- 12 (838) (686) (610) (381) (533) (305) -- -- 36 -- -- -- -- 30 27 18 24 -- 15 (914) (762) (686) (457) (610) (381) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 33 30 21 27 -- 18 (838) (762) (533) (686) (457) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 36 33 24 30 -- 21 (914) (838) (610) (762 (533) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 36 27 33 -- 24 (914) (686) (838) (610) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 30 36 -- 27 (762) (914) (686)

Dimensions based upon 50° C Rise. A 20 in. (508 mm) wide by 5.75 in. (146 mm) deep box will be supplied. If 750A / in2 or 1000 A / in2 is required, a 20 in. (508 mm) wide by 7.75 in. (197 mm) deep box will be supplied. When shunt trip required on main breaker increase box height 3.00 in. (76 mm). Caution: table shows available unit space per box height. see page 165 for available circuit offerings.

Weight -- Approximate Total panelboard weight when filled with a normal quantity of breakers and accessories is: ½ About 3 Ibs. (1 kg) per in. (54g per mm) of box height if most of the breakers are BL or BQD type.

Unit Space Required for QJ2, QJH2, and QJ2-H Circuit Breakers -- in. (mm) Number 4 21 (533) of 3 18 (457) 15 (381) 3-Pole 18 (457) 2 15 (381) 12 (305) QJ2 12 (305) 15 (381) 1 9 (229) 6 (152) Frame Breakers 0 9 (229) 12 (305) 15 (381) 6 (152) 0 (0) 0 1 2 3 4 Number of 2-Pole QJ Frame Breakers

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

166

CSI Section 16471

SentronTM Panelboards

Power and Distribution

Types S4 / S5

These code-gauge galvanized steel enclosures accommodate up to 60 in. (1524 mm) of unit space with room to pull, trim, bend, and secure wiring. The 10-in. (254 mm) depth of the S4 makes it ideal Table 9.28

H S4 / S5 W S4 60 (1524) 32 (813) 75 (1905) 32 (813) 90 (2286) 32 (813) S5 38 (965) 38 (965) 38 (965)

Dimensions

for in-the-wall installations where flush mounted trim is a desirable enhancement. The deeper S5 allows a 400 or 600A fusible switch or an 800 or 1200A circuit breaker. To determine enclosure size, list branch devices and modifications requiring space additions. List unit space requirements of each. Select appropriate enclosure height from Table 9.28 based on unit space requirements.

S4 / S5 Enclosure Selection

Available Cicuit Space in Inches (mm) Main Lug S5 12.75 (324) 12.75 (324) 12.75 (324) 14.25 (362) 14.25 (362) 14.25 (362) S4

Type 1, 3R/12 400 / 600A

Enclosure Dimension in Inches (mm) D S4 10 (254) 10 (254) 10 (254)

Main Breaker S4 / S5 800 / 1200A 30 (762) 45 (1143) 60 (1524) S4 400 / 600A -- 38.25 (972) 51.25 (1302) S5 800 / 1200A -- 35 (889) 60 (1524)

Main Switch S4 200A 20 (508) 35 (889) -- S5 400 / 600A -- 25 (635) 40 (1016) S5 800/1200 -- 28.75 (730) 43.75 (1111)

Type 1, 3R/12 Type 1, 3R/12 Type 1, 3R/12 Type 1

30 (762) 45 (1143) 60 (1524)

Standard trim is four piece without door. Surface or flush one piece trim is available for 32 in. (813 mm) wide circuit breaker panel.

Main Breaker

Table 9.29

S4 / S5 Main Lug (Fig. 2)

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Main Lug 400A 600A

B

Neutral 800A

C

1000A

D

1200A

E

Lugs Standard Oversize Crimp Standard with Subfeed

A

16.500 (419) 16.500 (419) 19.187 (487) 16.750 (425)

16.750 (425) 21.750 (552) 18.250 (464) 15.969 (406) 16.750 (425)

15.969 (406) 25.969 (660) 18.687 (475) -- --

15.969 (406) 25.969 (660) 18.250 (464) -- --

15.969 (406) 25.969 (660) 18.250 (464) -- --

600A F 13.125 (333) 18.125 (460) 15.937 (405) 13.125 (333) 13.125 (333)

800A G 13.125 (333) 23.125 9587) 15.937 9405) 13.125 (333) 13.125 (333)

Standard with 16.500 (419) Feed-thru

Fig. 1

Table 9.30

Panel Type S4

S4 / S5 Main Breaker (Fig. 1)

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Ampere Rating 400 400 ­ 600 800 Breaker Type JXD6. JD6, HJD6 LXD6, LD6, HLD6, SLD6, SHJD6, SLD6, SHLD6 CJD6, SCJD6, CLD6, SCLD6 LMXD6, LMD6, MXD6, MD6, HMD6 CMD6, SCMD6, SHMD6, SMD6 NXD6, ND6, HND6, CND6, SND6, SHND6 A 10.42 (265) 10.42 (265) 5.92 (151) 13.00 (330) 10.42 (256) 13.00 (330) Neutral B

13.125 (333)

S5 1200

9

Fig. 2

Table 9.31

Ampere Rating 100 125

Branch Breaker Unit Space

Mounting Height in Inches (mm) Twin Single -- 3.75 (95) -- 3.75 (95) -- 3.75 (95) -- 5.00 (127) -- -- 5.00 (127) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 8.75 (222) 8.75 (222) 8.75 (222) 10.00 (254) 10.00 (254)

SentronTM Panelboards

Breaker Type BL, BLH, HBL, BQD ED4, ED6, HED4, HHED6 ED6, CED6 QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H, 225 FXD6, FD6, HFD6 250 CFD6 JXD6, JD6, SJD6, 400 HJD6, SHJD6 CJD6, SCJD6 600 LXD6, LD6, SLD6, HLD6, SHLD6, CLD6, SCLD6 800 LMD6, LMXD6 800 MD6, MXD6, SMD6, HMD6, (S5 Only) SHMD6, CMD6, SCMD6 1200 ND6, NXD6, SND6, HND6, (S5 Only) SHND6, CND6, SCND6

A B C D E F G H I J K

Mounting height: 6 poles require 3.75 in. (95 mm) of mounting height. All breakers are double-branch mounted. Consult enclosure section Table 9.28 above. 400A twin mounted branches require 38 in. (965 mm) wide enclosure.

BL, BLH, HBL BL, BLH, HBL ED2, ED4, ED6 ED2, ED4, ED6 HED4, HHED6 HED4, HHED6 QJ2, QJH2, QJ2H QJ2, QJH2, QJ2H FXD6, FD6, HD6 FXD6, FD6, HD6 JXD6, JD6, SJD6 JXD6, JD6, SJD6 HJD6, SHJD6 HJD6, SHJD6 CED6 CED6 CFD6 JXD6, JD6, LXD6, LD6, SLD6 HJD6, SJD6, SHJD6, HLD6, SHLD6 CJD6, SCJD6, CLD6, SCLD6 MD6, ND6, CMD6, CND6, LMXD6, LMD6, HMD6, HND6 SMD6, SND6, SCMD6, SCND6, SHMD6, SHND6

A B C D E F G H I J K

Table 9.32--

Reference Letter A B C D E F G H I J K Panel Width in Inches (mm) Twin Single 11.000 (279) 14.000 (356) 7.000 (178) 10.000 (254) 5.750 (146) 8.750 (222) 5.250 (133) 8.250 (210) -- 7.937 (202) 4.625 (117) 7.719 (196) 8.781 (223) 11.781 (299) 10.437 (265) 13.781 (350) 5.719 (145) 8.969 (228) -- 13.000 (330) -- 12.000 (305)

CSI Section 16471

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

167

SentronTM Panelboards

Power and Distribution

Types S4 and S5

Table 9.33 Branch Breakers -- Types S4 and S5

Breaker Ampere 120V Rating 15­100 15­100 15­100 15­100 15­100 15­100 15­125 15­125 15­125 15­125 15­125 60­225 60­225 60­225 60­225 70­225 70­225 70­225 70­225 70­225 70­225 200­400 200­400 200­400 200­400 200­400 200­400 200­400 200­400 200­400 450­600 250­600 300­600 250­600 250­600 250­600 300­600 450­600 300­600 500­800 500­800 500­800 500­800 500­800 600­800 500­800 600­800 500­800 600­800 800­1200 800­1200 800­1200 800­1200 900­1200 800­1200 -- -- -- -- -- -- 65 -- 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Maximum Interrupting Rating (kA) Symmetrical Amperes 120V / 240V 10 -- 22 65 65 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 240V -- 10 -- -- 65 -- 65 65 100 100 200 10 22 42 100 65 65 100 200 200 200 65 65 65 100 200 200 100 200 200 65 65 65 100 200 200 100 200 200 65 65 100 100 65 65 100 100 200 200 65 65 100 100 200 200 277V -- -- -- -- 14 -- 22 -- 65 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 480V 600V -- -- -- -- 14 -- 18 18 42 65 200 -- -- -- -- 35 35 65 100 100 200 35 35 35 65 100 100 65 150 150 35 35 35 65 100 100 65 150 150 50 50 65 65 50 50 65 65 100 100 50 50 65 65 100 100 -- -- -- -- -- 10 -- -- 30 -- 100 -- -- -- -- 18 18 25 25 25 100 25 25 25 35 50 50 35 100 100 25 25 25 35 50 50 35 100 100 25 25 50 50 25 25 50 50 50 50 25 25 50 50 50 50 Ampere Rating 400 Breaker Type JXD6 JD6 HJD6 HHJD6 HHJXD6 CJD6 SJD6 SHJD6 SCJD6 LXD6 LD6 HLD6 HHLD6 HHLXD6 CLD6 SLD6 SHLD6 SCLD6 240V AC 65 65 100 200 200 200 65 100 200 65 65 100 200 200 200 65 100 200 480V AC 35 35 65 100 100 150 35 65 150 35 35 65 100 100 150 35 65 150 600V AC 25 25 35 50 50 100 25 35 100 25 25 35 50 50 100 25 35 100 Available Trip Values 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 200, 300, 400 200, 300, 400 200, 300, 400 450, 500, 600 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 450, 500, 600 300, 400, 500, 600 300, 400, 500, 600 300, 400, 500, 600

Technical

Table 9.34--Alternate Main Breakers -- Type S4

Maximum IR (kA) Symmetrical Amperes

Ampere Breaker Rating Type 100 BL (120) BL (240V) BLH HBL BQD BQD6 ED4 ED6 HED4 HHED6 CED6 QJ2 QJH2 QJ2-H HQJ2H FXD6 FD6 HFD6 HHFD6 HHFXD6 CFD6 JXD6 JD6 SJD6 HJD6 HHJD6 HHJXD6 SHJD6 CJD6 SCJD6 LXD6 LD6 SLD6 HLD6 HHLD6 HHLXD6 SHLD6 CLD6 SCLD6 LMXD6 LMD6 HLMXD6 HLMD6 MD6, MXD6 SMD6 HMD6 SHMD6 CMD6 SCMD6 ND6, NXD6 SND6 HND6 SHND6 CND6 SCND6

125

600

225

250

400

Table 9.35--Alternate Main Breakers -- Type S5

Maximum IR (kA) Symmetrical Amperes Ampere Rating 800 Breaker Type LXMD6 LMD6 HLMXD6 HLMD6 MD6 HMD6 CMD6 SMD6 SHMD6 SCMD6 ND6 HND6 CND6 SND6 SHND6 SCND6 240V AC 65 65 100 100 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200 480V AC 50 50 65 65 50 65 100 50 65 100 50 65 100 50 65 100 600V AC 25 25 50 50 25 50 50 25 50 50 25 50 50 25 50 50 Available Trip Values 500, 600, 700, 800 500, 600, 700, 800 500, 600, 700, 800 500, 600, 700, 800 500, 600, 700, 800 500, 600, 700, 800 500, 600, 700, 800 600, 700, 800 600, 700, 800 600, 700, 800 800, 900, 1000, 1200 800, 900, 1000, 1200 900, 1000, 1200 800, 1000, 1200 800, 1000, 1200 800, 1000, 1200

600

1200

9

SentronTM Panelboards

800 (S5 Only)

Table 9.36--Main Lugs

Ampere Rating 400 600 800 1000 1200 Connectors Suitable for Copper or Aluminum (1)--#3 / 0 AWG-500 kcmil (2)--#3 / 0 AWG-250 kcmil (2)--#3 / 0 AWG-500 kcmil (3)--#3 / 0 AWG-500 kcmil (4)--#3 / 0 AWG-500 kcmil (4)--#3 / 0 AWG-500 kcmil Panel Type S4 S4 S4 / S5 S4 / S5 S4 / S5

1200 (S5 Only)

480Y / 277V 34W only. Not for use on 480V 33W Delta Systems. 15­30A 65 kA, 35­100A 25 kA CSA listed only at 600V AC

Alternate lugs for 750 kcmil cable are available, but result in significant loss of branch unit mounting space. Consult Siemens.

168

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16471

SentronTM Panelboards

Power and Distribution

Types F1/F2

Table 9.37 F1 / F2 Enclosure Selection

D F1 Type 1, 3R / 12 10 (254) 10 (254) 10 (254) Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm) H W F2 F1 Type 1, 3R / 12 F1 / F2 Type 1, 3R / 12 38 (965) 60 (1524) 32 (813) 38 (965) 75 (1905) 32 (813) 38 (965) 90 (2286) 32 (813)

Dimensions

Vac-Break Switch Side Gutter Wiring Space

600V AC A F2 Type 1, 3R / 12 12.75 (324) 12.75 (324) 12.75 (324) Type 3R / 12 14.25 (362) 14.25 (362) 14.25 (362) B A B A B A B A B A B 250V AC A B A B A B A B A B A B

Table 9.38

Type F1

F1 / F2 Main Lug

Maximum Ampere Rating 400 600 800 1000 1200 Unit Space -- in. (mm) 30 45 60 30 45 60 (762) (1143) (1524) (762) (1143) (1524)

Table 9.39

Type F1 F2

F1 / F2 Main Switch

Maximum Ampere Rating 100 200 400 600 800 1200 Unit Space -- in. (mm) 20 (508) 35 (889) 25 (635) 40 (1016) 43.75 (1111)

F1 / F2

Fig. 3 Table 9.41 (Fig. 3)

Switch Ampere Rating 800 1200 600 400 200 100 200 / 200 100 / 100 30 / 30 60 / 60 800 1200 600 400 200 200 / 200 100 / 100 30 / 30 30 / 30 Panel Width in Inches (mm) Type F2 Type F1 38 32 -- -- -- -- 7.5 7.5 5.0 5.0 7.0 7.0 12.0 12.0 9.3 9.3 10.5 10.5 8.0 8.0 10.0 10.0 12.0 12.0 8.5 8.5 13.0 8.0 10.0 13.0 13.0 (000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000)

Table 9.40

Branch Switch Unit Space

Mounting Height in In. (mm)

Panel Type

F1 / F2

F2

F2

Ampere Rating 30­30 30­30 30­60 60­60 60­100 100­100 200­200 200 200 400 600 30­30 30­60 60­60 60­100 100­100 200­200 100 200 400 600 800 1200

Number of Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3

Twin Single Mounted Mounted 2.50 (64) -- 5.00 (127) -- 5.00 (127) -- 5.00 (127) -- 7.50 (191) -- 7.50 (191) -- 10.00 (254) -- -- 7.50 (191) -- 10.00 (254) -- 15.00 (381) -- 15.00 (381) 7.50 (191) -- 7.50 (191) -- 7.50 (191) -- 7.50 (191) -- 7.50 (191) -- 10.00 (254) -- -- 7.50 (191) -- 10.00 (254) -- 15.00 (381) -- 15.00 (381) -- 16.25 -- 16.25

Cables Per AC Voltage Connector 240 1 240 1 240 1 240 1 240 1 240 1 240 1 240 1 240 2 240 2 240 1 600 1 600 1 600 1 600 1 600 1 600 1 600 1 600 2 600 2 600 600 3 600 4

Connectors Suitable for Copper or Aluminum #14 ­ #8 AWG (Cu Only) #14 ­ #4 AWG #14 ­ #4 AWG #14 ­ #4 AWG #10 ­ #1 / 0 AWG #10 ­ #1 / 0 AWG #6 AWG ­ 350 kcmil #6 AWG ­ 350 kcmil #6 AWG ­ 350 kcmil #4 / 0 AWG ­ 500 kcmil #4 / 0 AWG ­ 500 kcmil #14 ­ #4 AWG #14 ­ #4 AWG #14 ­ #4 AWG #10 ­ #1 / 0 AWG #10 ­ #1 / 0 AWG #6 AWG ­ 350 kcmil #10 ­ #1 / 0 AWG #6 AWG ­ 350 kcmil #4 / 0 AWG ­ 500 kcmil #4 / 0 AWG ­ 500 kcmil #3 / 0 AWG ­ 500 kcmil #3 / 0 AWG ­ 500 kcmil

Reference Letter 600V AC A B C D E F G 250V AC H I J K L M N

(000) (000) (000) (000) (000) (000)

-- -- -- -- 10.0 (000) 5.0 (000) 7.0 (000) 10.0 (000) 10.0 (000)

9

SentronTM Panelboards

CSI Section 16471

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

169

SentronTM Panelboards

Power and Distribution

Types F1 and F2

Table 9.42--Branch Switches

Mounting Height Panel Type Ampere Rating 30-30 30-30 30-60 60-60 60-100 100-100 200-200 200 200 400 600 30-30 30-60 60-60 60-100 100-100 200-200 100 200 400 600 800 1200 Number of Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 Twin Single Cables Per AC Voltage Mounted Mounted Connector 240 2.5 -- 1 240 5 -- 1 240 5 -- 1 240 5 -- 1 240 7.5 -- 1 240 7.5 -- 1 240 10 -- 1 240 -- 7.5 1 240 -- 10 1 240 -- 15 2 240 -- 15 2 600 7.5 -- 1 600 7.5 -- 1 600 7.5 -- 1 600 7.5 -- 1 600 7.5 -- 1 600 10 -- 1 600 -- 7.5 1 600 -- 10 1 600 -- 15 2 600 -- 15 2 600 -- 16.25 3 600 -- 16.25 4 Connectors suitable for Copper or Aluminum #14-#8 AWG (Cu Only) #14-#8 AWG #14-#4 AWG #14-#4 AWG #10-#1/0 AWG #10-#1/0 AWG #6 AWG-250 kcmil #6 AWG-250 kcmil #6 AWG-250 kcmil #1/0 AWG-300 or (1) 500 kcmil #4 AWG-500 kcmil #14-#8 AWG #14-#4 AWG #14-#4 AWG #10-#1/0 AWG #10-#1/0 AWG #6 AWG-250 kcmil #10-#1/0 AWG #6 AWG-250 kcmil #1/0 AWG-300 or (1) 500 kcmil #4 AWG-500 kcmil #3/0 AWG-500 kcmil #3/0 AWG-500 kcmil

Technical

Table 9.45

UL Fuse Classes

F1/F2

Interrupting Ratings Class Amperes Volts (kA) I2 t, I i 1­600 250 and 10 -- H 600V or less AC 1­600 250 and 100 I t­RK5 K5 up to 100A 600V or Ii, ­RK5 less AC up to 100A 1­600 600V or 200 I t-Low J less Ii, -Low RK1 1/10­600 600V or less 250V or less RK5 1/10­600 600V or less 250V or less T L 1­800 1­1200 601­ 6000A 200

Circuits Less than 10,000A available Feeder circuits

F2

200

Feeder circuits (motor load small %) I tFeeder Slightly > J circuits Ii,(motor load Slightly > J small %) I t- > RK-1 Motor Ii,- > RK-1 starting currents a factor I t-Low Ii,-Low I t-Low Ii,-Low Non-Motor loads Mains, feeder circuits

F1/F2

300 and To 200 600V or less AC 600V or 200 less

F2

Fuses do not prohibit the use of Class H type fuse in switch.

Table 9.43--Main Lug Connectors

Type F1 F1/F2 Ampere Rating 400 600 800 1000 1200 Connectors suitable for Copper or Aluminum (1) -- #3/0 AWG-500 kcmil (2) -- #3/0 AWG-250 kcmil (2) -- #3/0 AWG-500 kcmil (3) -- #3/0 AWG-500 kcmil (4) -- #3/0 AWG-500 kcmil (4)-- #3/0 AWG-500 kcmil

Table 9.44--Main Switch Connectors

Type F1 Ampere Rating 100 200 F2 400 600 800 1200 Connectors suitable for Copper or Aluminum (1)--#10-#1/0 AWG (Cu or Al) (1)--#6 AWG-300 kcmil (1)--#3/0 AWG-500 kcmil (2)--#3/0 AWG-250 kcmil (2)--#3/0 AWG-500 kcmil (3)--#3/0 AWG-500 kcmil (4)#3/0 AWG-500 kcmil

9

SentronTM Panelboards

Vacu-Break Switch

170

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16471

SentronTM Panelboards

Circuit Breaker, Fusible, Lighting, Power and Distribution

Lug Data

Space Required for Mounting of Double Panels Feed-Thru Lugs

Application

Subfeed Lugs (Double Lugs)

Use two or more panelboards with feedthru or subfeed lugs when: 1. Lighting and appliance panelboards are required with more than 42 circuits. 2. More circuit mounting space is required than is provided in the largest box size. Feed-thru lugs are mounted at the opposite end of the main bus from the main lugs or main breaker and are used to connect two or more panelboards to the Bussing Sequence Sentron interiors are designed to accommodate top or bottom feed. Regardless of which is specified, the uppermost pole is always on "A" phase; the second pole down is always on "B" phase, and the

incoming feeder. The feeder cables are brought into Panelboard 1 and connected to the main lugs or main breaker. Cables interconnecting the two panelboards are connected to the feed-thru lugs in Panelboard 1 and are carried over the main lugs in Panelboard 2. This arrangement could be reversed with the main lugs located at the top and the feed-thru lugs at the bottom of the panel. Subfeed third pole down is always on "C" phase. As standard, branch breakers shall be mounted at the top of the panel with "spaces" at the bottom, regardless of the direction panel is fed. Table 9.46--Motor Starter Selector

Voltage 200 or 208 V 230V NEMA Size 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 HP Rating 7.5 10 25 40 7.5 15 30 50 10 25 50 100

lugs are mounted directly beside the main incoming lugs and are used to connect two or more panelboards to the incoming feeder. The feeder cables are brought into Panelboard 1 and connected to the main lugs. Another set of cables that are the same size are connected to the subfeed lugs of Panelboard 1 and are carried over the main lugs of Panelboard 2. All breakers have bolted connections except plug-in type. The high-impact main bus supports provide bracing up to 200,000A IR UL short circuit rating. Casehardened, thread-forming screws are used on branch bus. Table 9.47 Motor Starter Selector

Mounting Height -- in. (mm) 5.00 (127) 7.50 (191)

Motor Starters

Motor Starters Full voltage, non-reversing NEMA Size 1 through Size 4 motor starters are available as additions to S5 and F2 panelboards. S5 panelboards can accommodate motor disconnect devices in either one of two circumstances: 1. by using a branch thermal magnetic (ET) circuit breaker to feed a remote starter that controls a motor which is in sight of and within fifty feet of the panelboard. 2. by using a branch instantaneous trip only (ET) circuit breaker in conjunction with a motor starter mounted in the same enclosure which is in sight of and within fifty feet of the controlled motor. Whenever a remote starter is used, a padlocking device must be specified so that a padlock may be installed in the "OFF" position. Conversely, when breaker and starter are mounted within the same enclosure, provision for padlocking shall be provided. F2 panelboards incorporate motor disconnect devices much in the same way as S5 panelboards, only a fusible Vacu-Break switch unit is utilized rather than an (ETI) circuit breaker. Also, padlocking devices are standard on all Vacu-Break switches and need not be ordered as an accessory.

480 or 600V

Instantaneous Trip (ET) type breakers are designed for use in motor circuits and combination starters where short circuit protection only is required from the breaker. When used in combination starters they serve in conjunction with a motor protective relay to offer complete protection. The relay protects against overloads, the breaker provides short circuit protection. Standard Motor Starters Equipped With: ½ 3rd overload relay ½ Mechanical interlock between circuit breaker (or switch) and motor starter door ½ Reset button ½ Class 1, Type A wiring

3 Per Motor Starters NEMA NEMA Control Available Starter Size Starter Power Accessory Transf. Positions Left Right Type 2 Yes -- 1 FVNR 2 Yes 1 -- FVNR 2 No 1 1 FVNR 4 Yes -- 1 FVNR 4 Yes 1 -- FVNR 4 Yes 1 1 FVNR 8 Yes -- 1 FVR 4 Yes 1 -- 2S2W 4 Yes -- 2 FVNR 4 Yes 2 -- FVNR 4 Yes 2 2 FVNR 4 Yes 2 1 FVNR 4 Yes 1 2 FVNR 8 Yes -- 2 FVR 8 Yes -- 2 2S2W 4 Yes 2 2 FVR 4 Yes 2 2 2S2W 4 Yes -- 3 FVNR 4 Yes 3 -- FVNR 4 Yes 3 3 FVNR 8 Yes -- 3 FVR 8 Yes -- 4 FVNR

9

10.00 (254)

SentronTM Panelboards

15.00 (381)

15.00 (381)

Optional Motor Control Accessories ½ Pushbuttons: Start / Stop or Open / Close, Reverse / Forward / Stop or High / Low / Stop ½ Selector Switch: Hand / Off / Auto or On / Off ½ Pilot Light: Red or Amber ½ Auxiliary interlock (normally open or normally closed-unwired) ½ Control transformer, 60Hz, fused LV, Sizes 1 ­ 4 ½ Class 1, Type B wiring 171

CSI Section 16471

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

SentronTM Panelboards

Lighting, Power and Distribution

Transient Protection System

The Siemens Transient Protection System truly is designed for the entire electrical system. From the service entrance equipment to lighting panelboards, Siemens has a system that will meet or exceed your specifications. Installed at stages in your electrical system, the Sentron protects sensitive equipment closest to where it is needed. Many of the Sentron TPS bolt directly to the bus bars of our panelboards, for optimal redundancy protection. Industry-first retrofit kits complete one of the finest voltage transient protection systems on the market. Siemens TPS Standards and Specifications ½ Suppressors manufactured and tested in accordance with ANSI / IEEE C62.41, C62.45 (describing transient environment, transients and applications) ½ UL1449, UL1283 listed ½ Capable of protecting against and surviving a minimum of degradation of UL1449 clamp voltage by more than 10% ½ Low inductance suppression path ½ Redundancy protection Table 9.48

Switchboards Features TPS 6 Surge Capacity/Phase 200kA/300kA/400kA Modes of Protection L-N/L-L, L-G, N-G U.L. Supression Ratings L-N L-G N-G 208Y/120V/ 3P 4W 400 400 400 480Y/277V 3P 4W 800 800 800 Category C3 (10kA) Minimum 5,000 Pulse Life- # of impulses U.L. 1283 Filter Attenuation at 100 Hz U.L. 1449 Listed Disconnect Connection Method Overcurrent Rating Fusing Diagnostic Monitoring Immediate Status LED Reduced Protection LED Audible Alarm Dry Contacts for Remote Surge Counter Diagnostic Test Switch Remote Monitor Increased EMI/RFI Filter Warranty Standard Voltages 120/240V; 208Y/120V; 240V Delta; 480Y/277V; 480V Delta; 347Y/600V; 600V Delta 50db Yes Standard Cable 200kAIC Surge Related Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Standard Optional Optional 5 Years All Voltages Available Power Panelboards TPS 5 150kA/200kA L-N/L-L, L-G, N-G L-N L-G N-G 400 400 400 800 800 800 4,000 Lighting Panelboards TPS 2 100kA/200kA L-N/L-L, L-G, N-G L-N L-G N-G 400 400 400 800 800 800 3,500 Lighting Panelboard (125A­250A) TPS 1 80kA/160kA L-N/L-L, L-G, N-G L-N L-G N-G 400 400 400 800 800 800 3,500

Applications

50db Yes Standard Cable 200kAIC Surge Related Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Standard Optional N/A 5 Years All Voltages Available

50db Yes N/A Direct Bus 200kAIC Surge Related Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Standard Optional N/A 5 Years All Voltages Available

50db Yes N/A Direct Bus 200kAIC Surge Related Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Standard Optional N/A 5 Years 120/240V 208Y/120V 480Y/277V

UL Test Wave. Test for Category B and C Panel Suppressors.

1.0 I(t)/lp 0.8

9

Front Time = 8µs 0.6

Duration = 20µs 0.4

0.2

0

10

20

30

40 Time, µs

50

Technology of Siemens Integrated TPS and Specifications ½ Suppression circuit senses overvoltage condition and diverts the excess away from the load to common point earth ground ½ Multiple MOVs used to increase amount of energy a circuit can handle successfully ½ Multiple modes of protection: · Line-to-Neutral · Line-to-Ground · Neutral-to-Ground · Line-to-Line ½ Each MOV path individually fused at 200k AIC for maximum safety ½ TPS system mounts in all Siemens products without extra wiring and space requirements. ½ LED indicators for voltage and diagnostic monitoring ½ Redundant suppression paths between each phase conductor and neutral, each phase conductor and ground, and neutral conductor and ground.

Sentron TM Panelboards

174

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16471

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

General

Bus Bars SentronTM busway is available with an unique, optional 200% neutral design, 6cycle and 1 second short circuit withstand ratings up to 200kA RMS Sym, 130°C Class B Mylar® insulation, and a housing that serves as a ground conductor. Sentron busway is available in the following ampacities: 225A, 400A, 600A, 800A, 1000A, 1200A, 1350A, 1600A, 2000A, 2500A, 3000A, and 4000A; 5000A is available in copper only. Siemens SentronTM Busway was engineered with both consultants and contractors in mind, allowing both to provide customers with a product boasting unprecedented ratings, yet a surprising level of simplicity and ease of installation. To the Consultant . . . Sentron Busway reduces the troublesome effects of common harmonics problems with the industry's only fully integrated 200% neutral. As for ground options, Sentron Busway features an integral ground through its aluminum case as standard. Other options include an internal ground and an isolated ground for installations requiring a separate ground path. Sentron Busway features superior water resistance ratings other manufacturers cannot match. In fact, it is the only complete busway system that, regardless of position, complies 100% with the water resistance standards for both UL and IEC -- plugs and all. Various levels of water protection are available, so you can tailor the busway system to suit its environment. And should that environment be in another country, note that Sentron Busway complies fully with UL, IEC, CSA, VDE, BS and DIN standards. To achieve Sentron Busway's 130°C rating, each bus bar is wrapped with three high-impact and chemical resistant layers of 5 mil Mylar® insulation. Unlike other brands of plug-in busway, Sentron meets IP-2X requirements with the plug-in doors open guarding against accidental finger contact with energized parts. To enhance design flexibility, Sentron Busway is available in feeder, plug-in and riser busway configurations as standard. Sentron also features a polyester powder-painted aluminum housing that doubles as an integral ground. To the Contractor . . . Every design detail in the Sentron busway system factors in the needs of those who install it -- Contractors.

3 phase, 3 wire

3 phase, 4 wire 100% Neutral 3 phase, 4 wire 200% Neutral

Standard Bus Bar Configuration

Housing Sentron Busway is designed to hang with minimal hardware and hassle. Its lightweight aluminum housing is built to be used as an integral ground. Bus plugs and cable tap boxes feature the largest wire bending space in the industry as standard, with even more room available as an option at no extra cost.

Bus Plugs Regardless of rating, the positive latching feature of Sentron bus plugs prevents installation and removal of the plug from the bus with the switch in the "ON" position. The operating handle can be padlocked in the "OFF" position. Also featured: a voidable interlock for energized plug testing, and a red / green indicator that shows the "ON-OFF" status of the switching mechanism, which can be seen from a distance of 25 ft. (7.5 meters). Plug-in outlets are located on 2 ft. (610 mm) centers on both sides of standard plug-in busway. Neutral Harmonics Sentron Busway offers a 200% neutral within the bus bar housing. A sinusoidal voltage applied to a nonlinear load will result in a non-sinusoidal current. This non-sinusoidal current is periodic and can be reproduced from a number of sinusoidal component currents, called harmonics. These harmonics cause circulating currents in the delta primaries of distribution transformers, thus overheating the unit. It is possible to experience neutral loads of 173% of the phase conductor. With Siemens Sentron Busway, a fully rated 200% neutral conductor within the busway itself can be specified. The extra neutral capacity of Sentron Busway minimizes overheating and prolongs the life cycle of power distribution equipment. This system is especially useful with discharge lighting (fluorescent) and computer installations.

10

Busway Systems

Joint To speed installation, joint stacks connect with splice plates which features a single bolt design and special, double-headed break-off bolt that eliminates the need for torque wrenches. With ±0.625 in. (16 mm) of adjustability at each joint as standard, there is greater reliability and flexibility for busway layout connections.

178

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16466

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

General Ratings

Busway Types Feeder or Plug-in ½ Indoor ½ Spray Proof ½ Splash Proof Feeder Only ½ Outdoor ½ Severe Outdoor IP 40 IP 43 IP 54 IP 65 IP 66 Capacities ½ Aluminum: up to 4000A ½ Copper: up to 5000A Short Circuit Ratings ½ 85,000 to 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes (6 cycles).

Technical

Conductors ½ 3 phase, 3 wire ½ 3 phase, 4 wire (100% neutral) ½ 3 phase, 4 wire (200% neutral) ½ Integral aluminum housing ground ½ Internal ground bus (Aluminum and Copper) ½ Isolated ground bus (Aluminum and Copper)

Water Resistance Sentron Busway is the first busway system to provide true levels of protection to guard against entry of water and dust. Unlike other busway systems where only the busway is water resistant and not the plug-in units, Sentron offers a complete system that is in 100% compliance with both UL and IEC standards and is approved through third party certification. Each of the busway types listed in Table 10.1 is approved for all mounting positions. UL 1479 Fire Rated Installations Sentron Busway has been tested in accordance with UL 1479 and offers a certified two hour fire rating for gypsum wallboard construction, and a three hour fire rating for concrete slab or block penetrations. These ratings were achieved using standard busway installed with SpecSeal® sealant from Specified Technologies Inc. The SpecSeal® fire stop system provides superior performance at the industry's lowest installed cost. Sentron is the first busway system to achieve a fire rating for gypsum wallboard construction. Short Circuit Protection Sentron Busway utilizes the strength of the housing design to provide one of the industry's highest levels of short circuit protection. In accordance with both UL and IEC, Sentron Busway offers short circuit ratings for six cycle and one second requirements. These ratings are approved through third party certification. Energy Optimization Sentron Busway energy optimization features include extremely low reactance due to non-magnetic housing and total intimate contact of bus bars and housing. Voltage drop values are the same for both feeder and plug-in busway. Unlike competitive busway, voltage drop values are the same for indoor, outdoor, and all IP rated busway.

Table 10.1

Levels of Protection Description

Approved for Sentron Busway Type Feeder Plug-In Plug-In Units

IEC 529­Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures Code Description Plug-in outlet protects against access to live parts by .472 in. (12 mm) test IP 2X probe, even with cover opened. Finger safe. IP 40 Enclosure protects against entry of .039 in. (1.0 mm) test probe. Indoor (Typical UL designation) Enclosure protects against entry of .039 in. (1 mm) test probe and dripping water. Spray proof. Enclosure protects against entry of dust and splashing water. Splash proof. Enclosure is dust tight and protects against water jets. Outdoor (Typical UL designation) Enclosure is dust tight and protects against powerful water jets. Severe Outdoor.

-- --

-- --

IP 43 IP 54 IP 65 IP 66

Two Hour Fire Rating Gypsum Wallboard

Three Hour Fire Rating Concrete Slab

See page 190 for recommended cutout dimensions.

Table 10.2

Ampere Rating 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000

Short Circuit Protection Ratings

6 Cycle RMS Symmetrical (kA) Aluminum 85 85 85 100 100 125 150 150 150 200 200 200 -- Copper 85 85 85 85 100 100 100 125 150 150 200 200 200 60 Cycle (1 Second) RMS Symmetrical (kA) Aluminum 28 28 28 47 50 60 75 90 110 130 160 200 -- Copper 40 40 40 40 50 65 80 95 115 130 175 200 200

10

Busway Systems

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

179

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

Table 10.3

Rated Load Amperes Aluminum 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 Copper 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000

Dimensions

Voltage Drop ­ Concentrated Loads Line-to-Line per 100 ft at 100% Rated Load, 25°C Ambient Power Factor 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.90 1.63 2.50 2.56 2.34 2.12 1.95 1.90 1.78 1.77 1.81 1.75 0.70 1.25 1.90 2.59 2.60 2.51 2.28 2.11 2.01 1.76 1.91 1.98 1.72 1.03 1.88 2.90 2.93 2.68 2.43 2.23 2.18 2.03 2.04 2.07 2.00 0.76 1.37 2.10 2.87 2.87 2.76 2.50 2.30 2.20 1.91 2.09 2.17 1.88 1.16 2.11 3.28 3.30 3.01 2.73 2.50 2.44 2.27 2.29 2.32 2.25 0.83 1.48 2.28 3.13 3.11 2.99 2.69 2.48 2.37 2.05 2.24 2.34 2.01 1.28 2.34 3.64 3.64 3.32 3.01 2.76 2.69 2.50 2.53 2.55 2.48 0.88 1.58 2.44 3.37 3.32 3.19 2.87 2.63 2.52 2.17 2.38 2.48 2.14 1.40 2.55 3.97 3.95 3.60 3.27 2.99 2.92 2.71 2.75 2.76 2.69 0.93 1.66 2.57 3.57 3.50 3.37 3.01 2.75 2.64 2.26 2.49 2.60 2.23 1.50 2.74 4.27 4.23 3.85 3.49 3.20 3.13 2.90 2.94 2.95 2.88 0.96 1.72 2.68 3.72 3.64 3.49 3.11 2.84 2.73 2.32 2.57 2.69 2.30

Sentron Busway Characteristics

Bus Bar Width × 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) Thick 1.75 1.75 1.75 2.38 3.25 4.38 5.38 6.50 8.75 (2) 5.63 (2) 6.75 (2) 9.00 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75 2.25 2.88 3.50 4.50 6.00 8.50 (2) 4.75 (2) 6.50 (2) 8.50 (44.5) (44.5) (44.5) (60.5) (82.6) (111.3) (136.7) (165.1) (222.3) (143.0) (171.5) (228.6) (44.5) (44.5) (44.5) (44.5) (57.2) (73.2) (88.9) (114.3) (152.4) (215.9) (120.7) (165.1) (215.9) Ohms × 10 ­3 per 100 ft Line-to-Neutral R X Z 3.91 4.05 4.25 3.10 2.25 1.70 1.38 1.14 0.84 0.69 0.57 0.42 2.19 2.22 2.33 2.47 1.89 1.51 1.17 0.89 0.69 0.46 0.43 0.34 0.23 1.19 1.19 1.19 0.96 0.71 0.53 0.44 0.36 0.27 0.21 0.19 0.13 1.19 1.19 1.19 1.19 0.98 0.79 0.66 0.52 0.39 0.28 0.25 0.19 0.14 4.09 4.22 4.41 3.24 2.36 1.78 1.45 1.20 0.88 0.72 0.60 0.44 2.49 2.52 2.61 2.74 2.13 1.70 1.34 1.03 0.79 0.54 0.50 0.39 0.27

0.9 1.57 2.88 4.51 4.44 4.04 3.66 3.35 3.28 3.03 3.09 3.09 3.02 0.97 1.74 2.72 3.80 3.69 3.54 3.13 2.85 2.74 2.32 2.58 2.70 2.31

1.0 1.52 2.81 4.42 4.30 3.90 3.53 3.23 3.16 2.91 2.99 2.96 2.91 0.85 1.54 2.42 3.42 3.27 3.14 2.74 2.47 2.39 1.99 2.23 2.36 1.99

Notes: 1. For plug-in distributed loads, divide voltage drop values by 2. 2. To determine voltage drop line-to-neutral, multiply line-to-line values by 0.577.

3. Actual voltage drop for different lengths and at loadings less than full rated current can be calculated using the formula: Vd (actual) = Vd (table) × actual load × actual length (ft) rated load 100 feet

Ground Resistance

Sentron Busway is the only busway to feature a wide variety of ground paths. ½ Integral aluminum housing ground (std.) ½ Copper or aluminum internal ground ½ Copper or aluminum isolated ground The cross-sectional area of the aluminum housing of Sentron Busway exceeds the minimum ground requirements specified in Table 5.1 of UL 857 by a factor of four or more, and the current carrying capacity offered by the housing is greater than would be provided by an internal aluminum or copper ground bar sized 50% of the phase bar. See Table 10.4. Table 10.4

Phase Bar Ampere Width Rating Inches (mm) Aluminum 600 1.75 (44) 800 2.38 (60) 1000 3.25 (83) 1200 4.38 (111) 1350 5.38 (137) 1600 6.50 (165) 2000 8.75 (222) 2500 5.63 (143) 3000 6.75 (171) 4000 9.00 (229) Copper 600 1.75 (44) 800 1.75 (44) 1000 2.25 (57) 1200 2.88 (73) 1350 3.50 (89) 1600 4.50 (114) 2000 6.00 (152) 2500 8.50 (216) 3000 4.75 (121) 4000 6.50 (165) 5000 8.50 (216) Bars Per Pole

4. For 50 Hz, multiply reactance (X) by 0.85 and resistance values do not change. For 400 Hz, multiply reactance by 3.75 and multiply resistance by 1.4. Calculate new voltage drop: Vd = amps load × = 3 (Rcos + X sin ) per 100 ft, where cos = Power Factor.

Sentron Busway Ground Capacity

Sect. Area Min. Sect. Area Sect. Area Internal Gnd. Bus or Encl. 50% Internal (Housing) UL 857 Table 5.1 (In2) Gnd Bar (In2) Ground (In2) -- 0.166 0.196 0.227 -- 0.294 0.353 0.515 0.589 0.810 -- 0.105 0.132 0.177 -- 0.236 0.294 0.353 0.412 0.589 0.707 0.215 0.294 0.403 0.544 0.669 0.809 1.090 1.401 1.681 2.243 0.215 0.278 0.357 0.434 0.559 0.747 1.059 1.181 1.618 2.118 2.288 2.389 2.528 2.709 2.869 3.048 3.408 4.822 5.180 5.900 2.288 2.368 2.469 2.568 2.728 2.968 3.368 4.540 5.100 5.740 Current Carrying Capacity Ratio Integral / Internal 8.78 6.64 5.06 3.94 3.35 2.91 2.36 2.59 2.28 1.91 5.20 4.13 3.32 2.81 2.28 1.83 1.42 1.73 1.39 1.17

1

2

1

10

Busway Systems

2

Aluminum Housing Ground: ±44% conductivity Aluminum Gound Bar: 58% conductivity Copper Ground Bar: 98% conductivity

180

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16466

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

Plug-In Busway Options and Straight Sections

Sentron busway is available in ratings from 225­5000 amperes, in 4, 6, 8, and 10 ft. lengths (1219, 1829, 2438, and 3048 mm, respectively). Plug-in outlet options are shown below.

Dimensions

Standard Plug-In Busway Plug-in outlets are located on 2-ft. (610 mm) centers on both sides of the busway. This allows optimizing the number of plug-in units in horizontal applications. Standard Riser Busway Plug-in outlets are on one side of the busway and located on 2-ft. (610 mm) centers. This allows optimizing the number of useable plug-in outlets in vertical applications.

Standard Plug-In Outlet Features

Straight Sections

Feeder busway sections are available in 0.5 inch (12.7mm) increments from 2 ft. (610 mm) to 10 ft (3048 mm) in total length. In addition to the standard 10 ft. (3048 mm) plug-in sections, lengths of 4, 6, and 8 feet (1219, 1829, and 2438 mm) are also available. Every section includes a removable joint stack.

Top View for Both Feeder and Plug-In Busway

Feeder Busway -- Side View

10

Busway Systems

Plug-in outlet

Plug-In Busway -- Side View

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

181

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

Feeder and Plug-in Widths and Weights

Dimensions

Note: Plug-in busway is available in 4, 6, 8, and 10 ft. lengths (1219, 1524, 2438, and 3048 mm) Feeder Busway is available in 0.5 in (12.7 mm) increments between 2 ft. (610 mm) and 10 ft. (3048 mm) lengths.

Typical Cross Section

Figure 1 (One Bar Per Pole) Figure 2 (Two Bars Per Pole)

Table 10.5

Sentron Busway Widths and Weights

Approximate Weight­Lbs. per ft. (kg per meter) 4-Wire 100% Neutral with Ground 6 6 6 (9) (9) (9) 4-Wire 200% Neutral with Ground 6 (10) 6 (10) 6 (10) 8 (11) 9 (14) 11 (17) 13 (19) 15 (22) 19 (28) 24 (36) 28 (41) 36 (53) 13 (19) 13 (19) 13 (19) 13 (19) 16 (23) 19 (29) 23 (34) 28 (42) 36 (54) 50 (74) 57 (84) 76 (113) 98 (146)

Ampere Rating Aluminum 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 Copper 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600

Figure 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 (amps/in2)

"W" Dimension Inches (mm) 3.9 (99) 3.9 (99) 3.9 (99) 4.5 (115) 5.4 (137) 6.5 (166) 7.5 (191) 8.6 (219) 10.9 (277) 13.6 (345) 15.8 (402) 20.3 (516) 3.9 (99) 3.9 (99) 3.9 (99) 3.9 (99) 4.4 (112) 5.0 (128) 5.6 (143) 6.6 (169) 8.1 (207) 10.6 (270) 11.8 (300) 15.3 (389) 19.3 (491)

3-Wire 5 (8) 5 (8) 5 (8) 6 (9) 7 (10) 8 (12) 9 (13) 10 (15) 13 (19) 16 (24) 18 (27) 23 (34) 9 (13) 9 (13) 9 (13) 9 (13) 10 (15) 12 (18) 14 (21) 17 (26) 22 (32) 30 (44) 34 (50) 44 (65) 57 (85)

3-Wire with Ground 5 (8) 5 (8) 5 (8) 6 (9) 7 (11) 9 (13) 10 (15) 11 (17) 14 (21) 18 (27) 20 (30) 26 (38) 10 (14) 10 (14) 10 (14) 10 (14) 11 (17) 14 (20) 16 (24) 19 (29) 25 (37) 34 (50) 38 (57) 51 (76) 65 (97)

4-Wire 100% Neutral 6 6 6 (9) (9) (9)

4-Wire 200% Neutral 6 6 6 (9) (9) (9)

7 (10) 8 (12) 9 (14) 11 (16) 12 (18) 15 (23) 19 (29) 22 (33) 28 (42) 10 (16) 10 (16) 10 (16) 10 (16) 12 (19) 15 (22) 17 (26) 22 (32) 28 (41) 38 (56) 43 (64) 57 (85) 73 (109)

7 (10) 8 (12) 10 (15) 11 (17) 13 (19) 16 (24) 21 (31) 24 (36) 31 (46) 11 (17) 11 (17) 11 (17) 11 (17) 14 (20) 16 (24) 19 (29) 24 (35) 30 (45) 42 (62) 48 (71) 63 (94) 81 (121)

7 (11) 9 (13) 11 (16) 12 (18) 14 (21) 18 (26) 23 (34) 26 (39) 33 (50) 12 (18) 12 (18) 12 (18) 12 (18) 15 (22) 18 (26) 21 (31) 26 (38) 33 (50) 46 (68) 52 (78) 69 (103) 90 (133)

10

Busway Systems

2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 Note: Current density

rated busway available. Consult Siemens.

182

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16466

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

Elbows, Tees, and Offsets -- Standard and Combination

Elbows, Tees, and Offsets allow for turns and offsets in the busway to be made in any direction (up, down, left, right). Every section includes a joint stack and joint inspection covers. Table 10.6

Ampere Rating Aluminum 225 ­1350 1600 ­ 3000 4000 Copper 225 ­ 2000 2500 ­ 4000 5000 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610)

Dimensions

Elbows

Up or down elbows (Edgewise)

Standard Flatwise Elbow and Tee Dimensions

Standard Dimensions (Minimum) in Inches (mm) X Y Z (Tees Only)

Up elbow shown

Left or right elbows (Flatwise)

Tees

Up or down tees (Edgewise) Left or right tees (Flatwise)

Right elbow shown

Table 10.8

Ampere Rating 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000

Edge Tees

"A" Dimension in Inches (mm) Aluminum Copper

Up tee shown

Right tee shown

Table 10.7

Combination Elbows and Offsets

Combination Elbows Offsets Standard Dimensions (Minimum) in Inches (mm) Z 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) X 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) Y 5 (127) 5 (127) 8 (203) 5 (127) 5 (127) 8 (203) Z 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) Standard Dimensions (Minimum) in Inches (mm) X 10 (254) 10 (254) 10 (254) 10 (254) 10 (254) 10 (254) Y 8 (203) 12 (305) 16 (406) 8 (203) 12 (305) 16 (406)

13.00 (330)

13.00 (330)

Ampere Rating Aluminum 225 ­1350 1600 ­ 3000 4000 Copper 225 ­ 2000 2500 ­ 4000 5000

18.00 (457) 18.00 (457) 27.00 (686)

29.00 (737)

27.00 (686)

29.00 (737)

For Isolated ground applications dimensions consult sales office.

Edge Tee

8 in. (203 mm) 48 in. (1219 mm) 32 in. (813 mm)

Combination Elbows

Offsets

Up or down offsets (Edgewise) Left or Right offsets (Flatwise)

8 in. (203 mm)

"A" Dim.

24 in. (610 mm)

C L

24 in. (610 mm)

8 in. (203 mm)

10

Busway Systems

C L

24 in. (610 mm)

24 in. 16 in. (610 mm) (406 mm)

C L

up offset shown

Right offset shown

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

183

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

End Tap Boxes

End cable tap boxes can be installed at either end of the busway system. Standard mechanical lugs suitable for aluminum or copper conductors are supplied. No adaptors are needed to field install compression lugs utilizing NEMA hole patterns. Compression lugs are optional. Table 10.9

Ampere Rating Aluminum 225 400 600 800 1000 -- -- 1200 1350 1600 2000 -- 2500 3000 -- 4000 --

Dimensions

Standard / Extended Wire Bending Space Cable tap boxes are designed with both standard and extended wire bending space. Extended wire bending space dimensions are shown in dark shaded areas of Table 10.9.

Provisions for both standard mechanical and compression lugs utilizing NEMA hole patterns.

End Cable Tap Box

Standard Dimensions in Inches (mm) Horizontal Applications -- Figure 1 Vertical Applications -- Figure 2 B B A A Standard Extended Standard Extended 29 (737) 33 (838) 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 13 (330) 29 (737) 33 (838) 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 13 (330) 29 (737) 33 (838) 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 13 (330) 29 (737) 33 (838) 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 13 (330) 29 (737) 33 (838) 13 (330) 25 (635) 29 (737) 13 (330) 32 (813) 36 (914) 13 (330) 28 (711) 32 (813) 13 (330) 32 (813) 36 (914) 13 (330) 28 (711) 32 (813) 13 (330) 32 (813) 36 (914) 18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813) 18 (457) 32 (813) 36 (914) 18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813) 18 (457) 32 (813) 36 (914) 18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813) 18 (457) 32 (813) 36 (914) 18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813) 18 (457) 32 (813) 36 (914) 18 (457) 28 (711) 32 (813) 18 (457) 33 (838) 37 (940) 27 (686) 28 (711) 32 (813) 27 (686) 33 (838) 37 (940) 27 (686) 28 (711) 32 (813) 27 (686) 33 (838) 37 (940) 27 (686) 28 (711) 32 (813) 27 (686) 33 (838) 37 (940) 29 (737) 28 (711) 32 (813) 29 (737) 33 (838) 37 (940) 29 (737) 28 (711) 32 (813) 29 (737) Wire Bend Space C Standard Extended 17 (432) 21 (533) 17 (432) 21 (533) 17 (432) 21 (533) 17 (432) 21 (533) 17 (432) 21 (533) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) Cable Lugs Per Phase and Neutral Qty. Size 1 1 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 6 8 8 9 12 12 15

Copper 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 -- -- 1600 2000 2500 -- 3000 4000 -- 5000

Ground Lugs 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 4

#6 AWG - 350 kcmil, Cu / Al #4 AWG - 600 kcmil, Cu / Al 2 ft. (610 mm) if Isolated Ground is specified.

Fused Reducer

10

Busway Systems

Figure 1 (Horizontal Applications) Figure 2 (Vertical Applications)

184

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16466

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

Center and Plug-In Cable Tap Boxes

Center cable tap boxes can be installed at any point along the busway run. Standard mechanical lugs suitable for aluminum or copper conductors are supplied. No adaptors are needed to field install compression lugs utilizing NEMA hole patterns. Compression lugs are optional. Standard / Extended Wire Bending Space Cable tap boxes are designed with both standard and extended wire bending space. Extended wire bending space dimensions are shown in dark shaded areas of Table 10.10.

Dimensions

Provisions for both standard mechanical and compression lugs utilizing NEMA hole patterns.

Table 10.10 Center Cable Tap Box

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Aluminum A Standard Extended B 29 (737) 16 (406) 25 (635) 29 (737) 16 (406) 25 (635) 29 (737) 16 (406) 25 (635) 29 (737) 16 (406) 25 (635) 29 (737) 16 (406) 25 (635) 33 (838) 16 (406) 29 (737) 33 (838) 16 (406) 29 (737) 37 (940) 20 (508) 33 (838) 37 (940) 20 (508) 33 (838) 41 (1041) 24 (610) 37 (940) 41 (1041) 24 (610) 37 (940) 49 (1245) 28 (711) 45 (1143) -- -- -- Copper A Standard 25 (635) 25 (635) 25 (635) 25 (635) 25 (635) 29 (737) 29 (737) 29 (737) 29 (737) 33 (838) 33 (838) 37 (940) 40 (1016) Cable Bend Space C Standard Extended 17 (432) 21 (533) 17 (432) 21 (533) 17 (432) 21 (533) 17 (432) 21 (533) 17 (432) 21 (533) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) 20 (508) 24 (610) Cable Lugs Per Phase and Neutral Qty. Size 1 1 2 3 4 4 4 5 6 8 9 12 15

Ampere Rating 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000

D 3.9 (99) 3.9 (99) 3.9 (99) 4.3 (109) 4.7 (119) 5.3 (135) 5.8 (147) 6.3 (160) 7.4 (188) 8.7 (221) 9.7 (246) 11.9 (302) --

Extended 29 (737) 29 (737) 29 (737) 29 (737) 29 (737) 33 (838) 33 (838) 33 (838) 33 (838) 37 (940) 37 (940) 41 (1041) 44 (1118)

B 16 (406) 16 (406) 16 (406) 16 (406) 16 (406) 16 (406) 16 (406) 20 (508) 20 (508) 24 (610) 24 (610) 28 (711) 34 (864)

D 3.9 (99) 3.9 (99) 3.9 (99) 3.9 (99) 4.2 (107) 4.5 (114) 4.8 (122) 5.3 (135) 6.1 (155) 7.3 (185) 7.9 (201) 9.4 (239) 11.7 (297)

Ground Lugs 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 4

#6 AWG ­ 350 MCM, Cu/Al #4 AWG ­ 600 MCM, Cu/Al 2-ft. (610 mm) if Isolated Ground is specified.

10

Busway Systems

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

185

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

One- and Three-Phase Service Heads and Standard Stubs

Table 10.11 Three-Phase Service Head

Cable Lugs "A" Dimensions Per Phase in Inches (mm) & Neutral Ground Amp Rating Aluminum Copper Qty. Size Lugs 1 800 13 (330) 13 (330) 3 1 1000 13 (330) 13 (330) 4 1 1200 18 (457) 13 (330) 4 1 1350 18 (457) 13 (330) 4 1 1600 18 (457) 18 (457) 5 2 2000 20 (508) 20 (508) 6 2500 27 (686) 20 (508) 8 2 3000 29 (737) 27 (686) 9 2 4000 3 29 (737) 27 (686) 12 5000 -- 29 (737) 15 4

#6 AWG ­ 350 kcmil, Cu / Al #4 AWG ­ 600 kcmil, Cu / Al

Dimensions

Single-Phase Service Head

Standard Stubs Sentron Busway standard top-mounted stubs can be shipped to the job site factory installed in Siemens switchboards, switchgear and MCC's. Refer to next page for dimensional details.

10

Busway Systems

186

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16466

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

Switchboard, Switchgear, Motor Control Center Stubs

Standard top-mounted Sentron Busway stubs can ship completely installed in Siemens switchboards, switchgear, and motor control centers. Table 10.12

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Aluminum Copper Ref. Bar W Amperes Inches (mm) Amperes 1.75 (44.4) 225 ­ 800 225 ­600 2.25 (57.2) -- 1000 2.38 (60.4) 800 -- 2.88 (73.2) 1200 -- 3.25 ( 82.6) -- 1000 3.50 (88.9) 1350 -- 4.38 (111.3) -- 1200 4.50 (114.3) 1600 -- 5.38 (136.7) -- 1350 6.00 (152.4) 2000 -- 6.50 (165.1) -- 1600 8.50 (215.9) 2500 -- 8.75 (222.3) -- 2000 4.75 (120.7) -- 3000 5.63 (143.0) 2500 -- 6.50 (165.1) -- 4000 6.75 (171.5) 3000 -- -- 8.50 (215.9) 5000 -- 4000 9.00 (228.6) Fig. No. 1.25" 31.75 mm For 1.75", 2.25", and 2.38" Bars 1 For 2.58" and Larger Bars

Dimensions

Internal Ground Bus Drilling Detail

.059" 1.50 mm .059" 1.50 mm

C L

2.00" 50.0 mm 0.75" 19.05 mm All slots (51 are .44" (11.2 mm) x .60" (22.4 mm)

G 8.00" 203 mm Ref.

C L Joint Stack

8.00" 203 mm Ref.

C L Joint Stack

2 .19" 5 mm W W

W

C L Case and Bars One Bar Per Pole Figure 1

C L Case and Bars Two Bars Per Pole Figure 2

Flanged End Bus Bar Drilling Pattern (NEMA) (Same pattern for 2 bus bars per pole.)

1.75" 44.5 mm .563 Dis. Typ. 14.30 mm .88" 22.4 mm 1.75" 44.5 mm 1.75" 44.5 mm .88" 22.4 mm 1.75" 44.5 mm 1.75" 44.5 mm 1.75" 44.5 mm 1.75" 44.5 mm

C L

1.75" 1.75" 44.5 mm 44.5 mm

C L

C L

C L

1.75" 44.5 mm

C L

1.75" 44.5 mm .60" 16.0 mm W W W W W W For 8.50" and 8.75" Bars W W For 9.00" Bars

For 1.75", 2.25", For 3.25", 3.50", 2.78", and 2.38" 4.38", 4.50", and Bars 6.75" Bars

For 5.38", 5.63", 6.00", 6.50", and 6.75" Bars

10

Busway Systems

Note: See Table 10.13 (next page) for "W" dimensions

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

187

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

Expansion Fittings and Reducers

Building Expansion Fitting Expansion sections for Sebtron Busway contain a sliding expansion enclosure that contains flexible connectors. A 2 in. (51 mm) expansion can be accommodated. This joint is required when a busway crosses an expansion joint in a building or on long straight runs where: a) no offsets or elbows are included b) both ends are held fixed, or in a permanent position Table 10.14

Ampere Rating 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000

Dimensions

Expansion Fitting

"A" Dimensions in Inches (mm) Aluminum 13 (330) 13 (330) 13 (330) 13 (330) 13 (330) 18 (457) 18 (457) 18 (457) 18 (457) 23 (584) 23 (584) 25 (635) -- Copper 13 (330) 13 (330) 13 (330) 13 (330) 13 (330) 13 (330) 13 (330) 18 (457) 18 (457) 18 (457) 23 (584) 23 (584) 25 (635)

Note: Expansion fitting allows for ± 2 in. (51 mm) expansion. See Table 10.14 for Dimension A Available in IP 43 and IP 54 only

Fused Reducer The National Electrical Code, Article 36411, entitled "Reduction in Ampacity Size of Busway", requires overcurrent protection where busways are reduced in ampacity. The exception is for industrial applications only. Omission of overcurrent protection shall be permitted at points where busways are reduced in ampacity, provided that the length of the busway having smaller ampacity does not exceed 50 ft. (15.2 meters), and has an ampacity of at least 1/3 rating or setting of the overcurrent device next back on the line, and provided that such busway is free from contact with combustible material. Optional: Available with "Non-Fused" reducer busway fittings.

Note: See Table 10.15 for Dimension A & B

Table 10.15

Ampere Rating 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000

Fused Reducer

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Aluminum B A 4.5 (114) 11.4 (289) 4.5 (114) 12.5 (318) 4.5 (114) 13.5 (343) 4.5 (114) 14.6 (372) 4.5 (114) 16.9 (429) 9.5 (241) 24.6 (625) 9.5 (241) 26.8 (681) 9.5 (241) 31.3 (795) -- -- Copper A 10.4 (264) 11.0 (280) 11.6 (296) 12.6 (321) 14.1 (359) 16.6 (423) 22.8 (579) 26.3 (668) 30.3 (770) B 4.5 (114) 4.5 (114) 4.5 (114) 4.5 (114) 4.5 (114) 4.5 (114) 9.5 (241) 9.5 (241) 9.5 (241)

10

Busway Systems

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

189

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

Roof, Ceiling, Wall and Floor Flanges

Roof Flange Wall, Ceiling, and Floor Flanges These are designed to close off the area around the busway as it passes through a wall, ceiling, or floor. The flange is not intended to provide an airtight seal around the busway. The installer will be responsible for any additional caulking or sealing to meet local codes. Cutout Information and Dimensions

A B A /2 B/2 5 in. 127 mm 0.375 × 0.625 9.5 × 16 mm Slot Typ

Dimensions

Roof flanges provide a watertight seal when IP65 / 66 (outdoor) rated busway enters through a roof. For pitched roofs, the pitch or angle of the roof must be given and also shown on the contractor drawings.

3.5 in. 89 mm

10 in. 254 mm

C L

7 in. 178 mm

0.63 in. 5.9 mm 0.63 in. 5.9 mm 3.25 in. 82.6 mm Center Slots Required Only For Busway With Two Bars Per Hole

Opening Cutout

Table 10.16

Ampere Rating Aluminum 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 -- -- 1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000

Roof Flange

Copper 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 -- 3000 4000 5000 Dimensions in Inches (mm) "A" "B"

Table 10.17

Ampere Rating Aluminum 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 Copper 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000

Cutout Dimensions

Dimensions in Inches (mm) "A" "B" Flange Cutout 10 (254) 10 (254) 10 (254) 11 (279) 12 (305) 13 (330) 14 (356) 15 (381) 17 (432) 20 (508) 22 (559) 26 (660) 10 (254) 10 (254) 10 (254) 10 (254) 11 (279) 12 (305) 12 (305) 13 (330) 15 (381) 17 (432) 18 (457) 21 (533) 26 (660) 6 (152) 6 (152) 6 (152) 7 (178) 8 (203) 9 ( 229) 10 (254) 11 (279) 13 (330) 16 (406) 18 (457) 22 (559) 6 (152) 6 (152) 6 (152) 6 (152) 7 (178) 8 (203) 8 (203) 9 ( 229) 11 (279) 13 (330) 14 (356) 17 (432) 22 (559)

End Closure

12 (305)

18 (457)

16 (406)

22 (559)

20.5 (521) 25 (635)

26.5 (673) 31 (787)

End Closure (Joint stack and covers not included

10

Busway Systems

190

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16466

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

Plug-In Units

Sentron Busway plug-in units are designed with both standard wire bending space and extended wire bending space, and are available with Siemens Sentron molded case circuit breakers and Siemens type visible blade fusible switches with built-in fuse pullers. Sentron Busway offers the industry's first true line of IP rated plug-in units. The handles, in addition to the enclosures, are water resistant and meet worldwide water resistance standards. Third party certification can be supplied upon request. Sentron plug-in units come with the following features: ½ A voidable cover interlock that prevents opening the cover when the device inside is in the "ON" position. ½ A plastic molded front cover handle assembly for ease of use and clear visual indication of the position of the switching device. ½ Color codes and international "ON" and "OFF," indication around the handle. ½ Third party witnessed IP ratings on the plug-in units. ½ Provisions for padlocking and hook stick operation. ½ A safety provision that will prevent the insertion or removal of a plug in unit when turned to the "ON" position. ½ Positive alignment that assures correct installation of the plug-in unit. ½ 90-degree rotation of the front cover handle to assure the handle is always right side up, regardless of orientation of the busway. Extended wire bending space dimensions are shown in the dark shaded areas of the tables below.

Dimensions

Table 10.23 Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs -- Enclosure Only

Ampere Rating 15 ­125 70 ­ 250 200 ­ 400 250 ­ 600 500 ­ 800 30 Breaker Type ED2, ED4, ED6 FD6, FXD6 JXD2, JD6, JXD6 LD6, LXD6 MD6, MXD6 ED6

Table 10.24

Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600

Fusible Bus Plugs -- 250V and 600V

HP Rating 250V 1 Phase 3 10 15 30 50 75 3 Phase 7.5 15 30 60 125 200 600V 1 Phase 10 25 40 50 125 200 3 Phase 20 50 75 150 350 500

10

Busway Systems

Maintenance Plug--breaker installed

192

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16466

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

Dimensions

Table 10.25

Dim. Legend A B C D E F G H J K L

Bus Plug Dimensions

J-Frame Std. Ext. 9.67 9.67 (246) (246) 16.78 (426) 26.44 (672) -- 35.00 (899) -- 11.98 (304) 6.78 (172) 5.00 (127) 37 (940) 42 (1067) 16.78 (426) -- 28.44 (722) -- 37.00 (940) 11.98 (304) 6.78 (172) 5.00 (127) 39 (991) 42 (1067) Fusible Switch Plugs L-Brkr M-Brkr 30/60A Switch 100A Switch Std. Std. Ext. Std. Ext. Std. 11.47 15.59 8.12 8.12 8.12 8.12 (291) (396) (206) (206) (206) (206) 15.93 (405) 37.17 (944) -- 47.53 (1207) -- 13.78 (350) 7.00 (178) 3.93 (100) 50 (1270) 50 (1270) 17.31 (440) 37.17 (944) -- 51.62 (1311) -- 17.90 (455) 8.38 (213) 3.93 (100) 54 (1392) 54 (1392) 12.93 (328) 15.62 (397) -- 22.62 (575) -- 10.43 (265) 3.55 (90) 4.38 (111) 36 (914) 42 (1067) 12.93 (328) -- 17.12 (435) -- 24.12 (613) 10.43 (265) 3.55 (90) 4.38 (111) 36 (914) 42 (1067) 14.39 (366) 20.59 (523) -- 27.62 (702) -- 10.43 (265) 4.91 (125) 4.48 (114) 36 (914) 42 (1067) 14.39 (366) -- 23.17 (586) -- 30.19 (767) 10.43 (265) 4.91 (125) 4.48 (114) 36 (914) 42 (1067) 200A Switch Std. Ext. 8.18 8.18 (208) (208) 17.03 (433) 23.17 (589) -- 30.25 (768) -- 10.49 (266) 7.03 (179) 5.00 (127) 36 (914) 42 (1067) 17.03 (433) -- 29.17 (741) -- 36.25 (921) 10.49 (266) 7.03 (179) 5.00 (127) 39 (991) 42 (1067) 400A Switch Std. Ext. 10.53 10.53 (267) (267) 26.88 (683) 31.73 (806) -- 41.15 (1045) -- 12.84 (326) 16.85 (428) 5.03 (128) 44 (1118) 44 (1118) 26.88 (683) -- 39.73 (1009) -- 49.15 (1248) 12.84 (326) 16.85 (428) 5.03 (128) 52 (1321) 52 (1321) 600A Switch Std. 11.47 (291) 25.75 (654) 37.17 (944) -- 47.53 (1207) -- 13.78 (350) 16.82 (427) 3.93 (100) 50 (1270) 50 (1270)

Circuit Breaker Plugs E-Frame F-Frame Std. Ext. Std. Ext. 8.75 9.12 9.12 8.75 (222) (232) (232) (222) 8.97 (228) 13.25 (337) -- 20.88 (530) -- 11.06 (281) 2.71 (69) 1.26 (32) 36 (914) 42 (1067) 8.97 (228) -- 16.00 (406) -- 23.64 (600) 11.06 (281) 2.71 (69) 1.26 (32) 36 (914) 42 (1067) 10.37 (263) 19.31 (490) -- 27.31 (694) -- 11.43 (290) 3.56 (90) 1.81 (46) 36 (914) 42 (1067) 10.37 (263) -- 24.94 (633) -- 33.00 (838) 11.43 (290) 3.56 (90) 1.81 (46) 36 (914) 42 (1067)

10

Busway Systems

Note: All dimensions are shown in inches and millimeters ( ).

Add 1.78" (45 mm) to include height of box aux. mtg. flanges.

Add .89" (23 mm) to include box aux. mtg. flange hgt.

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

193

Busway Systems

SentronTM Busway

In-Line Disconnect Cubicle

Cubicles provide a means for mounting switches or circuit breakers where power enters or leaves a busway system. Cubicles are used where bolted connections are preferred, instead of a plug-in unit, or at ampere ratings exceeding standard plug-in unit ratings. Cubicles may also be modified to accept kirk key interlocks, ground fault detectors, electrical operator devices, and high technology intelligent systems such as those compatible with the Siemens ACCESS System.

Note:Dimensions listed for cubicles are based on standard cubicle construction using largest ampere rating of busway connection to the cubicle. Should a smaller rating of busway be used (than assumed), Siemens reserves the right to decrease the cubicle size to optimize space requirements. Busway can enter the back, top, bottom, or sides of the cubicle.

Dimensions

Table 10.26

Description of Unit Fusible Switch Molded Case Circuit Breaker Digital Sentron Series MCCB's Power Circuit Breaker Bolted Pressure Switch

ACCESS-compatible.

Type of Disconnect 400­600A FK Visible Blade 800­1200A Vacu-Break JXD6, JD6, LD6, MD6, ND6 PD6, RD6 SJD6, SLD6, SMD6, SND6 SPD6 1600A Frame RL800 (Stationary) RL800, RLF800 (Drawout) RL1600, RL2000, RL3200, RL4000 (Stationary) RL1600, RL2000, RLF1600 (Drawout) 800A 1200­2500A 3000A 4000A

Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C 36 (914) 28 (711) 28 (711) 36 (914) 36 (914) 32 (813) 36 (914) 28 (711) 28 (711) 36 (914) 36 (914) 32 (813) 36 (914) 28 (711) 28 (711) 36 (914) 36 (914) 32 (813) 36 (914) 32 (813) 28 (711) 48 (1219) 32 (813) 28 (711) 48 (1219) 36 (914) 32 (813) 48 (1219) 36 (914) 32 (813) 33 (838) 36 (914) 32 (813) 37 (940) 40 (1016) 32 (813) 37 (940) 40 (1016) 48 (1219) 41 (1041) 40 (1016) 48 (1219)

Panelboard and Meter Center Modules

Busway Adaptors for Risers In riser (vertical) applications, where Sentron Busway ascends vertically through electrical closets, Siemens developed a labor saving busway fitting that integrally provides both panelboard and meter center connections, without having to utilize a plug-in unit to feed wall mounted panelboards and meter centers.

10

Busway Systems

194

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16466

Busway Systems

XL-U® Busway

Component Check List

Straight Section Edgewise Elbow

General

Hanger

End Closure

10

Flatwise Elbow

Busway Systems

Bus Plug -- Fusible

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

197

Busway Systems

XL-U® Busway

Component Check List

General

End Tap Box

Center Tap Box

Joint Stack

Bus Bar Construction

10

Busway Systems

Switchboard Connection

Field Addable Vertical Support

Cubicle

198

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16466

Busway Systems

XL-U® Busway

Temperature Rise Curves

General

Aluminum Bus Bars--Ventilated Case Bars Edgewise Mounted

Aluminum Bus Bars--Ventilated Case Bars Flatwise Mounted

10

Busway Systems

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

199

Busway Systems

XL-U® Busway

Straight Sections

General

Straight section shown is flatwise mounted.

Table 10.33

Feeder or Plug-In Casing Sizes

Dimension A in Inches (mm) 4.50(114) 5.50 (140) 4.50 (114) Aluminum Bus Bars-- Amperes Ventilated Edgewise Flatwise 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 3000 4000 Copper Bus Bars-- Amperes Ventilated Non-Vent. Edgewise Flatwise 225 225 225 400 400 400 600 600 -- -- 600 800 800 1000 800 1000 1200 1200 1350 1600 1350 1000 2000 1600 1200 1350 1600 2000 3000 2500 3000 4000 5000 6000 6500 2000 2500 4000 5000

Figure 1

Non-Vent. 225 400 600 -- 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000

A

10 in (254 mm)

2 5.50 (140) 7.50 (191) 3 9.50 (241) 7.50 (191) 4 9.50 (241)

A

10 in (254 mm)

A

Mounting Position: All references to ampere ratings in this section are based on the assumption that the busway is mounted in the edgewise position so that the bars are edgewise

( ) in horizontal runs, or when the busway is mounted in the vertical position. When horizontal busways are mounted so that the bus bars are flatwise ( ) lower ratings will apply.

10 in (254 mm)

Center Line of Plug-In Openings Back Side 3 in. (76 mm) 3 in. (76 mm) 3 in. (76 mm) 3 in. (76 mm) 3 in. (76 mm)

A

Back Edge of Plug-In Door

2.5 in. (64 mm)

10

10.5 in. (267 mm)

20.63 in. (524 mm)

24 in. (610 mm) 24 in. (610 mm) 120 in. (3048 mm) 24 in. (610 mm) 24 in. (610 mm) 13.5 in. (343 mm)

All shown are edgewise mounted.

Busway Systems

204

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16466

Busway Systems

XL-U® Busway

Plug-In Openings

General

12 in. (305 mm) 4.5 in. (114 mm)

12 in. (305 mm)

Door stop

Door stop Plug-in opening

Embossed bump (holds door in closed position) C L Lanced indents for bus support insulators Center line of plug-in opening

Door stop

Door stop

Slot for bus plug indexing guide finger insures correct sequence of plug installation and removal C L 24 in. (610 mm) 4.5 in. (114 mm) 4.5 in. (114 mm) 7.5 in. (191 mm)

C L

Plug-in insulator (Phase barriers)

Bus bars

Plug-in cover in closed position

Plug-in cover in open position

Grounding finger opening

10

Opening in cover for bus plug interlock. Arm in plug prevents its removal or insertion while device is in "on" position

Busway Systems

Lanced indent in cover, to aid opening door

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

205

Busway Systems

XL-U® Busway

Elbows and Tees -- Flatwise / Edgewise

It is important to note that the dimensions shown on this page refer to elbows with 1, 2 or 4 bars per phase, flatwise or edgewise, and 8 bars per phase flatwise. Flatwise Elbows The flatwise LH(-3) elbow and RH(-1) elbow are identical except that the joint stack assembly is located on opposite ends. The assembly is interchangeable and can be relocated on the job to serve either direction. The standard 12 in. (305 mm) dimension becomes 18 in. (457 mm) for 8 bars per phase edgewise. Standard elbows do not contain plug-in openings.

C L 12 in. (305 mm)

Dimensions

C L 12 in. (305 mm)

(LH-3) (LH-3)

(RH-1) (RH-1)

Neutral On Bottom Side

Flatwise Elbows

Edgewise Elbows Edgewise elbows are also furnished in RH(-2) or LH(-4) construction to meet job requirements. The joint stack is not interchangeable as in flatwise construction.

(LH-4) (LH-4)

C L 12 in. (305 mm)

C L 12 in. (305 mm)

(RH-2) (RH-1)

Neutral On This Side

Edgewise Elbows

Tees XL-U tees simplify branch runs of busway from the parent feeder run or feeding branch run. They are available edgewise or flatwise, RH or LH. Two joint stack assemblies are provided with each tee.

The edgewise tee is housed inside a special box enclosure to provide rigidity and shield against dirt and dust. Standard tees do not contain plug-in openings.

It is important to note the size of the box enclosure when laying out an edgewise run. The table below clarifies dimensions.

Table 10.35

12 in. (305 mm)

Edgewise Tees

B 32.0 (813) 32.0 (813) 32.0 (813) 48.0 (1219) C 16.0 (406) 16.0 (406) 16.0 (406) 24.0 (610)

C L

12 in. (305 mm)

C L

12 in. (305 mm)

36 in. (914 mm) 24 in. (610 mm)

C L B

36 in. (914 mm) 24 in. (610 mm)

36 in. (914 mm) 24 in. (610 mm)

C L C

C C

36 in. (914 mm) 24 in. (610 mm)

Dimensions in Inches (mm) No. of Casing A Bars Size 14.0 1-Per 4.5 (114) (356) Pole 5.5 (140) 2-Per Pole 4.5 (114) 5.5 (140) 7.5 (191) 9.5 (241) 7.5 (191) 9.5 (241) 14.0 (356) 18.0 (457) 16.0 (406)

A

4-Per Pole

Double-case dimensions: 36 in. (610 mm) Note (edgewise only): Where 2 bars-per-phase are required, consult Siemens sales office.

8-Per Pole

10

Busway Systems

Flatwise Tee

Edgewise Tee

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

207

Busway Systems

XL-U® Busway

Offsets and Crosses

Offset Elbows Offsets can often be used to save space and to solve difficult contour problems. A single offset may be used, for example, to replace two or more elbows and provide a more attractive, space-saving way to bypass obstructions. Offsets may also be used to convert an edgewise run to flatwise, or vice versa. Table 10.36

Dimensions

Offset Elbows

B C Dimensions in Inches (mm) Casing Size A 4.5 × 10.0 (114) × (254) 5.5 × 10.0 12.0 (140) × (254) (305) 7.5 × 10.0 (191) × (254) 9.5 × 10.0 (241) × (254) 7.5 × 10.0 18.0 (191) × (254) (457) 9.5 × 10.0 (241) × (254)

12.0 (305)

12.0 (305)

18.0 (457)

18.0 (457)

C L C L C L

12 in. (305 mm)

C L

C L

C L C L A B C L

12 in. (305 mm)

C L

C L

12 in. (305 mm)

C

12 in. (305 mm)

C L

Edgewise Double Offset

Flatwise Double Offset

Edge-to-Flat Offset Elbow

Crosses Crosses provide two branch extensions from a feeder run, tapping each from a single point.

Two joint-stack assemblies are provided with each XL-U cross. Standard crosses do not contain plug-in openings.

Table 10.37

36 in. (914 mm) 24 in. (610 mm) 36 in. (914 mm) 24 in. (610 mm)

Crosses

12 in. (305 mm)

C L C

36 in. (914 mm) 24 in. (610 mm)

12 in. (305 mm)

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

C L

12 in. (305 mm)

C L

12 in. (305 mm)

36 in. (914 mm) 24 in. (610 mm)

C L B C

C

C

B

No. of Bars 1-Per Pole 2-Per Pole

Casing Size 4.5 (114) 5.5 (140) 4.5 (114) 5.5 (140) 7.5 (191) 9.5 (241)

A 14.0 (356) 14.0 (356) 18.0 (457)

B 32.0 (813) 32.0 (813) 32.0 (813)

C 16.0 (406) 16.0 (406) 16.0 (406)

A

4-Per Pole

Flatwise Cross

Edgewise Cross

10

Busway Systems

208

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16466

Busway Systems

XL-U® Busway

Cable Tap Boxes

End cable tap boxes can be installed at either end of the busway system. Standard mechanical lugs suitable for aluminum or copper conductors are supplied. See Tables 10.38 and 10.39. Table 10.38

Rating Amperes 225 400 600 800 1000 ­1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 3500

Dimensions

B A

End Cable Tap Box

Range #6-350 kcmil GND Lugs Qty. Range

Lugs Qty./ 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 11

C

1 #6-350 kcmil

#4-600 kcmil 2

D

C L 12 in. (305 mm)

Gutter 10 (254) 15 (381) 20 (508)

Table 10.39

Rating Amperes Cu 225 400 ­ 600 800 ­ 2000 2500 ­ 3500 Al

End Cable Tap Box

Dimensions in Inches (mm) B 14 (355.6) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) C 8 (203.2) 12 (304.8) 16 (406.4) 18 (457.2) D 4 (101.6) 4 (101.6) 4 (101.6) 6 (152.4)

A 20 225 (508) 400 ­ 24 600 (609.6) 800 ­ 32 1350 (812.8) 1600 ­ 32 2500 (812.8)

A center cable tap box consists of a tap off joint stack assembly and an enclosure with lugs being mounted on the tap off bars. Center cable tap boxes are installed at any standard joint of a busway. Therefore, the case width and the number of bars / pole in the case, dictate the type of center cable tap box that is to be ordered.

The box may be reversed to provide wiring space on the left-hand side of the box instead of the right side. Lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors are provided as shown in Table 10.40. The tables on this page are set up for only one, two, and four bars per pole construction. The center cable tap box for 8 bars / pole consists of an enclosure and a busway stub on each end. The size of this enclosure will vary with its lug requirements. See Tables 10.40 and 10.41.

Table 10.40

Tap Box Amp. Rating (Max.) 600 1200 2000

Center Cable Tap Box

Lug Qty. GND 2 1 4 1 6 2 Gutter in Inches (mm) 14 (356) min. 20 (508) min. 20 (508) min.

Notes: lugs are #4-600 kcmil Al lugs. GND lugs are #6-350 kcmil Al lugs.

Table 10.41

Center Cable Tap Box

Box Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C 24 (610) 12 (305) 18 (457) 26 (660) 12 (305) 18 (457) 32 (813) 18 (457) 18 (457) 32 (813) 18 (457) 18 (457)

Tap Box Busway Amp. Ampere Rating Rating Al Cu Max. 225­600 225­600 600 600 800­2500 800­3500 1200 2000

9 in. (229 mm)

A

7.5 in. or 9.5 in. (192 mm) (241 mm) C

Schematic Breakdown

C

Table 10.42

Tap Box Capacity A B C 30 (762) 30 (762) 36 (914) # 4-600 kcmil Lugs/Pole 2 4 6

12 in. (305 mm)

B

12 in. (305 mm)

10

Busway Systems

B

600A 48 (1219) 24 (610) 1350A 60 (1524) 36 (914) 2000A 60 (1524) 36 (914) over 2000A Consult Factory

30 in. 762 mm)

C L

of box & busway

A

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

209

Busway Systems

XL-U® Busway

Transformer Tap -- 3Ø

Standard transformer tap sections consist of standard straight sections with transformer type tap off joint stacks and are used for single transformers or on a three transformer bank, either Delta or Wye systems. Delta taps are available for a single transformer or for a three transformer bank in either 3 or 4 pole, half or full capacity neutral. Wye taps are available for 3, 4W, half or full capacity neutral in either a single transformer or a three transformer bank. It must be noted that the joint stack tap off bars in the 2 and / or 4 bar / pole construction are limited to two 0.25 × 4.0 in. (6.35 × 101.6 mm) copper or aluminum bus bars per pole. This will carry a per

Dimensions

pole maximum of 2500 amperes in copper and 2000 amperes in aluminum at the point of the tap off. In the 8 bar per pole busway, two joint stacks are employed so the carrying capacity of the tap is doubled.

Single Transformer

Closed End

10 in. (254 mm) 7 in. (178 mm) A B C N N C B A

3 Pole 3

4W 1/2 Neutral or 3

4W Full Neutral

3 Transformer Bank

Closed End

Closed End

A

B Std. Str. Sect.

C Std. Str. Sect.

C

A

10 in. (254 mm)

A

B Std. Str. Sect.

B

CN Std. Str. Sect.

C

A

10 in. (254 mm)

7 in. (178 mm)

7 in. (178 mm)

3 Pole Delta

3

4W 1/2 Delta

.5 in. N. Busway (13 mm)

items & must be full neut. busway

Closed End

Closed End

A

N Std. Str. Sect.

B

N Std. Str. Sect.

C

N

10 in. (254 mm)

A

N Std. Str. Sect.

B

N Std. Str. Sect.

C

N

10 in. (254 mm)

7 in. (178 mm)

7 in. (178 mm)

3

4W 1/2 Neutral Wye

3

4W Full Neutral Wye

10

Busway Systems

Notes: 1. Use standard length straight sections, preferably 36 in. (914 mm), 48 in. (1219 mm), or 60 in. (1524 mm) between centers. 2. Sections are to be itemized. 3. Number & size of lugs should be specified.

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

211

Busway Systems

XL-U® Busway

Wall Flanges / End Closures

Wall flanges can be mounted at any point along a busway run by using them as shown.

.32 in. (8mm) dia. holes­ bolts for fastening to the wall or ceiling to be furnished by contractor

.32 in. (8mm) dia. holes­bolts for fastening to the wall or ceiling to be furnished by contractor .5 in. (13 mm)

Dimensions

End closures are used to terminate busway runs. They can be removed later to extend the run if required.

.5 in. (13 mm)

Pc. No. "Y"

Pc. No. 103230

.24.63 in. (626 mm)

Pc. No. "X"

Pc. No. 103231

Pc. No. "X"

.5 in. (13 mm)

.5 in. (13 mm)

A

.5 in. (13 mm)

Table 10.44

Edgewise Flange

A 8.5 (216) 9.5 (241) 11.5 (292) 13.5 (343)

Case Size 4.5 × 10 (114 × 254) 5.5 × 10 (140 × 254) 7.5 × 10 (191 × 254) 9.5 × 10 (241 × 254)

.5 in. (13 mm)

.5 in. (13 mm)

A

.5 in. (13 mm)

Table 10.46

End Closure

Table 10.45

Case Size

Flatwise Flange

A 11.5 (292) 13.5 (343)

7.5 × 20.6 (191 × 523) 9.5 × 20.6 (241 × 523)

Case Size 4.5 × 10 (114 × 254) 5.5 × 10 (140 × 254) 7.5 × 10 (191 × 254) 9.5 × 10 (241 × 254) 7.5 × 21 (191 × 533) 9.5 × 21 (241 × 533)

Hangers

Standard clamp-type hangers are used for horizontal busway suspension. The pre-drilled hangers bolt together at the corners and can be slid over section lengths. It not necessary to bolt or screw the hanger to casings.

.75 in. (19 mm) .52 in. (13 mm) Dia.

To speed installation, Hangfast® Adaptors are recommended for use with the hangers. When duct is hung flatwise from rods or straps, one Hangfast Adaptor per hanger is sufficient. Edgewise mounting, particularly in the higher ampere busway,

may require two-point suspension from each hanger to provide increased rigidity. Occasional sway-bracing is also recommended. XL-U runs can be mounted on 10-foot centers.

C D

Table 10.47

1.63 in. (41 mm)

Hangers

C 13.25 (337) 13.25 (337) 13.25 (337) 13.25 (337) 24.00 (610) 24.00 (610) D 11.8 (300) 11.8 (300) 11.8 (300) 11.8 (300) 22.5 (572) 22.5 (572)

3.8 in. (99 mm)

.41 in. Dia. (10 mm) AB

12 GA. Steel .38 in. (10 mm) R

.63 in. (16 mm)

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Casing Size A B 4.5 × 10 7.75 (197) 6.3 (160) 5.5 × 10 8.75 (222) 7.3 (185) 7.5 × 10 10.75 (273) 9.3 (236) 9.5 × 10 12.75 (324) 11.3 (287) 7.5 × 21 10.75 (273) 9.3 (236) 9.5 × 21 12.75 (324) 11.3 (287)

10

Busway Systems

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

213

Busway Systems

XJ-L® Busway

Siemens XJ-L® busway was designed to provide an infinite variety of indoor electrical power distribution systems. A complete selection of modular sections and system-tailored hardware make it suitable for diverse applications. Safety-engineered XJ-L busway effectively meets the needs of these applications -- from interlock fingers to prevent incorrect attachment, dead-front construction with receptacle-type plug-in openings to permit power tap-off without power shutdown. Each XJ-L busway section and fitting is prefabricated and self-contained for timesaving assembly. Bus bars are steel encased, insulated, and an internal ground bus is provided. All sections mate end-to-end, and slide together easily. Plug-in type outlets are spaced at 20-inch intervals on both sides of each section, and all outlets can be used simultaneously. Electrically fed equipment can be installed or moved anywhere along the busway run without power shut-down. All bus-

General

way components are integrally compatible and can be relocated and re-used without wasting parts or time. Typical Applications ½ Computer Manufacturing ½ Machine Shops ½ Office Buildings ½ Laboratories ½ Schools and Hospitals

Note: Receptacles as shown are not supplied.

Table 10.50

Microhms (10 ) Per Foot R LEG 268 166.6 82.3 X LEG 85 96.2 40.7 Z LEG 281 188 91.8 Z LL 486.7 325.7 159.0

­6

Line to Line VD/100 ft. I x Z LL Busway Factor 95.4 88.7 89.7 Dist. Load 2.43 1.65 1.6 Conc. Load 4.86 3.3 3.2

Line to Neut. VD/100 ft. I x Z LN Dist. Load 1.40 .94 .9 Conc. Load 2.81

Ampere Rating 100 100 200

Bus Bar Material 0.125 × 0.50 (3.175 × 12.7) Al 0.125 × 0.50 (3.175 × 12.7) Cu 0.125 × 1.0 Cu (3.175 × 25.4)

10

Busway Systems

1.88 1.8

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

217

Busway Systems

XJ-L® Busway

Straight Sections / Isolated Ground

Available with either copper or aluminum tin finished bus bars, XJ-L busway sections have 12 plug-ins per 10-foot (3048 mm) length. Plug-ins are located in alternate positions from side-to-side, and can be used simultaneously. Available in 100 or 200 ampere capacities in 3 phase, 3 wire or 3 phase, 4 wire; with or without internal ground, and 100 and 200 ampere isolated ground. Isolated ground bus can be used as a second neutral to minimize harmonic problems. 20-gauge steel casings, coated with ANSI-61 polyester urethane powder paint, are corrosion resistant. Each section comes with a rotating cover plate to facilitate inspection of joints. 100 ampere 10-foot sections weigh as little as 36 pounds (16.33 kg) and 200 ampere sections no more than 62 pounds (28.12 kg).

Dimensions

Isolated Ground

Plug-in openings both sides. TOP

IG

Direction of insulator end. 120 in. (3048 mm) 4 in. (102 mm) 13 in. (330 mm) 20 in. (508 mm) 20 in. (508 mm) 20 in. (508 mm) 20 in. (508 mm) 20 in. (508 mm) Inspection opening 7 in. (178 mm)

2.06 in. (52 mm)

.13 in. (3 mm)

.88 in. (22 mm) .88 in. (22 mm) .88 in. (22 mm) 6.13 in. (156 mm)

N

IG A B C N

·

Gnd. A

1.44 in. (37 mm)

Gnd.

B

Note: A ground, ("Gnd." in diagram), is available for all XJ-L busway. The neutral bar "N" is omitted on 3-pole bus. For busway with isolated

ground the isolated bus will be added above A . System available with both ground and iosolated ground.

Table 10.51

Bus Bar Dimension "A" Dim. "B" & Material in Inches (mm) Inches Phase Neutral (mm) Ground & Isolated Gnd. 0.125 × 0.5 Al 0.031 × 1.9 Al (3.175 × 12.7) (0.794 × 48.26) 2.0 (50.8) 0.125 × 0.5 Cu 0.031 × 1.9 Cu (3.175 × 12.7) (0.794 × 48.26) 0.125 × 1.0 Cu 0.031 × 2.4 2.5 Cu (3.175 × 25.4) (0.794 × 60.96) (63.5)

10

Busway Systems

IG A B C N GRD 1.88 in. (48 mm) 1.06 in. (27 mm) C of plug-in L opening on this side 10 in. (254 mm)

C of plug-in L opening on the other side

100 Amp Busway Can Be Supplied As: 3 3W 3 4W 3 3W W/GRD 3 4W W/GRD 3 3W W/IG 3 4W W/IG 3 3W W/GRD & IG 3 4W W/GRD & IG (X004GIG) GRD = Bonded Ground Bus IG = Isolated Ground Bus GIG = Both Bonded and Isolated Ground Bus

View with front half of housing cut away to expose insulators which also serve as plug-in openings. Insulators are spaced on 10 in. centers.

218

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16466

Busway Systems

XJ-L® Busway

Elbows

Elbows allow for turns and offsets in the busway to be made in any direction (up, down, left, right). Edgewise Elbows

· ·

Dimensions

Insulator End

·

15 in. (381 mm)

11 in. (279 mm)

TOP

· ·

TOP

· ·

11 in. (279 mm)

Schematic Breakdown

Schematic Breakdown

Flatwise Elbows

Left Hand (-3)

15 in. (381 mm)

Right Hand (-1)

15 in. (381 mm) TOP

TOP Insulator end

11 in. (279 mm)

11 in. (279 mm)

Insulator end

Schematic Breakdown

Schematic Breakdown

Switchboard Connections Switchboard Connections are encased bus bar extensions used to connect busway to switchboards.

10 in. (254 mm)

.44 in. (11 mm) .22 in. (6 mm) FULL R. 040 R. APP. .27 in. DIA. (7 mm) .34 in. R (9 mm)

.25 in. (6 mm)

.34 in. (9 mm) .69 in. (18 mm)

Isolated Ground 4 in. (102 mm) 6 in. (152 mm) 4 in. (102 mm) 2.5 in. (64 mm) .5 in. slots .37 in. (9 mm) x (13 mm)

.53 in. (14 mm)

.5 in. (13 mm) .5 in. (13 mm) 1 in. (25 mm)

TOP 2 in. (51 mm) 1 in. (25 mm)

1.5 in. (38 mm)

.37 in. (9 mm)

.38 in. DIA. (10 mm)

Insulator End 15 in. (381 mm)

Left Hand (-4)

Right Hand (-2)

·

C L 9 in. (229 mm)

.53 in. (14 mm)

10

Bus Bar Drilling

Busway Systems

1.58 in. (40 mm) Adjustable Support Spacer Ground bar connection if required INSULATOR END .37 in. (9 mm) C L 5 in. (127 mm)

Schematic Breakdown

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

219

Busway Systems

XJ-L® Busway

Plug-In Outlet Cover / Wall Flange

Plug-In Outlet Cover The accessory outlet cover is optional equipment for closing off the plug-in openings.

4.09 in. (104 mm)

Dimensions

Wall Flange Wall Flanges are used to cover wall, floor or ceiling openings.

.38 in. x .5 in. (10 mm) (13 mm) 3 Slots Required

Note: 2 required to make on flange

5.13 in. (130 mm)

5.34 in. (136 mm) 1.5 in. (38 mm) B A 1.5 in. (38 mm) .38 in. x .5 in. (10 mm) (13 mm) Mounting Holes (Hardware Not Supplied)

Table 10.54

.28 in. (7 mm) diameter holes

Wall Flange

Dimensions in Inches (mm) "A" "B" 5.062 (128.57) 2.062 (52.37) 5.562 (141.27) 2.562 (65.07)

Catalog Number XOC

Ampere 100 200

End Closure / Hanger

End Closure End Closures are used to terminate busway runs. They can be removed later to extend the run if required. Hanger Hangers are two-piece, bolt-together design. Two complete hangers are furnished with each straight section and fitting.

A B

C L C L A

.94 in. (24 mm)

16 Gauge Steel Two Piece-Painted Catalog Number XH2

.28 in. (7 mm) 4 in. (102 mm) 4.75 in. (121 mm) 4 in. (102 mm) .38 in. (10 mm) .13 in. (3 mm) .31 in. R (8 mm) .56 in. (14 mm) 1.44 in. (37 mm) plastic hole plug

.38 in. x .63 in. slot (10 mm) (16 mm) to accommodate screw or drop rod

.13 in. (3 mm)

6.31 in. (160 mm) 7.81 in. (198 mm)

5 in. (127 mm)

6.19 in. (157 mm)

.44 in. (11 mm)

.63 in. (16 mm)

.66 in. (17 mm)

.88 in. (22 mm) .28 in. (7 mm) square

1 in. (25 mm)

1.75 in. (44 mm)

1 in. (25 mm)

1.25 in. (32 mm)

10

Busway Systems

Table 10.56

Ampere 100 200

Hanger

Dimensions in Inches (mm) "A" "B" 2.12 (54) 1.56 (40) 2.62 (67) 2.06 (52)

Table 10.55

End Closure

Ampere 100 200 Dimension A in Inches (mm) 2.06 (52) 2.56 (65)

CSI Section 16466

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

221

Medium Voltage Controllers -- Series 81000TM

General

The Siemens Series 81000TM medium voltage motor controller is a modular design consisting of one or more contactors, each with three current limiting fuses, all housed in a freestanding sheet steel enclosure. The enclosure is designed for front access, allowing the equipment to be located against a wall or back-to-back. Typical applications include: ½ Squirrel-Cage Induction Motors (nonreversing, reversing, and multi-speed) ½ Reduced Voltage Starters (autotransformer or reactor type) ½ Synchronous motors (brush or brush-less type) ½ Wound Rotor Motors -- with or without secondary control ½ Transformer Feeders ½ Capacitor Bank Feeders ½ Power Bus Feeders (Tie) The utilization voltage range for the controllers is 2300 through 7200 volts AC. The Siemens Series 81000 medium voltage controller allows the user to combine vacuum contactors, latched contactors and load break switches in one line-up. The user can also connect directly to Siemens GM Medium Voltage switchgear without additional transition sections. This provides extreme flexibility in systems design. Contactors E1 (Unfused) -- NEMA refers to this unfused, magnetically-held device as a class E1 controller. All type 97H3 (360A) vacuum contactors are rated interrupting capacity at up to 7200 volts, while the 90H6 (720A) vacuum contactor is rated 10kA interrupting capacity up to 5000 volts. E2 (Fused) Contactors -- To meet interrupting capability required for NEMA Class E2 controllers, the 97H3 and 90H6 contactors are provided with primary current limiting fuses in all three phases. The resulting interrupting ratings are shown in the Table 12.1. Table 12.1 Series 81000TM Ratings

Interrupting Capacity Enclosed Continuous Ampere Rating 360 720 360 720 360 720 360 Motor Horsepower Rating (3 Phase) Maximum Synchronous InducMotor Motors tion Fuse 0.8 PF 1.0 PF Motors Rating 1500 3000 2500 5500 2500 5500 4000 1750 3500 3000 6000 3000 6000 5000 1500 3000 2500 5500 2500 5500 4000 24R 57X 24R 57X 24R 57X 24R Transformer Loads Maximum 3-Phase kVA 1500 2000 2500 3500 2500 4000 1500 Maximum Fuse Rating 450E 600E 450E 600E 450E 600E 200E

Standards The key standards applicable to medium voltage controllers are: ½ NEMA ICS 3 Part 2 ½ UL-347 ½ NEC (Article 710) Series 81000 controllers with vacuum contactors comply fully with these standards, and can be provided in compliance with specialty standards, such as the California Code. Vacuum Technology Series 81000 Controllers utilizing type 97H3 or 90H6 vacuum contactors offer extended service life and provide long mechanical and electrical life with minimal maintenance. Arc interruption is completely contained within vacuum interrupters, eliminating the need for arc chutes, blowout coils, and pole plates. Extended Electrical Life Since arc interruption takes place in a sealed environment within the vacuum interrupter, arcing times are very short. As a result, arc erosion of the contacts is minimal, and an operating life of 250,000 operations at rated load current is typical. This long life is unobtainable in traditional air magnetic designs. Single-Phase Protection The Siemens SAMMS-MVTM relay (optional) and the type 3UA overload relay (standard) are available in the Series 8100. Unlike conventional overload relays provided by other manufacturers, both SAMMS-MV and the 3UA include standard single-phase protection. UL Listing The Series 81000 offers a broad range of UL listed controllers. Power Fuses The current limiting fuses used with the 97H3 vacuum contactors are ANSI Class "R" Type FM (up to 4800 volts) and Type

Series 81000 MV Controller

12

Medium Voltage Controllers A720R (over 4800 volts) rated for motor starting duty. Class "E" fuses, used for non-motor loads such as transformers and capacitor banks, can also be provided in Series 81000 controllers. Siemens Advanced Motor Master System -- (SAMMS-MVTM) The SAMMS-MV unit is a softwareconfigured electronic motor control and overload protection device that incorporates protection tailored to the special characteristics of medium voltage motors. The SAMMS-MV system includes a microporcessor-based unit which receives signal inputs from a set of current transformers (either 3-1Ø or 13Ø) and power input from a 12 volt auxiliary transformer. To perform certain monitoring and setup activities, a hand-held communicator (HHC) is required. The SAMMS-MV device is a multi-functional system offering the following: ½ Advanced Motor-Protection for Medium Voltage Motors ½ Pre-Programmed Control Circuits ½ Standardized Control Panel with Input / Output Devices Replacing Conventional Pushbuttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches ½ Diagnostics ½ Statistical Motor Data ½ Real-Time Metering ½ Local Display Of All Motor And Control Circuit Data ½ Open Architecture Communications Using Siemens ACCESSTM System.

System Voltage 2300 2300 4000 4000 4600 4600 6900

Unfused Class E1 5kA 10kA 5kA 10kA 5kA 10kA 8.2kA

Fused Class E2 200 MVA 200 MVA 350 MVA 350 MVA 400 MVA 400 MVA 570 MVA

Nominal motor voltage 6600V.

CSI Section 16920

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

239

Medium Voltage Controllers -- Series 81000TM

Construction Details

Enclosures Available in a variety of styles to meet most applications, enclosure types include: ½ NEMA 1 Non-Gasketed ½ NEMA 1 Gasketed ½ NEMA 2 Drip-proof ½ NEMA 12 Dust-Tight ½ NEMA 3R Non-Walk-in ½ NEMA 3B Walk-in External Finish is ANSI 61 light gray polyester urethane, electrostatically applied. Special colors and finishes are optionally available Compartment Segregation Each Series 81000 controller assembly consists of three areas completely segregated from one another: ½ Contactor Compartment ½ Power Bus System (High Voltage) ½ Low Voltage Section

General

Standard vertical structures consist of three 30 in. (762 mm) high compartments. One, two, or three controllers (depending on rating) may be included in one structure. When three controllers are required, the horizontal bus (including ground bus) is mounted in an additional top mounted 10 in. (254 mm) high bus compartment. An optional configuration (not shown) using two 45 in. (1143 mm) high compartments with top mounted bus is also available to comply with American Petroleum Institute specifications.

12

Medium Voltage Controllers

240

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16920

Medium Voltage Controllers -- Series 81000TM

Construction Details

General

12

Medium Voltage Controllers

Door-in-Door Construction

Low Voltage Compartment Associated with Each Controller

Low Voltage Compartment All active starter compartment front panels are provided with a "door-in-a-door" for access to the controller low voltage area. Devices normally mounted in this section include the SAMMS-MV 4300 Power Meter or other overload relay, ammeter, control relays, timing relays, pushbuttons, indicating lights, etc. Location within this section totally isolates the devices from any source of high voltage and allows access to these control components without interrupting Table 12.2 Series 81000 Bus Ratings

Continuous Type Bus Amperes Main 600 Horizontal 1000 1200 1000 1200 2000 3000 360 Vertical 540 720 600 Ground Conductor Size in Inches (mm) 0.25 (6) x 3.00 (76) 0.375 (10) x 3.00 (76) 0.50 (13) x 3.00 (76) 0.25 (6) x 3.00 (76) 0.375 (10) x 3.00 (76) 2 x 0.375 (10) x 3.00 (76) 3 x 0.50 (13) x 3.00 (76) 0.25 x (6) x 1.00 (25) 0.25 (6) x 1.50 (38) 0.50 (13) x 2.00 (51) 0.25 (6) x 2.00 (51)

service. Terminal blocks for control circuit wiring terminations are also accessible in this compartment. When extensive metering or special protective devices are required, the upper 30-in. (762 mm) high compartment can be used as a separate low voltage compartment in addition to the "door-ina-door" low voltage compartment associated with each individual controller.

Power Bus All power bus is isolated behind grounded steel barriers. Automatic shutters are provided to cover the line-side bus stabs whenever a starter door is opened. Horizontal bus ratings range from 600 through 3000 amperes and are further detailed in Table 12.2. Vertical tap buses in each section are rated 360, 540, or 720 amperes, depending on the application. Insulated bus with boots are available as options.

Conductor Material Aluminum

Copper

Current Density (Amps/in2) 800 889 800 1333 1067 889 667 1440 1440 720 1200

Main and Vertical Bus Construction (shown with optional insulation)

Note: Direct in-line transitions to Siemens GM 5kV switchgear are available if required.

3000A bus must be located on top of unit.

CSI Section 16920

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

241

Medium Voltage Controllers -- Series 81000TM

Construction Details

General

The drawout operation is a simple one-step process. After the contactor is open (or deenergized), merely move the racking handle to the "OFF" position (disconnected), open the starter door, and the contactor is ready to be rolled out of the compartment. Safety Interlocking A combination of mechanical and electrical interlocks are included to: ½ Prevent forward and back movement of the drawout carriage (isolation switch), unless the contactor is deenergized or open. ½ Prevent the opening of the high voltage compartment door, unless the drawout carriage (isolation switch) is in the disconnect position. ½ Prevent the forward movement of the drawout carriage (isolation switch) to the connected position, unless the high voltage compartment door is closed. Control Power Transformers The basic controller includes as standard a 0.75kVA control power transformer mounted on the drawout carriage. Oversize ratings are available up to 3.25kVA, when mounted on the drawout carriage.

Controller Interior -- Insulated Shutters Cover Line Side Stabs when Carriage is Withdrawn

12

Medium Voltage Controllers

Isolation Disconnect (Drawout Mechanism) The Series 81000 controllers use the complete contactor (or fuse carriage draw-out assembly for 720A controllers) as the high voltage isolation switch, as described in NEMA ICS 3 Part 2 Clause 7.2.C. Horizontal forward and back movement of the drawout assembly simultaneously opens and closes the line and load disconnect contacts.

Because both line and load terminals are disconnected, there is no need for grounding the load side terminals in the open position. Non-conducting glass polyester barriers (shutters) completely isolate the stationary line terminals. The shutter mechanism is positively driven by the same linkage mechanism which moves the drawout carriage from the connected to the disconnected position.

Blown Fuse Trip Option A blown fuse trip option can be supplied to open the contactor in the event of a blown primary power fuse. An NC contact in the closing coil circuit opens when any primary power fuse operates, causing the contactor to open. Latched Contactors A latched version of the contactor with manual, electrical or capacitor charged release, is available for feeder applications. This keeps the contactor closed even when power to the coil has been removed. A typical application is as a transformer feeder where it is not desired that the controller open during a momentary loss of primary power. Test Circuit Each Series 81000 controller is provided with a built-in test circuit for operation of the contactor from a remote source of control power and the "test-run" switch is set at the "test" position. This circuit will function only if the contactor is disconnected from its primary source of power and the "test-run" switch is set at the "test" position. It allows the maintenance and operation of the main contactor and low voltage control circuitry without requiring energizing the motor, or disconnecting any load cables.

Control Power Transformer and CPT Fuses

Blown Fuse Trip Bar Option Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

242

CSI Section 16920

Medium Voltage Controllers -- Series 81000TM

Construction Details

General

12

Medium Voltage Controllers

Siemens 3UA Overload Relay

Current Transformers and cable Termination Area

Functional Schematic of 3UA Overload Relay

Overload Protection -- 3UA or ESP100 Running overcurrent (overload) protection for the motor must also be provided according to NEMA standards. This overload (or longtime) protection can be provided by the Siemens type 3UA (OLR) bimetallic thermal overload relay. This 3phase adjustable relay provides inherent single phase protection and phase unbalance protection with NEMA class 10 tripping characteristics, providing optimum

protection for motors having acceleration times of six seconds or less and hot allowable locked rotor times of five seconds or more. It is equipped with an isolated normally open contact to actuate a remote alarm in the event of an overload trip. For applications which require longer acceleration times, Siemens offers the type ESP100 state overload relay, with class 10, 20 or 30 tripping characteristics. For unusual applications, solid state or switchgear type overcurrent relays are available. Current Transformers Starters using conventional overload relays are provided with current transformers mounted in the cable termination area of the controller compartment. These are used to drive the overload

relay, ammeter, or other devices which require a current input. CT selection takes into consideration the burden and accuracy requirements which are appropriate for the specified instrumentation and protective devices. The secondary current rating is always 5 amperes. The primary current rating is selected so that the actual secondary current will be between 3 and 4 amperes with the motor (or other load) operating at full load. Auxiliary Contacts All contractors are supplied with two NO and two NC auxiliary contacts available for customer use. Extra contacts are available through the use of the MR relay or extra control relays.

CSI Section 16920

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

243

Medium Voltage Controllers -- Series 81000TM

Siemens Advanced Motor Master System -- SAMMS-MVTM

Siemens Series 81000TM Medium Voltage Controllers are available with SAMMSMVTM, the Siemens Advanced Motor Master System. The SAMMS-MV unit is a microprocessor based software configurable controller specifically designed for motor control applications. It provides all control logic and motor protection functions required for typical motor application. The SAMMS system eliminates the need for separate overload relays, timers, control relays, meters, auxiliary contacts, pushbuttons and pilot lights. programming the controller's microprocessor. Typical motor control devices, such as timers, control relays, pushbuttons, and selector switches (traditionally located in the medium voltage controller, are replaced by SAMMS-MV software, and pushbuttons and indicators on the unit control panel. The SAMMS-MV controller can be programmed to provide over 40 different motor control circuit arrangements, and is a reliable and practical protection system for all medium voltage motors. Starter Types The SAMMS software library of more than 40 ladder diagrams covers most standard motor control applications. Starter types include: ½ Across-the-line, non-reversing ½ Across-the-line, reversing ½ Two-speed, two-winding ½ Two-speed, one-winding, constant or variable torque ½ Two-speed, one-winding, constant horsepower ½ Reduced-voltage, autotransformer or reactor Table 12.3 is a listing of these standard circuits. For special motor control applications not covered by the library of standard ladder diagrams, custom diagrams can be constructed using the SAMMS-MV input and output devices and their associated symbols. Siemens offers an IBM®-compatible software package to develop such custom diagrams.

General

12

Medium Voltage Controllers

Configuration Control Units with SAMMS-MV are equipped with current transformers, the SAMMS-MV unit, and a hand held communicator. The SAMMS unit is powered from the control power transformer on the contactor. The device is mounted in the low voltage compartment for each starter, and provides all pushbutton and indicator functions. Protection Functions ½ Overload protection (with +- 5% accuracy) ½ Choice of 22 overload protection curves ½ Phase loss / phase unbalance protection ½ Impending overload trip alarm ½ Lockout on thermal overload trip ½ Undercurrent / loss of load protection p. 12 ½ Mechanical jam protection ½ Process current (load current) alarm ½ Hand-held communicator for flexibility and field changes The SAMMS system offers programmable control logic, a design based on a standard hardware and electronic circuit configuration that may be modified by

Table 12.3 --Standard Circuits for Starter Arrangements

Starter Type 2 Speed 1 Winding Constant or Variable Tork 2 Speed 1 Wiinding Constant HP Autotransformer RVA

Control Type Local 2-Wire Local 3-Wire Local 3-Wire Remote 2-Wire Local / Remote 2-Wire Local / Remote 3-Wire Local / Remote 3-Wire Electrically Interlocked Remote 2-Wire Remote 3-Wire

FVNR

--

FVR

2 Speed 2 Winding

--

--

--

--

Reactor RVA

--

244

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16920

Medium Voltage Controllers -- Series 81000TM

Siemens Advanced Motor Master System -- SAMMS-MVTM

Diagnostics The SAMMS-MV controller provides visual diagnostics used to quickly determine the cause of motor problems. The front panel of the controller has eight diagnostic LED's to indicate: ½ Current Phase Unbalance ½ Impending Overload Trip ½ Overload Trip ½ External Trip ½ Incomplete Sequence ½ Ground Fault ½ CPU Fault ½ Ready (Control Power Status) In addition, the SAMMS-MV device can provide, as an option, statistical motor data, including the total elapsed motor running time, number of starts, and the number of overload trips. This statistical data is stored in the microprocessor's non-volatile memory and displayed using the hand-held communicator. The communicator can also be used as an ammeter to display any of the three-phase motor currents. Time / current characteristic curves for various conditions are shown in figures 1 through 4 on page 218. Table 12.4 For additional technical information on the SAMMS-MV unit, contact Siemens and request Bulletin SG-9109. The SAMMS-MV Device Models SAMMS-MV is available in two models: SAMMS-MVX and SAMMS-MVE. Each meets the various demands of industrial and commercial specifications and installations. Table 12.4 compares the functions of each model. The SAMMS-MV device is designed for critical process control where prevention of downtime is critical. It offers motor control and protection along with motor diagnostic and motor-driven equipment protection. Engineering and operating personnel have access to important data enabling them to optimize motor-driven equipment capabilities, to maximize the process system output, and to facilitate maintenance. SAMMS-MVX is a full function model, applicable to all control needs, from a simple across-the-line unit to a more complicated reduced voltage scheme. It includes all of the functions listed in Table 12.4. Any of the standard control circuits listed in Table 12.3 (previous page) or a custom circuit, may be downloaded.

General

SAMMS-MV Functions and Models

Model SAMMS-MVX SAMMS-MVE

Function Number Function F0 Ambient Temperature Control Circuit Number F1 Size for Overload No. 1 F2 Size for Overload No. 2 (low speed) F3 Full Load Current for OLR No. 1 F4 Full Load Current for OLR No. 2 F5 Service Factor, and Type Motor F6 Motor Type F6A Overload Trip Class, and Cold Stall Time (class 2-23) F7 Cold Stall Time F7A Automatic Reset F8 Phase Unbalance F9 Time to Restart F10 Emergency Restart F11 Ground Fault Protection or Warning F12 Ground Fault Pickup Current F12A Timer No. 1 F13 Timer No. 2 F14 Motor Current F15 Last Trip Current F16 Percent Unbalance Current F17 Total Elapsed Run-Time on Motor F18 Total Number of Motor Starts F19 Number of Overload Trips F20 Reset Motor Data F21 Set Process Current Warning F22 Jam Protection F23 Jam Pickup Current F23A Loss of Load Protection or Warning F24 Loss of Load Pickup Current F24A Motor Winding Temperature as % of Full Load Temp. F25 Baud Rate F26 F27 Address

--

--

SAMMS-MVE is a model of SAMMSMV tailored to across-the-line (FVNR) applications. It provides all of the protective functions of the SAMMS-MVX device, except that it has no jam protection (F23), loss of load protection / alarm (F24), or process current warning (F22) functions. Functions F3 and F5 associated with two-speed applications are not available. No provision for automatic reset (F8) is provided. SAMMS-MVE accepts one remote input, and provides one output to actuate a single contactor. An alarm contact is not available with SAMMS MVE. In addition to the standard features in the two models, all SAMMS-MV controllers have the following options available: ½ Customizing Software. An IBM®-compatible application is available that allows the customer to develop customized control circuit logic, or to pick any standard control circuits that are pre-programmed. ½ ACCESS. The SAMMS-MV unit can be ordered ready for connection to a Siemens ACCESS data communication system. This open architecture network allows remote control and monitoring of the motors from a centralized point. All information available from SAMMS (such as diagnostics, statistical data, real time metering and controller status) can be communicated to a central host computer or other devices. For a thorough discussion of Siemens' ACCESS system, see Section 1.

12

Medium Voltage Controllers

--

-- -- -- -- --

245

CSI Section 16920

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

Medium Voltage Controllers -- Series 81000TM

Siemens Advanced Motor Master System -- SAMMS-MVTM

Advanced Protection for Medium Voltage Motors For advanced protection of medium voltage motors, the SAMMS-MV device uses a motor model algorithm that continually calculates the stator winding and housing temperature as well as the rotor temperature as a function of the motor RMS current. The motor model compares the calculated temperature to trip temperature values and provides a signal that trips the motor off line when the motor reaches a trip temperature value. The model closely emulates the heating and cooling of the motor windings as well as the rotor and provides protection against both transient and steady state overload conditions. Overload Protection The SAMMS-MV device offers more accurate motor protection than traditional thermal overload and most electronic motor protection devices. This prolongs motor life by eliminating nuisance tripping for multiple restarts, and allowing for proper cool down time when the motor winding temperature or rotor temperature reaches a critically high value. Medium-voltage motors are rotor limited under locked rotor conditions, and stator limited under running overload conditions. Additionally, the type of motor construction affects the thermal behavior of the rotor. For example, open drip-proof motors have significantly shorter cold stall times than totally enclosed fancooled motors. The motor protection algorithm in the SAMMS-MV device is designed specifically to provide rotor protection based on the type of motor construction, and to differentiate between a stalled rotor and a rotor accelerating to running speed. The motor overload protection function is based on calculating the motor's winding, housing, and rotor temperatures. These temperatures are compared to the allowable temperature limits for the motor's winding, housing, and rotor. On the basis of this comparison, the SAMMS-MV device either stops the motor or allows it to run. For example, consider the motor winding and rotor temperature rises illustrated in Figure 5. The motor starts for 5 seconds

General

12

Medium Voltage Controllers

Figure 5. Rotor and Winding Temperature During 10 Second Motor Stall

Figure 6. ODP Motor Thermal Signature

and runs for a period of 2200 seconds. Then, the motor is subjected to a running overload condition that raises the winding temperature to the maximum allowable winding temperature rise resulting in an overload trip. At this temperature, the motor cannot start until the motor winding temperature cools down to the fullload temperature. The motor can then start and run at full-load current. Figure 6 depicts the temperature rise in the rotor and stator winding during a 10 second stall for an ODP motor. In this case, the rotor temperature rises at a rate faster than the winding temperature, and reaches the maximum allowable value resulting in a trip. In order to prevent damage to the motor, SAMMS-MV will not allow the motor to start until the winding and the rotor temperature cools down to the full load temperature or less. In the motor model, the greatest of the root mean square (RMS) current values for the motor phases is converted into a heat-like quantity. This is done by a mathematical function that depends on the ratio of the RMS current to the full-load current set for the motor. The function is

based not only on ideal overload characteristics, but also on empirical motor data. The heat-like quantity is analogous to an input source of current to the electric-circuit analog. The exact values of the various elements in the circuit depend, in some case, on nameplate data entered for the particular motor being protected. Unlike the method of protection in conventional overload relays, the motor model is general enough to protect many classes of motors, yet sophisticated enough to offer customized protection to particular motors. To customize protection of the motor, the user need only indicate the following nameplate data: ½ Full-load current setting (F4) ½ Service factor (F6) ½ Type of motor construction (Open Drip Proof (ODP) or Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (EFC) (F6) ½ Cold stall time, if available (F7) ½ Motor ambient temperature (FO)

CSI Section 16920

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

247

Medium Voltage Controllers -- Series 81000TM

Fuse Applications

Fuse Selection Guide

Technical

12

Medium Voltage Controllers

Fuse Selection Guide for Types FM, A500, and A720R Fuses for Siemens Series 81000 Controller with Type 3UA Overload Relay (NEMA Class 10). Based on Maximum Motor Accelerating Time of 10 Seconds.

Motor Acceleration Times

Note: Motors with acceleration times falling below the applicable fuse curve are permitted 2 consecutive starts as follows: A) B) C) One Start from Ambient A Coast to Stop A Second Start

Maximum Allowable Motor Acceleration TImes for Types FM, A500, and A720R Fuses

250

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16920

Medium Voltage Controllers -- Series 81000TM

Dimensions and Weights

Table 12.9 Series 81000TM Dimensions and Weights

Approximate Installation Dimensions in Inches (mm) Enclosure NEMA 3R Number NEMA 1, 1A, or 12 Walk-in of Contactors Height Width Depth Width 1 36 (914) 60/72 (1524/1829) 96/108 (2438/2743) 72/96/108 (1829/2438/2743) 60/72 (1524/1829) 96/108 (2438/2743) 72/96/108 (1829/2438/2743) 36 (914) 72 (1829) 36 (914) 90 36 (2286) 60/72 (914) (1524/1829) 72/84 (2438/2743) 72/84 (2438/2743) 84/108 (1524/1829) 132/144 (3353/3658) 132/144 (3353/3658) 36 (914) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 36 (914) 72 (1829) 1 36 (914) 90 (2286) -- 72 (1829) 18/24/36 (357/610/914) Approx. Shipping Weight With Contactors in lbs. (kg) Layout Arrangement Enclosure Figure Non-Walk-in NEMA NEMA (See Next 1 or 12 3R 2 Pages) 1400 (636) 1600 (727) 1 42 42 1600 (727) 1800 (818) 2 (1067) (1067) 1500 (682) 1700 (773) 3 78 78 4000/6800 4400/7200 4 (1981) (1981) (1818/3090) (2000/3273) 114 120 7400/8800 7800/9200 5 (2896) (3048) (3364/4000) (3545/4182) 78 / 114 120 4600/7400 5000/7800 6 (1981 / 2896) (3048) (2091/3364) (2273/3545) 78 78 4200/7000 4600/7400 7 (1981) (1981) (1909/3182) (2091/3364) 114 120 7600/9000 8200/9600 8 (2896) (3048) (3455/4091) (3727/4364) 78 / 114 120 4800/7600 5400/8200 9 (1981 / 2896) (3048) (2182/3455) (2455/3727) 42 42 1800 (818) 2000 (909) 10 (1067) (1067) 78 78 3200 (1445) 3600 (1636) 11 (1981) (1981) 42 42 2000 (909) 2200 (1000) 12 (1067) (1067) 78 78 2000 (909) 2400 (1091) 13 (1981) (1981) 78/114 78/120 2200 (1000) 2600 (1182) 14 (1981/2896) (1981/3048) 78/114 78/120 2100 (955) 2500 (1136) 15 (1981/2896) (1981/3048) 114 120 5100/7900 5700/8500 16 (2896) (3048) (2318/3591) (2591/3864) 150 156 8500/9900 9300/10700 17 (3810) (3962) (3864/4500) (4227/4864) 150 156 5700/8500 6500/9300 18 (3810) (3962) (2591/3864) (2955/4227) 42 42 1800 (818) 2000 (909) 19 (1067) (1067) 78 78 3200 (1455) 3600 (1636) 20 (1981) (1981) 78 78 3000 (1364) 3400 (1545) 21 (1981) (1981) 42 42 2000 (909) 2200 (1000) 22 (1067) (1067) 23 78 78 3300 (1500) 3700 (1682) 24 (1981) (1981) 1400 (636) 1600 (727) 1 1600 (727) 1800 (818) 2 42 42 1500 (682) 1700 (773) 3 (1067) (1067) 1400 (636) 1600 (727) 25 1400 (636) 1600 (727) 25 2200 (1000) 2600 (1182) 26 78 78 (1981) (1981) 2200 (1000) 2600 (1182) 26 1400 (636) 600 (273) 27 42 42 (1067) (1067) 1400 (636) 600 (273) 27

Dimensions

Controller Type Induction Full Voltage Non-Reversing (XLF) Induction Reduced Voltage-Reactor Non-Reversing (RVRF)

Rating 5 kV 360A 5 kV 720A 7 kV 360A 5kV 360A 5kV 720A 7kV 360A 5kV 360A 5kV 720A 7kV 360A

2

12

Medium Voltage Controllers

Induction Reduced Voltage-Autotransformer Non-Reversing (RVAF)

3 Induction Full Voltage Reversing (XRF) 5kV 360A 5kV 720A 7kV 360A 5kV 360A 5kV 720A 7kV 360A 5kV 360A 5kV 720A 7kV 360A 5kV 360A 5kV 720A 7kV 360A 5kV 360A 5kV 720A 7kV 720A 3 2 3 1

Sychronous Full Voltage Non-Reversing (XLFS)

Sychronous Reduced Voltage-Autotransformer Non-Reversing (RVASF)

Induction Full Voltage 2-Speed, 2-Winding (2S2WF)

Induction Full Voltage 2-Speed, 1-Winding (2S1WF)

5kV 360A 5kV 720A 7kV 360A 5kV LBS-unfused 600A or 1200A LBS-600A fused or LBS-1200A fused (to 450E) 7kV 5kV LBS-1200A fused (to 1100E) 7kV 5kV Incoming Line Main Lugs Only 7kV Latched Contactor

36 (914)

Note: All dimensions and weights are for estimating purposes only--not for construction. Indoor enclosures are 90 in. (2286 mm) high (100 in. (2540 mm) with top-mounted bus) and 36 in. (914 mm) deep. NEMA 3R Walk-in Enclosures are 107 in. (2718 mm) high by 101 in. (2565 mm) deep. NEMA 3R Non-Walk-in Enclosures are 100 in. (2540 mm) high by 47 in. (1194 mm) deep. Consult Siemens The smaller dimension is used for motors: 1250 hp max 2300V 1750 hp max 4160V ? hp max 7200V

CSI Section 16920

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

253

Medium Voltage Controllers -- Series 81000TM

Dimensions and Weights

Typical Layout Arrangements

Dimensions

12

Medium Voltage Controllers

XLF -

Across Line Full Voltage Non-Reversing

RVRF - Reduced Voltage Reactor RVAF - Reduced Voltage Autotransformer XRF Across Line Full Voltage Levering

XLFS - Across Line Synchronous

Notes -- See facing page.

254

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16920

Medium Voltage Controllers -- Series 81000TM

Standard Controller Components

FVNR -- Full Voltage, Non-Reversing, Squirrel Cage Starter containing the following components: 1 ­ 360A 3-pole drawout contactor 3 ­ Power current limiting fuses 1 ­ 3/4kVA control transformer with 2 primary and 1 secondary current limiting fuses 1 ­ Master control relay (3NO and 1 NC auxiliary contacts) 1 ­ Start / Stop pushbutton 1 ­ 3-phase ambient compensated thermal overload relay 1 ­ Externally mounted overload reset button 3 ­ Current transformers (or 1-3) 1 ­ Test switch and circuit 1 ­ Contactor position indicator light 1 ­ Drawout (racking) mechanism FVR -- Full Voltage, Reversing, Squirrel Cage Starter containing the following components: 1 ­ 360A pole drawout contactor 1 ­ 360A 3-pole stationary contactors 3 ­ Power current limiting fuses 1 ­ 0.75kVA control transformer with 2 primary and 1 secondary current limiting fuses 1 ­ Master control relay (3N0 and 1 NC auxiliary contacts) 1 ­ Forward / Off / Reverse switch 1 ­ 3-phase ambient compensated thermal overload relay 1 ­ Externally mounted overload reset button 3 ­ Current transformers (or 1-3) 1 ­ Test switch & circuit 1 ­ Contactor position indicator light 1 ­ Drawout (racking) mechanism RVATNR -- Reduced Voltage, Autotransformer, Non-Reversing, Squirrel Cage Starter containing the following components: 1 ­ 360A 3-pole drawout contactor 2 ­ 360A 3-pole stationary contactors 3 ­ Power current limiting fuses 1 ­ Auto-transformer with 50, 65 and 80% voltage taps, mounted in a 24 in. (610 mm) or 36 in. (914 mm) wide auxiliary structure 1 ­ Automatic transfer timing relay 1 ­ 0.75kVA control transformer with 2 primary and 1 secondary current limiting fuses 1 ­ Master control relay (3N0 and 1 NC auxiliary contacts) 1 ­ Start / Stop pushbutton 1 ­ 3-phase ambient compensated thermal overload relay 1 ­ Incomplete sequence relay 1 ­ Externally mounted overload reset button 3 ­ Current transformers (or 1-3) 1 ­ Test switch & circuit 1 ­ Contactor position indicator light 1 ­ Drawout (racking) mechanism RVPRNR -- Reduced Voltage Primary Reactor, Non-Reversing, Squirrel Cage Starter containing the following components: 1 ­ 360A 3-pole drawout contactor 1 ­ 360A 3-pole stationary contactor 3 ­ Power current limiting fuses 1 ­ Primary reactor with 50, 65 and 80% voltage taps, mounted in a 24 in. (610 mm) or 36 in. (914 mm) wide auxiliary structure 1 ­ Automatic transfer timing relay 1 ­ 0.75kVA control transformer with 2 primary and 1 secondary current limiting fuses 1 ­ Master control relay (3N0 and1 NC auxiliary contacts) 1 ­ Start / Stop pushbutton ­ 3-phase ambient compensated thermal overload relay 1 ­ Incomplete sequence relay 1 ­ Externally mounted overload reset button 3 ­ Current transformers (or 1-3) 1 ­ Test switch 8 circuit 1 ­ Contactor position indicator light 1 ­ Drawout (racking) mechanism FVMLNR -- Full Voltage, Mechanically Latched, Electrically Tripped, Non-Reversing Controller, Fused containing the following components: 1 ­ 360A 3-pole drawout latched contactor

5 kV Synchronous Controller

Components which are functionally replaced when SAMMS-MV is used.

Application

3 ­ Power current limiting fuses 1 ­ 0.75kVA control transformer with 2 primary and 1 secondary current limiting fuses 1 ­ Master control relay (3N0 and 1 NC auxiliary contacts) 1 ­ Close pushbutton 1 ­ Open pushbutton 1 ­ Overcurrent relay, 3 phase 1 ­ Manual trip external operator button 3 ­ Current transformers (or 1-3) 1 ­ Test switch & circuit 1 ­ Contactor position indicator light 1 ­ Drawout (racking) mechanism FVSNR -- Full Voltage, Synchronous (Brush Type), Non-Reversing Starter containing the following components: 1 ­ 360A 3-pole drawout contactor 3 ­ Power current limiting fuses 1 ­ 0.75kVA control transformer with 2 primary and 1 secondary current limiting fuses 1 ­ Master control relay (3N0 and 3NC auxiliary contacts) 1 ­ Start / Stop pushbutton 3 ­ Current transformers (or l-30) 1 ­ Test switch & circuit 1 ­ AC ammeter 1 ­ DC ammeter 1 ­ Simoreg & electromech. RLYS or SPM 1 ­ Field exciter 1 ­ Contactor position indicator light 1 ­ Drawout (racking) mechanism

12

Medium Voltage Controllers

5 kV Synchronous Controller (doors open)

256

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16920

Medium Voltage Controllers -- Series 81000TM

Standard Controller Component

RVSPRNR -- Reduced Voltage, Synchronous (Brush Type), Primary Reactor, Non-Reversing Starter containing the following components: 1 ­ 360A 3-pole drawout contactor 1 ­ 360A 3-pole stationary contactor 3 ­ Power current limiting fuses 1 ­ 3/4kVA control transformer with 2 primary and 1 secondary current limiting fuses 1 ­ Primary reactor with 50, 65 and 80% voltage taps 1 ­ Master control relay (3NO and 1 NC auxiliary contacts) 3 ­ Current transformers (or 1-3) 1 ­ Test switch & circuit 1 ­ AC ammeter 1 ­ DC ammeter 1 ­ Field exciter 1 ­ Automatic transfer timing relay 1 ­ Incomplete sequence relay 1 ­ Contactor position indicator light 1 ­ Drawout (racking) mechanism RVSATNR -- Reduced Voltage, Synchronous (Brush Type), Autotransformer, Non-Reversing Starter containing the following components: 1 ­ 360A 3-pole drawout contactor 2 ­ 360A 3-pole stationary contactors 3 ­ Power current limiting fuses 1 ­ Auto-transformer with 50, 65 and 80% voltage taps 1 ­ Automatic transfer timing relay 1 ­ 3/4kVA control transformer with 2 primary and 1 secondary current limiting fuses 1 ­ Master control relay (3NO and 1 NC auxiliary contacts) 1 ­ Start / Stop pushbutton 1 ­ Current transformers (or 1-3) 1 ­ Test switch & circuit 1 ­ AC ammeter 1 ­ DC ammeter 1 ­ Field exciter 1 ­ Incomplete sequence relay 1 ­ Contactor position indicator light 1 ­ Drawout (racking) mechanism

Application

FVSNR -- Full Voltage, Brushless Synchronous, Non-Reversing Starter containing the following components: 1 ­ 360A 3-pole drawout contactor 3 ­ Power current limiting fuses 1 ­ Control transformer (sized per exciter rating), with 2 primary and 1 secondary current limiting fuses 1 ­ Master control relay (3NO and 1 NC auxiliary contacts) 1 ­ Start / Stop pushbutton 1 ­ 3-phase ambient compensated thermal overload relay 1 ­ Externally operated overload reset button 3 ­ Current transformers (or 1-3) 1 ­ Test switch & circuit 1 ­ DC (rectified single-phase) power supply 1 ­ Variable for exciter-field adjustment 1 ­ Power factor relay (pullout protection) 1 ­ AC ammeter (optional) 1 ­ DC ammeter (optional) 1 ­ Exciter field application timing relay 1 ­ Contactor position indicator light 1 ­ Drawout (racking) mechanism 1 ­ Incomplete sequence relay

12

Medium Voltage Controllers

Components which are functionally replaced when SAMMS-MV is used.

MVC Specifications Checklist

½ Enclosure NEMA 1 NEMA 2 NEMA 3R NEMA 1 Gasketed NEMA 12 Walk-In Non-Walk-In ½ Load Cables Top Entry Bottom Entry Lug Type _____ ½ Terminal Blocks And Wiring Fixed-Mounted Pull-Apart Clamp-Type Screw-Type AWM Control Wire (Standard) SIS Control Wire Wire-Markers: Yes No Wires Marked At: One End Both Ends Adhesive Type Sleeve-Type Optional Devices ½ Metering (Incoming): VM AM WHM AM / VM Selector Switch Panel-Type SWBD-Type CT'S VT'S Surge Arrestor Surge Capacitor Other__________________ ½ Starter Accessories: CPT 3/4 KVA (STD) 1% KVA 2KVA 2 1/2 KVA 3 1/2 KVA 115V AC Secondary 230V AC Secondary Power Factor Correction Capacitors Size:___________________________ AM VM AMS VMS Other:__________________________ Blown-Fuse Trip Bar ½ Protective Relaying: For Motor Overload Protection: 3UA (OLR) (STD) Static Multifunction (specify type) SAMMS-MV ESP 100 Other Current Relays: Ground Fault Phase Unbalance Open Phase / Phase Reversal Overcurrent: Timed Inst. Neg. Sequence Differential Voltage Relays: Undervoltage Phase Reversal Phase Sequence Phase Unbalance Other:__________________________ Relays to Be: Industrial Class Switchgear Class Miscellaneous: Pilot Lights Red Green Push button Selector Switch ___________________________________ ___________________________________ ___________________________________

½ Power Supply 2300V 4160V Other _____Hz, _____Phase, _____Wire ½ Incoming Feeders Cable Size_____, # Per Phase _____ Top Entry Bottom Entry Shielded Non-Shielded Bus Transition or Bus Duct Lug Type __________________ ½ Main Disconnect Type _____ Rating _____ Fused Non-Fused None Required ½ Bus Horizontal Main Bus Amps: 600 1000 1200 2000 3000 Material: Copper Alum. Tin-Plated Silver-Plated Ground Bus: 600 Amp Copper Other None Required

CSI Section 16920

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

257

Programmable Controllers

SIMATIC® Series

A wide range of programmable controllers and related products are offered for virtually any application. From basic machine control -- to process control -- to complex machine control and integrated manufacturing, SIMATIC programmable controllers provide state-of-the-art solutions with proven reliability. We offer several series of products, all that offer unique advantages. These include: ½ SIMATIC S7 ½ SIMATIC 505 ½ SIMATIC S5 SIMATIC S7 Series The SIMATIC S7 Series represents the newest members of the SIMATIC family of programmable controllers. The SIMATIC S7 series includes a complete spectrum of Totally Integrated Automation products, from Mini-PLCs to Multiprocessing PLCs, networking products, and operator interfaces, all operating in a common software development environment. The S7-400 is the power PLC for automation tasks that require higher levels of system performance to solve complex application problems. The rugged modular design, capacity for easy expansion, extensive communication capability, and easy implementation of distributed systems, make the SIMATIC S7-400 the ideal solution for even the most demanding automation tasks. The S7-300 modular mini PLC system is well-suited for low to medium complexity automation projects. The compact modular design, custom-fit DIN rail mounting, and wide array of system features make the SIMATIC S7-300 a convenient and economical solution for a variety of automation tasks. The STEP7 Project Management Software provides a common platform for system design, programming, and maintenance tasks. This software complies with the international standard IEC1131-3 for PLC programming. There is also an extensive offering of optional engineering tools that help simplify project development and system maintenance.

General

SIMATIC S7 Product Family

SIMATIC S7-400 The S7-400 is the automation platform for medium and high-end applications that require the absolute maximum levels of performance, capacity, and flexibility. The basic design of a modular S7-400 system consists of a mounting rack, power supply, CPU, and the necessary I / O modules required to interface with the various field devices. Separate Function Modules and Communications Processors are available and work in conjunction with the CPU to solve more complex application problems. The S7-400 family offers CPUs with memory capacities from 48 Kbytes to 1.6 Mbytes, and processing speeds up to 0.08 ms / K for boolean operations. Multiprocessor configurations are available for synchronized control solutions. The S7400 can handle up to 16,384 I / O points with local and remote configurations, as well as multiple PROFIBUS and Ethernet for communication connections. Multiple classes of CPUs with increasing levels of performance, and a comprehensive range of modules, allow the user to develop custom solutions for each automation task. As tasks grow and become more complex, the programmable control system can be upgraded with additional I / O modules at any time. Highly complex applications can take advantage of multiple CPU solutions that provide coordinated or segmented control structures.

SIMATIC S7-400

Application areas include: ½ General mechanical engineering ½ Automotive construction ½ Warehousing equipment ½ Machine-tool construction ½ Process engineering ½ Control and instrumentation equipment ½ Textile machines ½ Packaging machines ½ Special purpose machines

14

Programmable Controllers

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

281

Programmable Controllers

SIMATIC® Series

SIMATIC S7-300 The compact, modular S7-300 family is well-suited for applications of low to medium complexity that need a versatile automation platform. The basic system design of an S7-300 consists of a mounting rail, power supply, CPU, and the necessary I / O modules required to interface with the various field devices. Separate Function Modules and Communication Processors are available and work in conjunction with the CPU to solve more complex application problems. There are several CPUs, with memory capacities from 12 Kbytes to 48 Kbytes, and processing speeds up to 0.3 ms/K for boolean operations. The S7-300 family offers I / O capacities up to 1024 points, with both local and remote expansion available. Some models include builtin PROFIBUS-DP ports for remote I / O connections and communication tasks. As tasks grow and become more complex, the system can be expanded with additional I / O modules or Function Modules at anytime.

General

SIMATIC S7-300

Application areas include: ½ Special-purpose machines ½ Textile machines ½ Packaging machines ½ General mechanical engineering applications ½ Control systems ½ Machine tools ½ Electrical manufacturing industry and associated trades

14

Programmable Controllers

SIMATIC S7-200 The SIMATIC S7-200 is optimally suited to smaller applications, with a minimum amount of I / O, that require a complete control solution in a minimum amount of space. The S7-200 is a Micro-PLC system that consists of a CPU and I / O in one unit. The system can be expanded with I / O expansion modules to increase system I / O capacity for applications with large I / O requirements. These powerful micro-PLCs come in several versions, ranging from models with 1K byte and 14 I / O points, to 8 Kbytes and 40 I / O points. The performance power of the S7-200 also enables more complex solutions in stand-alone mode, in networked configurations, and within distributed control structures. The S7-200 combines the highest possible degree of automation with the lowest level of overhead, both in installation space and system costs. The S7-200 is characterized by: ½ Ease of use ½ Flexibility ½ Powerful communication

SIMATIC S7-200

STEP7 Micro / WIN is the simple, easyto-learn programming software package for the S7-200 automation system. The application area of the SIMATIC S7200 extends from replacing simple relays and contactors, right up to more complex automation tasks that require math calculations, data manipulation, or communication with other systems.

Application areas include: ½ Baling presses ½ Plaster and cement production ½ Woodworking machinery ½ Gate controls ½ Hydraulic lifts ½ Conveyor systems ½ Food and beverage industry ½ Remote monitoring (via modem) ½ Electrical installations CSI Section 16470

282

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

Programmable Controllers

SIMATIC® Industrial Software

SIMATIC 505 The SIMATIC 505 family of programmable control systems combine highperformance, flexibility, and a wide range of control options that are well suited to medium complexity automation tasks. High-speed sequential control combined with advanced process control features make this product equally at home in discrete or process applications. The basic design of a modular SIMATIC 505 system consists of a mounting rack, power supply, CPU, and the necessary I / O modules required to interface with the various field devices. The SIMATIC 545 and 555 CPUs are cost-effective controllers ideally suited for applications requiring close integration of sequential and closed-loop PID control. CPUs with up to 1.8 Mbytes and execution speeds of up to 0.07 ms/K for boolean operations are available. A complete range of I / O modules is available that includes discrete, analog, and intelligent modules. Built-in remote I / O ports on every CPU make system expansion fast and easy.

General

SIMATIC 505 Family

There are two programming options available. Siemens SoftShop is a complete Windows-based package that provides many time-saving features that are especially useful for program development or maintenance. TISOFT is an

easy-to-use MS-DOS program that is equally well-suited for program development or maintenance.

SIMATIC S5 Series The SIMATIC S5 family of products includes a wide range of programmable control products suitable for a variety of applications, from simple machine control to complex coordinated solutions requiring fail-safe or redundant systems. Failsafe and redundant systems are designed to safely shutdown or continue system operation respectively whenever problems occur. These solutions are sometimes required to protect personnel, the environment, or equipment. S5-95U/F, S5-100U -- The S5-95U is a compact mini-PLC system that provides an economical solution for simple automation problems where installation space is at a premium. The S5-95F is similar to the S5-95U, but provides failsafe operation. The S5-100U is a modular system that is also targeted at low-end automation tasks. S5-115U/H/F -- The S5-115U is suitable for automation tasks that require a medium performance system. The S5-115 family is a modular design, and offers

CPUs ranging up to 384 Kbytes of memory and execution speeds of up to 0.1 ms/K for boolean operations. The S5115H and S5-115F systems provide redundant and fail-safe system solutions respectively. S5-135U / S5-155U/H -- The S5-135U and S5-155U programmable controllers are intended for automation tasks that require high levels of system performance. CPUs are available with up to 1.6 Mbyte of memory and boolean execution speeds of up to 0.18 ms/K of boolean operations. The S5-155H systems provide a redundant solution, both at the CPU and I / O system level. Programming Software -- the SIMATIC S5 products are programmed with STEP5 programming software, which is suitable for both program development and maintenance. The STEP5 package operates on MS-DOS or Windows 95.

14

Programmable Controllers

SIMATIC S5 Family

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

283

Sentron® Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Reference Guide

Siemens offers a complete line of Molded Case Circuit Breakers for commercial, institutional and industrial power distribution needs as well as OEM applications. the Sentron line of MCCBs offers industry standard levels of interrupting capability and application flexibility as well as a complete array of accessories. Electrical distribution equipment is the core of any commercial or industrial complex. It must be reliable. For this reason, all Siemens Molded Case circuit breakers are manufactured in facilities UL certified to ISO 9002. Industrial users and utilities are using ever larger, lower-impedance transformers and spot networks to achieve greater system reliability and efficiency. A result of this system evolution has been a significant increase in average fault current levels. The Sentron line of breakers meets this challenge. Siemens Sentron thermal magnetic circuit breakers are available in eight frames sizes -- 125, 250, 400, 600, 800, 1200, 1600, and 2000 Amperes. Siemens Sentron Sensitrip III electronic trip circuit breakers are available in 400, 600, 800, 1200, 2000, 2500 and 3200 Ampere frame sizes. Siemens Sentron molded case circuit breakers can be used fully rated or in UL Listed series combinations. In this section, you will find: ½ Overview of the Sentron line ½ Enclosures ½ Accessories ½ Technical data

General

17

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Ammeter / Trip Indicator for Sensitrip III Siemens introduces the new Ammeter and trip status indicator for Sensitrip III breakers from SJD through SPD frames. This device offers the capability unique in this size breaker to record not only the type of trip, but the date and time it occurred. Now the commercial and light industrial application can enjoy a level of system information formerly reserved for much higher function trip units and SCADA (System Control and Data Acquisition) systems, such as ACCESS® . Adapting Sentron Circuit Breakers Sentron Series circuit breakers offer further application flexibility through a full line of accessories UL Listed for field installation, from the 100 Amp ED frame through the 3200 Amp STD frame. Siemens offers a wide range of individual enclosures for protection from various environments. Many special applications such as combat naval ships, 50°C calibration, and application on DC or 400 HZ systems can also be addressed easily.

Internal Accessories These accessories allow easy modification of circuit breakers, without need for a UL-qualified assembler nor the months of lead time required to have an accessory factory-installed. For convenience, ULListed accessories for Sentron Series circuit breakers are filed-addable, easy to order and install. Internal accessories include shunt trip devices, under voltage releases, alarm switches and auxiliary switches. Unlike other manufacturers, whose installable accessories are unenclosed, thus very vulnerable to damage in handling and application, Siemens Sentron accessories are housed in integral polymer packages, and their mechanisms are engineered for very high reliability and long life. Color Label Code Sentron Series circuit breakers are easily recognized by their distinctive appearance. A labeling scheme utilizes colorcoding as a visual indication of the interrupting category of each breaker. These interrupting categories and their corresponding colors are as follows: Standard: Blue Label High: Black Label Current Limiting: Red Label

New in This Edition:

STD 3200 Amp Frame MCCB With the STD Frame, Siemens again extends the envelope in Molded Case Circuit Breakers. This, the highest amperage 100%-rated Molded Case Breaker in the industry, features Interrupting Ratings to 150,000 Amps at 480 Volts, full function electronic trip and a broad range of accessories in an economical MCCB package. Use the STD in switchboard mains and feeders and other applications where high current rating are required, but the 2-step stored energy functionality of an Encased System Breaker like the SB is not required.

Siemens' state-of-the-art high power laboratory offers industry standard setting test capability.

326

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16162

Sentron® Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Overview

A circuit breaker is designed to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined over-current, without damage to itself when properly applied within its rating. A molded case circuit Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers The Siemens Sentron® molded case circuit breaker, the one used in the broadest range of applications, is the thermal-magnetic breaker. This type combines the thermal inverse time element design for low level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic action for short circuits. Thermal-magnetic breakers are available in all Sentron® frame sizes up to 2000 amperes. breaker is further defined by NEMA as one which is assembled as an integral unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of insulating materials. Molded case circuit breakers are

General

designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage distribution systems. They can protect connected systems against overloads, short circuits, and ground faults.

This type of breaker can be selected for the current rating required, with preset thermal-type overload protection, and with adjustments on the front of the breaker for the magnetic trip setting on breaker sizes 250 amperes and larger.

Type BL, BLH Thermal-Magnetic

17

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Type JXD6 400A ETI

Instantaneous Breakers For short circuit protection of motor and resistance welding circuits, the instantaneous trip-only breaker is available. This operates purely on magnetic action for instantaneous interruption of short circuits. It has provision for selection of a trip setting above momentary overload levels, but assures the fastest possible breaker tripping above the selected tripping point. It is therefore ideally suited for motor circuit protection in conjunction with a motor starter containing overload relays for lower level overloads.

Fuseless Current Limiting Breakers These are designed with "blow-apart contacts." With this design, the two contact arms are positioned adjacent and parallel to each other. As the current flows through, it sets up a magnetic field around each arm. Because the current flow in one arm is opposite in direction to the current flow in the other, the two magnetic fields oppose each other, forcing the contact arms apart. This all happens before the fault current reaches its first peak. Therefore, the resultant low-energy arc that develops as the contacts open can be extinguished quite easily by the arc chute. As a result, the fault current is actually interrupted in less than onehalf cycle. The Sentron current limiting circuit breaker limits the let-through l2t to a value less than the l2t of a one-half cycle wave of the symmetrical prospective current without any fusible elements (UL 489). Also, it fulfills the National Electric Code definition by reducing the current flowing in a faulted circuit to a magnitude substantially less than that obtainable in the same circuit if the device were replaced with a solid conductor having comparable impedance (Article 24011). In other words, the Sentron circuit breakers differ from traditional thermal-magnetic models by extending more control over dangerously high available fault currents without the use of fuses. Note that the available peak current (lp) is substantially reduced to actual lp (or what the breaker permits in the system).

The actual l2t energy let-through in the system is sharply reduced from available l2t when the current limiting breaker interrupts the fault current. The higher interrupting rating of current limiting breakers permits greater latitude in electrical system design. For example, the lower peak current (lp) and subsequent lower energy letthrough (l2t) allow the use of smaller, less expensive breakers downstream. This benefit is a result of UL recognition of series-connected combinations. Also, low l2t and lp let-through values mean less thermal and mechanical stress on the distribution system and superior protection for motors and semiconductors.

SentronTM FD-Frame

CSI Section 16162

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

327

Sentron® Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Sensitrip®

General

JD and LD Frames: Types SJD6, SHJDG, SCJDG, SCDG, SHLDG, SCLDG

17

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Sensitrip® Type SLD6 Sensitrip® Type SMD6 MD and ND Frames: Types SMDG, SHMDG, SCMDG, SNDG, SHNDG, SCNDG, PD Frame: Types SPDG, SHPDG

Sensitrip® III Circuit Breakers The Sentron® Sensitrip® III circuit breaker family employs the same blow-open contact design used in Siemens thermalmagnetic breakers. The thermal-magnetic trip unit has been replaced by a microprocessor solid-state trip unit which performs three functions: ½ sense the magnitude of current flow in the protected circuit ½ determine when current becomes excessive ½ send a trip signal to the breaker mechanism. The current level of the protected circuit is monitored by three current sensing transformers positioned in the circuit breaker frame (and a transformer on the neutral if ground fault protection is implemented). Signals are sent to the solid state circuitry where they are compared to user-determined reference values. When the signal values exceed the reference values, a trip signal is sent to the breaker's magnetic latch. Sensitrip III uses rotary switches for all adjustable settings. A simple turn of a switch is all that is needed to change any parameter.

Models Sensitrip III is available in various maximum ampere ratings to cover a continuous current range from 40 through 1600 amperes. These ampere ratings are available in four variations (LI, LIG, LSI, LSIG) to allow the combination of capabilities most needed. The short time delay models allow some selectivity in electrical distribution systems, while the instantaneous trip models provide dependable instantaneous tripping where needed. Continuous Current The continuous current (Long Time) adjustment is used to set the maximum current the breaker should pass without tripping. This adjustment is especially useful when system requirements change. This function effectively eliminates the need to purchase an interchangeable trip and manually replace it in the circuit breaker. The function provides a choice of 20 to 100 percent of the continuous current rating of the Sensitrip III. Specific ranges are provided in the chart below. In addition, the portion of the time-current characteristic curve which is affected by changes in this setting is shown on page 329. Table 17.1

Breaker Frame JD LD MD ND PD Breaker Type SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6 SLD6, SHLD6, SCLD6 SMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6 SND6, SHND6, SCND6 SPD6, SHPD6 Range of Continuous Current Settings 40 ­ 400A 120 ­ 600A 160 ­ 800A 240 ­ 1200A 320 ­ 1600A

Instantaneous Current (I) The Instantaneous Trip function adjusts the Sensitrip III circuit breaker to trip instantaneously (without any intentional delay) at various points. Instantaneous tripping is designed for protection during high fault conditions and the adjustable setting allows one to accommodate a variety of different circuits with the same circuit breaker. Between 2 to 40 times the continuous current setting for instantaneous tripping may be selected. Thus, a 200 ampere SJD with a continuous current setting of 20% (or 40A) can be adjusted for tripping instantaneously at 80, 160, 240, 320, 400, 600, 800, 1200, and 1600 amperes. For added safety, each Sensitrip III digital circuit breaker includes a fixed instantaneous override. This automatically prempts the settings and trips the breaker beyond 10.5 times the breaker rating (In) for JD and LD frames and up to 10,000 amperes max for MD, ND and PD frames.

Table 17.2

Range of Instantaneous Trip Settings 80 ­ 4,200A 240 ­ 6,300A 520 ­ 10,000A 480 ­ 10,000A 690 ­ 10,000A

Breaker Frame JD LD MD ND PD

Breaker Type SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6 SLD6, SHLD6, SCLD6 SMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6 SND6, SHND6, SCND6 SPD6, SHPD6

328

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16162

Sentron® Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Sensitrip®

A. Adjustable "Continuous Amps" Rating Switch All Sensitrip Ill solid state molded case circuit breakers have an adjustable ampere rating switch. Adjustments made to this switch change the continuous current rating of the breaker from 20% to 100% of its maximum trip unit rating depending on the circuit breaker frame. B. Adjustable "Long Time Delay" Switch All Sensitrip Ill circuit breakers have an adjustable long time delay switch to allow for selection of long time delays of fixed time intervals at six times the setting of the adjustable "continuous amps" rating switch C. Adjustable "Instantaneous Pick-Up" Switch Sensitrip Ill circuit breakers with an adjustable instantaneous trip switch allow selection of a tripping point from related to the adjusted circuit breaker Rating (Ir)

General

D. Adjustable "Short Time Pick-Up" Switch (Optional) Sensitrip III circuit breakers with an adjustable short time pick-up switch allow for selection of short time pickup in a range from 1.5 to 10 times the setting of the maximum current rating. E. Adjustable"ShortTime Delay" Switch (Optional) Sensitrip Ill circuit breakers with an adjustable short time pick-up switch also contain a switch for adjustment in time delay. The adjustable short time delay switch allows for either of two modes of short time delays. One range of settings enables the breaker to be set for fixed time delays and the other range of settings enables the breaker to be set for short time delays based on l2t curves.

17

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Type "LI"

Type "LSI"

Adjustable"Ground Fault Pick-Up"Switch Sensitrip Ill circuit breakers containing the optional equipment ground fault protection cover the ground fault pick-up range of 20% to 70% of the circuit breaker frame rating. The ground fault pick-up settings also allow for one of three time delays based on l2t curves. For 3-phase, 4-wire systems, an external neutral transformer is required with an ampere rating equal to the trip unit ampere rating.

In = Maximum circuit breaker ampere rating. Ir = Current Rating -- a function of adjustment setting expressed in % of In. Ig = Ground Fault Pick-up -- a function of adjustment setting expressed in % of In.

Short-Time Function (S) This function controls the current the circuit breaker carries for short periods of time, effectively permitting downstream protective devices to clear short circuits without tripping the up-stream device (selectivity). Up to .2 seconds of time delay is avaiable. Since the pickup is adjustable, a wide choice of settings is available to help meet individual application requirements. Choices may be made between fixed trip times or I2t delay. Table 17.3 illustrates pick-up ranges. All Sensitrip III circuit breakers employ a magnetic override circuit which limits short-time pickup to 10.5 times In for JD and LD frames or 10,000A for MD, ND and PD frames. Table 17.3

Range of Short-Time Pick Up Settings 60 ­ 4000A 180 ­ 6000A 240 ­ 8000A 360 ­ 10,000A 480 ­ 10,000A

Ground Fault Pick-up Function (G) This function controls the level of ground fault current at which the Sensitrip breaker will interrupt the circuit. A wide range of settings, from 20% to 70% In, allows customizing the circuit breaker to protection requirements. Table 17.4 provides the ranges for each Sensitrip III circuit breaker for the ground fault pick-up function. Note that Sensitrip III circuit breakers are all adjustable in compliance with the National Electric Code, Article 230, Section 95, covering ground fault protection of service equipment. This function may act on a direct measurement of source ground current or the residual current on 3-phase 3-wire or 4-wire systems. Table 17.4

Range of Ground Fault Pick Up Settings 40 ­ 280A 60 ­ 420A 120 ­ 560A 160 ­ 840A 280 ­ 1120A

Ground Fault Time Delay Function This function is designed to add a predetermined amount of time to the trip point when a ground fault occurs. It is a standard feature with the ground fault pick-up function for Sensitrip III digital circuit breakers. The setting range of the ground fault time delay is .10, .20, or .40 seconds. As with the short-time delay pickup function, selectively is possible using this function.

Breaker Frame JD LD MD ND PD

Breaker Type SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6 SLD6, SHLD6, SCLD6 SMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6 SND6, SHND6, SCND6 SPD6, SHPD6

Breaker Frame JD LD MD ND PD

Breaker Type SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6 SLD6, SHLD6, SCLD6 SMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6 SND6, SHND6, SCND6 SPD6, SHPD6

CSI Section 16162

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

329

Sentron® Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Reference Guide

Internal Accessories

They are particularly useful in automated plants where operators must be signalled about changes in the electrical distribution system. This switch features a closed contact when the circuit breaker is tripped automatically. In other words, this switch does not function when the breaker is operated manually. Its contact is open when the circuit breaker is reset. Auxiliary Switch (Not Shown) Siemens manufactures a broad line of auxiliary switches for applications requiring remote "ON" and "OFF" indication or electrical interlocking. Each switch contains two contacts having a common connection. One is open and the other closed when the circuit breaker is open, and vice-versa.

General

Padlocking and Handling Blocking Devices

17

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Undervoltage Trip The undervoltage trip automatically opens a circuit breaker when voltage drops to a value ranging between 35% to 70% of the line voltage. The operation is instantaneous, and the circuit breaker cannot be reclosed until the voltage returns to 85% of line voltage. Continuously energized, the undervoltage trip must be operating before the circuit breaker can be closed.

External Accessories

Door-Mounted Rotary Operating Handle

Shunt Trip The Shunt Trip opens the mechanism in response to an externally applied voltage signal. Siemens shunt trips include coil clearing contacts that automatically clear the signal circuit when the mechanism has tripped.

Max-FlexTM Handle Operator Siemens Max-FlexTM Handle Operator uses a single sturdy cable in place of typical rigid links. The cable is flexible, allowing the circuit breaker to be mounted almost anywhere at any angle, on almost any convenient surface. It works with Siemens circuit breakers from 125 to 1200 amperes continuous current, and can be ordered in lengths up to 20 feet (6.1 meters). Other External Accessories ½ Plug-in mounting assemblies ½ Mounting clips ½ Mounting screw kits ½ External operating handles ½ Handle blocking devices ½ Padlocking devices ½ Rear-connecting studs ½ Mounting plates ½ Filler plates ½ Handle extensions ½ Mechanical interlocks ½ Motor operators ½ Compression connectors

Telemand® Motor Operator

Alarm Switch Alarm switches offer provisions for immediate audio or visual indication of a tripped breaker due to overload, short circuit, shunt trip, or undervoltage trip conditions.

330

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16162

Sentron® Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Unusual Operating Conditions

Application

Note: The information provided on this and the next page is intended for reference and recommendation only. Because several variables can act on a circuit breaker's performance at the same time, the data below is based less on controlled testing, than on experience and engineering judgment. Contact Siemens for further information on special conditions and treatment. High Ambient Temperatures Because standard thermal-magnetic breakers are temperature sensitive and calibrated for a specific ambient of 40°C (104°F) (average enclosure temperature), the presence of an ambient higher will cause the breaker to carry less current than its name-plate rating -- in other words, causing the breaker to "derate" (see Table 17.33). Similarly, the safe current carrying capacity of a circuit conductor is based upon an ambient temperature of 30°C (86°F) (average air temperature) and the presence of a higher ambient will reduce its safe current carrying capacity, causing it to "derate." Thus, it can be seen from Table 17.33 that in the presence of a fluctuating temperature, a thermal-magnetic breaker will derate nearly parallel with its connected circuit conductors and maintain close circuit protection. If the application temperature exceeds 40°C (104°F) and is known, either a breaker especially calibrated for the higher ambients or one oversized according to Table 17.33 may be selected. It should be noted that in a case such as this, the circuit conductors should be oversized as well. Siemens Sensitrip® III and Type SB Encased System Breakers are insensitive to temperature changes. However, they do include circuitry to protect the components from abnormally high temperatures. Moisture -- Corrosion For atmospheres having high moisture content and I or where fungus growth is prevalent, a special preventive treatment may be required. Where the air is heavily laden with corrosive elements, breakers made with special corrosion-resistant finishes are recommended. Altitude Reduced air density at altitudes greater than 6600 ft. (2000 meters) affects the ability for a molded case circuit breaker to transfer heat and interrupt faults. Therefore, circuit breakers applied at these altitudes should have interrupting insulation and continuous currents derated as indicated in Table 17.34. Table 17.34 Altitude Correction

Rating Correction Factor Continuous Altitude in feet (meters) Current Voltage 6600 (and below) (2000) 1 1 8500 (2600) 0.99 0.95 13000 (4000) 0.96 0.8

Values for intermediate altitudes may be derived from linear interpolation. See Figure 1.

Table 17.35 Temperature Derating Data for Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

Reference Ampere Rating at 40°C (104°F) 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 Relative Amperage Rating at: 25°C (77°F) 17 22 28 33 39 44 55 66 77 99 110 137 165 192 220 247 275 330 385 440 550 660 770 880 990 1100 1320 1540 1760 1980 2200 50°C (122°F) 13 18 23 28 30 37 46 56 65 84 94 144 136 159 182 205 235 276 325 372 468 564 658 754 828 900 1090 1304 1500 1690 1880 60°C (140°F) 11 16 21 26 25 34 42 52 60 78 87 100 120 140 160 180 220 252 301 340 435 525 613 704 749 825 1000 1148 1320 1485 1650 Siemens Beaker Types

17

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

ED2

ED4 ED6 HED4 HED6 CED6

QJ2 QJH2 QJ2-H JXD6 JD6 HJD6 HHJD6 CJD6

FXD6 FD6 HFD6 CFD6

JXD2

MXD6, MD6 HMXD6 HMD6 CMD6

LXD6 LD6 HLD6 HHLD6 CLD6

NXD6, ND6 HNXD6 HND6 CND6

PXD6, PD6 HPXD6, HPD6 CPD6 RXD6, RD6 HRXD6, HRD6

Figure 1 -- Altitude Adjustment Chart

350

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16162

Sentron® Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Unusual Operating Conditions (400 Hz Systems )

Circuit Breaker Derating Required Table 17.35 lists the maximum continuous current carrying capacity for Siemens breakers at 400 Hz. Due to the increased resistance of the copper sections resulting from the skin effect produced by eddy currents at these frequencies, circuit breakers In many cases require derating. The thermal derating on these devices is based upon 100%, threephase application in open air in a maximum of 40°C (104°F) with 48 in. (1219 mm) of the specified cable (75°C) of bus at the line and load side. Additional derating of not less than 20% will be required if the circuit breaker is to be utilized in an enclosure. Further derating may be required if the enclosure contains other heat generating devices or if the ambient temperatures exceed 40°C (104°F). Cable and Bus Sizing The cable and bus sizes to be utilized at 400 Hz are not based on standard National Electric Codes tables for 60 Hz application. Larger cross sections are necessary at 400 Hz to avoid exceeding component temperature limits. All bus bars specified are based upon mounting the bars in the vertical plane to allow maximum air flow. All bus bars are spaced at a minimum of 0.25 in. (6 mm) apart. Mounting of bus bars in the horizontal plane will necessitate additional drafting. Edgewise orientation of the bus may change the maximum ratings indicated. If additional information is required for other connections of cable or bus, contact Siemens for information. Application Recommendations It is recommended that thermal indicating devices be placed on the line and load terminals or T-connectors of the center pole. These are usually the hottest terminals with a balanced load. A maximum temperature of 75°C (35°C over a maximum ambient of 40°C) would verify

75°C (167°F) Copper Cable per Pole No. of Wire Pieces Size 1 pc. #14 1 pc. #12 1 pc. #10 1 pc. #10 1 pc. #10 1 pc. #8 1 pc. #8 1 pc. #8 1 pc. #6 1 pc. #4 1 pc. #4 1 pc. #3 1 pc. #3 1 pc. #2 1 pc. #1 1 pc. #4 1 pc. #4 1 pc. #3 1 pc. #3 1 pc. #2 1 pc. #1 1 pc. #1/0 1 pc. #2/0 1 pc. #3/0 1 pc. #4/0 1 pc. 250 kcmil 1 pc. #3/0 1 pc. #4/0 1 pc. 250 kcmil 1 pc. 350 kcmil 1 pc. 500 kcmil 2 pcs. #3/0 2 pcs. #3/0 2 pcs. #4/0 1 pc. 250 kcmil 1 pc. 350 kcmil 1 pc. 500 kcmil 2 pcs. #3/0

Application

the maximum rating for the particular application. Temperature profiles taken on these breakers can be correlated to ensure that the hottest points within the breaker are within the required temperature limits. Factory Configurations When required, molded case circuit breakers may be factory calibrated for 400 Hz application. These breakers are specially labeled for 400 Hz usage and their nameplate current rating will include the necessary derating factor. The highest "Maximum Continuous Amperes" rating at 400 Hz, found in Table 17.35 approximately equals the highest specially calibrated 400 Hz nameplate ampere rating available for a given frame size. Contact Siemens for ordering information on other breakers applied in 400 Hz systems.

17

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Table 17.36 400 Hz Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating At 40°C (104°F) 60 Hz 400 Hz Siemens Breaker Enclosed Type Open Air Open Air After Derating 15 15 12 ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, 20 20 16 HED6, CED6 25 25 20 30 30 24 35 35 28 40 40 32 45 43 34 50 48 38 60 57 46 60 67 54 80 76 61 90 86 69 100 95 76 110 105 84 125 119 95 70 63 50 FD6, FXD4, HFD6, HFXD4, 80 72 58 CFD6 90 80 64 100 90 72 110 95 75 125 105 84 150 125 100 175 140 112 200 160 128 225 180 144 250 200 160 200 170 136 JXD2, JD6, JXD6, HJD6, 225 190 152 HJXD6, HHJD6, 250 210 168 HHJXD6, CJD6 300 240 192 350 260 208 400 300 240 200 170 170 JD6, JXD6, HJD6, HJXD6, 225 190 190 100% Rated 250 210 210 300 240 240 350 260 260 400 300 300 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating At 40°C (104°F) 60 Hz 400 Hz Siemens Breaker Enclosed Type Open Air Open Air After Derating 250 210 168 LD2, LXD6, HLD6, HLXD6, 300 240 192 HHLD6, 350 260 208 HHLXD6, 400 300 240 CLD6 450 340 272 500 375 300 600 420 336 250 210 210 LD6, LXD6, HLD6, HLXD6 300 240 240 100% Rated 350 260 260 400 300 300 450 340 340 500 375 375 600 420 420 500 400 320 MD6, MXD6, HMD6, HMXD6, 600 430 360 CMD6 700 500 400 800 560 448 500 400 400 MD6, MXD6, HMD6, HMXD6, 600 430 430 CMD6 700 500 500 100% Rated 800 560 560 800 560 448 ND6, NXD6, HND6, HNXD6, 900 600 480 CND6 1000 650 520 1200 780 624 900 600 600 ND6, NXD6, HND6, HNXD6, 1000 650 650 CND6 1200 780 780 780 624 PD6,PXD6,HPD6 1200 HPXD6, CPD6 1400 850 680 100% Rated 1600 960 768 1200 780 780 PD6, PXD6, HPD6, HPXD6 1400 850 850 CPD6 1600 960 960 1600 960 768 RD6, RXD6, 1800 1080 864 HRD6, HRXD6 80% Rated 2000 1200 960 75°C (167°F) Copper Cable per Pole No. of Wire Pieces Size 1 pc. 250 kcmil 1 pc. 350 kcmil 1 pc. 500 kcmil 2 pcs. #3/0 2 pcs. #4/0 2 pcs. 250 kcmil 350 kcmil 2 pcs. 1 pc. 250 kcmil 350 kcmil 1 pc. 500 kcmil 1 pc. 2 pcs. #3/0 2 pcs. #4/0 2 pcs. 250 kcmil 2 pcs. 350 kcmil 2 pcs. 250 kcmil 2 pcs. 350 kcmil 3 pcs. 250 kcmil 300 kcmil 3 pcs. 2 pcs. 250 kcmil 2 pcs. 350 kcmil 250 kcmil 3 pcs. 300 kcmil 3 pcs. 300 kcmil 3 pcs. 350 kcmil 3 pcs. 400 kcmil 3 pcs. 4 pcs. 350 kcmil 3 pcs. 350 kcmil 3 pcs. 400 kcmil 4 pcs. 350 kcmil 4 pcs. 400 kcmil 4 pcs. 500 kcmil 5 pcs. 500 kcmil 4 pcs. 400 kcmil 4 pcs. 500 kcmil 5 pcs. 500 kcmil 5 pcs. 500 kcmil 5 pcs. 500 kcmil 6 pcs. 500 kcmil

The information provided on this page is intended for reference and recommendation only. Because several variables can act on a circuit breaker's performance atthe same time, the data above is based less on controlled testing than on experience and engineering judgment. Contact Siemens for further information on special conditions and treatment. Additional derating may be required if the ambient temperature is greater than 40°C (104°F). Calculated after derating to compensate for the heating of the copper conductor, caused by the skin effect generated by eddy currents produced at 400/415 Hz.

CSI Section 16162

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

351

Sentron® Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Guide Form Specifications

General Specifications Siemens molded case circuit breakers shall be provided for the protection of all electrical circuits. Other makes of molded case circuit breakers will not be accepted until approved by this office. All circuit breakers shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., conform to applicable requirements of NEMA Standard Publication No. AB1 and meet appropriate classifications of Federal Specifications W C 37511/Gen. All circuit breakers shall have a quick-make, quick-break over center toggle-type mechanism and the handle mechanism shall be trip-free to prevent holding contacts closed against a short circuit or sustained overload. All circuit breaker handles shall assume a position between "ON" and "OFF" when tripped automatically. Multi-pole circuit breakers shall be common-trip such that an overload or short circuit on any one pole will result in all poles opening simultaneously. Arc extinction is to be accomplished by magnetic arc chutes. All ratings are to be clearly visible.

Specifications

17

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Choose either thermal magnetic or solid state trip specifications

Thermal Magnetic Trip Specification Automatic operation of all circuit breakers shall be obtained by means of thermal-magnetic tripping devices located in each pole providing inverse time delay and instantaneous circuit protection. Circuit breakers shall be calibrated to carry 100% rated current in an ambient of 40°C. Circuit breakers shall be ambient compensating in that, as the ambient temperature increases over 40°C, the circuit breaker automatically derates itself so as to better protect its associated conductor. The instantaneous magnetic trip shall be adjustable and accessible from the front of all circuit breakers on frame sizes 250A and above.

Solid State Trip Specification Solid State sensing shall measure true RMS current with capability to measure through to the 21st harmonic. Automatic operation of all circuit breaker frames 400A and larger shall be obtained by means of solid state tripping elements providing inverse time delay and (instantaneous) and/or (short-time delay) circuit protection. Continuous current rating shall be adjustable from 20% to 100% of trip unit rating. Long-time delay and instantaneous trip shall be adjustable. The optional short-time pick-up trip shall have adjustable pick-up settings and three fixed times and one l2t ramp. Circuit breaker frames 400A and larger and where indicated on the drawings shall be 100% equipment rated. Integral Ground Fault Option Main and feeder circuit breakers, as indicated on the drawings shall be provided with integral ground fault protection. Ground fault pick-up shall be adjustable from 20% to 70% of circuit breaker maximum continuous current rating, but in no case greater than 1200A. Ground fault time delay shall be adjustable with three l2 t ramps. Ammeter / Trip Indicator (Optional) Solid state trip breakers shall be furnished with combination ammeter/trip indicator units that can simultaneously display three phase currents, and retain and display date, time and type (overload, short circuit or ground fault) of trip for the most recent 5 trip events.

Current Limiting Specifications (Optional) Where indicated on the drawings, and in the panelboard and switchboard schedules, Siemens current limiting circuit breakers are to be furnished. Current limiting circuit breakers shall limit the let-through l2 t to a value less than the l2 t of one-half cycle wave of the symmetrical prospective current without any fusible elements when operating within its current range. Instantaneous Only Trip Specifications (Optional) Where indicated on the drawings and in the combination motor starter / motor control schedule, furnish instantaneous magnetic trip only circuit breakers for motor short circuit protection. The magnetic trips shall be adjustable from the front of all these circuit breakers. The interrupting rating of the circuit breakers shall be as indicated in the specifications, shown on the drawings in the panelboard/ switchboard schedules; or as shown on the single line drawing. The interrupting rating of the circuit breakers shall be at least equal to the available short circuit current at the line terminals of the circuit breaker and correspond to the UL listed integrated short circuit current rating specified for the panelboards and switchboards. Series Connected Combination Specifications (Optional) Where protective devices are applied in series combination, such that the prospective available fault current exceeds the interrupting rating (AIR) of the downstream protective devices, such combinations shall be UL recognized combinations. All electrical equipment using these UL recognized circuit breaker combinations shall be clearly marked in accordance with NEC Section 240-83(c).

354

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16162

Residential and Commercial Products

Uni-PakTM Metering System

A self-contained, single-phase system for residential and small commercial applications, Siemens Uni-PakTM single-phase metering centers are products of high reliability designed to meet the service and flexibility needs of small to medium size projects requiring from two to six meters. These metering centers are ideally suited for small applications such as apartment, professional, and commercial buildings. Uni-Pak systems are shipped completely assembled with hanger and mounting bracket for fast and easy surface mounting. All units are prebussed and fitted with standard lay-in lugs for either copper or aluminum cable. Field-addable accessory kits are available for conversion to NEMA lug landing pads and when required, flushing rail kits are also available. Connections are accessible from the front, and all compartments for unmetered bus are barrier protected and sealable. The ringless individual meter socket covers can be easily removed without disturbing the meters. Neutral and ground bars are supplied in the bottom of the tenant compartment. Integral Service Entrance Compartment Each Uni-Pak metering system has an integral service entrance compartment and individual branch circuit breaker provision in a separate compartment adjacent to each meter socket. Short Circuit Withstand Ratings Up to 100,000A IR Combination indoor / outdoor units are UL Listed as service entrance equipment with short circuit withstand ratings up to 100,000A IR. Main bus ratings are up to 800 amperes and meter sockets are rated for 125 or 200 amperes. Breakers for 15 to 200 amperes can be mixed in a 200 ampere system. (15 to 125 ampere breakers require two QF3 filler plates.) Weather-Tough Covers Indoor / outdoor enclosures are fabricated from G-90 zinc-coated steel, finished with ANSI light gray paint applied by an electrodeposit process. This technique imparts a tough, even coat of pigment for maximum surface protection. Additionally, enclosures have weatherresistant covers and provisions for padlocking or wire sealing. Insulator Bases with Grounding Straps High impact resistant, non-tracking meter socket insulator bases are made of glass-reinforced polyester resin. Socket jaws are tin-plated copper with springsteel reinforcing clips for reliable contact pressure. Positive alignment of jaws is assured by bus straps which are bolted in place. By simply removing a single nut from the front, an individual jaw can be replaced. In addition, all line side meter jaws are supplied with meter guides. All sockets are designed to accommodate field additions of fifth and sixth jaws, manual bypass (ring style only) and insulated and isolated fifth jaws. Ringless or Ring Style Covers These covers can be removed or replaced one at a time. Additionally, each ringless cover incorporates a security latch compatible with barrel locks and other common sealing devices. Servicing and system integrity are further enhanced by an integral horn-type bypass in ringless units. Unlike other systems, the horn type bypass system minimizes opportunities for vandalism and theft. Both ring and ringless meter sockets offer the convenience of individual interchangeable meter covers which satisfy the preference or requirement of local utility companies. Service personnel can quickly access a specific meter socket through its individual cover. Separate Utility and Tenant Compartments Separate and barriered utility and tenant compartments are required by electrical utility companies. This feature adds to the security of the overall unit and is a great convenience -- both to the tenant whose electrician has easy access to their compartment while the utility side remains sealed -- and to utility service personnel whose compartment remains sealed from unauthorized entry. Additional Features ½ Individual split covers ½ UL Listed for 60 / 75°C conductors. See equipment markings for applications ½ Completely self-contained mete centers ½ Outdoor surface mounted enclosures ½ AI / Cu lay-in lugs, except two-socket units ½ Bottom and rear branch wiring exits. (Neutral and ground at bottom only) ½ ANSI #61 light gray electrodeposited paint on galvanized G-90 steel ½ Meets EUSERC specifications when NEMA stud kit and flushing ring (if required) field added

General

19

Residential and Commercial Products

Note: Siemens Uni-PakTM employs the QP family of plug-in circuit breakers. Refer to pp. 332­335 for specific information.

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

379

Residential and Commercial Products

Uni-PakTM Metering System

Top and Bottom Main Feed

General / Technical

Two to six 125A or 200A sockets Ring or ringless design Barriered, sealable compartment for unmetered current-carrying parts Factory installed lay-in-lugs can be removed and replaced by NEMA lug landing pads, if required Hangers and mounting bracket on back of enclosure facilitate surface mounting Two separate compartments provide security and convenience to both tenant and utility company Knockouts sized for maximum wire rating Swing up "U" Channel Extension for ease of wiring Completely pre-bussed Unmetered bus barrier Combination indoor / outdoor NEMA 3R enclosures

19

Residential and Commercial Products

Unified Circuit Breakers ½ For normal 10,000A IR short circuit capacity, use type QP or QPP breakers. For 22,000A IR applications, use type QPH or QPPH breakers. For 42,000A IR or 65,000A IR applications, use type HOP or HQPP breakers. For 100,000A IR applications, use Type HQPPH breakers. All of these may be used to protect EQ®lll load centers with 10,000A IR type QP breakers. ½ EQ® plug-in breakers have a long history of very high reliability. ½ Consult pp. 296 to 302 for complete details on Types QP, QPP, QPH, QPPH, HQP, HQPP, and HQPPH circuit breakers.

Typical Wiring Diagrams -- 125, 200A Sockets

380

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

Residential and Commercial Products

Uni-PakTM Metering System

125A Socket

Dimensions

Table 19.9

200 ­ 400A Column Design

Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 28.250 (718) 37.250 (946) 46.250 (1175) B 24.219 (615) C 29.000 (737) D 13.625 (346) E 15.375 (391) F 25.000 (635)

Table 19.11

200 ­ 600A Side-by-Side Design

Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 28.250 (718) 37.250 (946) 37.250 (946) 28.250 (718) 37.250 (946) B 29.343 (618) 26.594 (675) C 42.500 (1080) 47.000 (1194) D 13.625 (346) 13.625 (346) E 15.250 (387) 19.750 (502) F 25.000 (635) 27.000 (692)

Bus Ampere No. of Rating Sockets 200 2 300 3 400 4

200A Socket

No. of Bus Sockets Ampere Rating L R 400 2 2 2 3 3 3 600 2 2 2 3 3 3

19

Residential and Commercial Products

Table 19.10

400 Column Design

Dimensions in Inches (mm) B 28.219 (717) C 33.000 (838) D 17.625 (448) E 15.375 (391) F 29.000 (737)

Table 19.12

Bus Ampere Rating 400

400 ­ 600A Side-by-Side Design

Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 32.250 (819) 43.250 (1099) 43.250 (1099) 32.250 (819) 43.250 (1099) 43.250 (1099) S 1.594 (40) B 28.312 (719) 30.562 (776) C 50.500 (1283) 55.000 (1397) D 17.625 (448) 17.625 (448) E 15.250 (387) 19.750 (502) F 29.000 (737) 31.250 (794)

Bus Ampere No. of Rating Sockets A 200 2 32.250 (819) 3 42.250 (1099)

No. of Sockets L 2 3 3 2 3 3 R 2 2 3 2 2 3

600

Table 19.13--Remaining Dimensions in Inches (mm) for All -- Drawings This Page

G 6.125 (156) H 2.750 (70) I 4.562 (116) J 9.000 (229) K 11.500 (292) L 3.750 (95) M 13.125 (333) N 1.750 (44) O 1.250 (32) P 3.875 (98)

Q 7.750 (197)

R 2.750 (70)

T 3.187 (81)

U 1.750 (44)

V 2.750 (70)

W 2.281 (58)

X 7.500 (191)

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

381

Residential and Commercial Products

Modular Meter Centers

General

The modular metering system consists of eight basic components: main circuit breaker modules, fusible switch modules, tap boxes, and meter modules ranging from two-high through six-high. Siemens metering centers are designed for 1-phase 3-wire, 120 / 240 Volts AC ­­ 3-phase 4-wire, 120 / 208 Volts AC ­­ or 3-phase 4-wire, 240 Volts AC delta systems. With sockets rated 125,200 and 400 amperes, units with the same phased cross bus can be mixed and matched to accommodate a large and varied range of applications. All modules are pre-bussed and manu-

factured to tight specifications. Main systems offer short circuit current protective devices can be as high as 2,000 amperes. Main cross-busses in service entrance modules and meter modules are rated for 1200 amperes. These UL-Listed modular metering systems offer short circuit current ratings up to 100,000 amperes. Additionally, when Siemens series combination ratings are applied, lower AIR circuit breakers may be used in systems having 100,000 RMS symmetrical available. See series-connected breakers Tables 19.31 and 19.32 on page 362.

Compact Meter Modules Six-high 125 ampere meter modules measure only 13.44 in. (341 mm) wide and 7.75 in. (197 mm) deep. Three modules side-to-side, containing eighteen meters and breakers take up approximately 40 in. (1016 mm) of space. High Quality Bus Metering bus is tin-plated aluminum for maximum performance and economy. All unmetered bus is barrier-protected, and inaccessible bus connections are welded to assure continued reliability. Joint stack and meter base bus connections are bolted and accessible from the front.

19

Residential and Commercial Products

Circuit Breaker Module

Fusible Switch Module

Pull / Tap Box Module

Service Entrance Modules Siemens modular metering systems have three types of service entrance modules: 1. Circuit Breaker: configured for both top or bottom entry by first inverting the module and secondly inverting the circuit breaker. (To maintain handle in the UP position when ON.) 2. Fusible Switch: configured for both top or bottom entry by inverting the module. (Indoor Units Only)

For 3Ø in and 3Ø out stacks only.

3. Tap Box: configured for both top and bottom entry by inverting the tap box. Tap boxes are generally used when no main disconnect is required in the line-up or whenever applictions require cabling out of a line-up. Additionally, Siemens offers underground pull-boxes which are used when NEMA lug-landing pads are necessary. Customer cabling is required to join unit to a service entrance module.

Note: Siemens Modular Metering incorporates the QP family of plug-in circuit breakers. See pages 332 to 335 for detailed information.

382

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

Residential and Commercial Products

Modular Meter Centers

General

Joint Connector-Single-Bolt A single-bolt connecting device joins one module to another. Shipped with all meter modules, this connector is an assembly of glass-reinforced polyester insulator disks sandwiched between heavy-duty conductor disks; all of which are held in alignment by a high-strength bolt. The edges of the insulator disks are beveled, permitting the disks to slip easily into place when connecting one module to another. All that is required to join one module to another, mechanically and electrically, is a simple alignment maneuver and a torque wrench. Having a yield strength of 105,000 psi, only 35 ft. Ibs. (16 kg) of torque are required to tighten the connector. The back plate of the connector, which provides the grounding between enclosures, is stop-notched to facilitate bolt tightening. After installation, if bolt tightening is required, it can be accomplished easily without shutting down power.

Weatherproofing Outdoor modules have raincaps. Outdoor meter stacks also have tenant breaker covers. Neoprene gasketing is provided around ringless meter socket openings and between modules at cross-bus openings. Padlock provisions are included on tenant breaker covers. Circuit Breakers Siemens main breakers, rated at 400 through 2000 amperes, are among the most compact available with interrupting ratings up to 100,000 amperes. EQ®, QJ2 and JXDP branch breakers feature thermal and magnetic trip elements and feature isolated-pole construction, silver alloy contacts, and high pressure, straight-in load connectors.

125 ampere Siemens meter modules take any combination of 15 to 125 ampere plug-in molded case breakers. 200 ampere meter modules accept type QPP or type QP branch breakers. Busway Connections A tap stack can be used for direct connection from busway to a switch or breaker module specifically designed for such an application (special order). Where six or fewer branch molded case circuit breakers are to serve as multiple main protective devices, meter modules can be connected directly to busway. A 9 inch (229 mm) tap stack is all that is required. See Busway page 194 for additional details and dimensions. Commercial Meter Modules Siemens commercial meter modules eliminate the need for expensive metering switchboards or assembly of individual meter sockets and circuit breaker enclosures that require a significant amount of wire and labor. These commercial meters are ideal for applications such as shopping centers, office buildings, and small commercial buildings-which frequently require a 7jaw, 3-phase 4-wire meter socket with a 3-pole branch circuit breaker. For added flexibility, a single-phase, 3-wire meter socket with a P-pole branch circuit breaker is available. Commercial and standard meter modules may be interconnected with compatible cross-bus.

19

Residential and Commercial Products

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

383

Residential and Commercial Products

Modular Meter Centers

General

Meter Socket Covers Designed to meet the specific needs of utilities concerned about the safety of personnel in high-risk environments, individual meter socket covers either ring or ringless, permit service personnel to quickly and safely access a specific meter socket through its individual cover. Each meter socket has an individual branch circuit breaker provision adjacent to it. Integral to each ringless meter socket cover is a security latch which is barrellock compatible, providing increased protection from vandalism, and which also accepts all popular securing mechanisms as well.

Utility and Tenant Compartments Separate and barriered utility and tenant compartments are required or preferred by many electrical utility companies. This feature adds to the security of the overall unit. At the same time this is a convenience to the tenant whose electrician needs easy access to his compartment while the utility side remains sealed. Knockouts On outdoor units branch wiring can exit bottom, or bottom rear, giving the installer flexibility needed in the field. Field Choice Locations Siemens meter centers offer fieldchoice of top or bottom neutral and ground locations. Neutral and ground bars are supplied in the bottom, but may be moved to the top position. In addition, accessory kits are available to allow installation of neutral and ground bars in both positions if required.

19

Residential and Commercial Products

Meter Sockets Both ring-style and ringless meter socket bases are made of high impact resistant, non-tracking, glass-reinforced polyester resin. Socket jaws are tin-plated copper with spring-steel reinforcing clips for reliable contact pressure. Positive alignment of jaws is assured by bus straps which are bolted in place. By simply removing a single nut from the front, an individual jaw can be replaced. In addition, all line side meter jaws are supplied with meter guides. 125 ampere meter module sockets are spaced 9 in. (229 mm) vertically on center and 13.44 in. (341 mm) horizontally. Respectively, 200 ampere sockets are spaced 11 in. (279 mm) and 17.44 in. (443 mm) on center. This compact design generally allows for more sockets in less wall space. All sockets are designed to accommodate field additions of fifth and sixth jaws, manual bypass, and insulated and isolated fifth jaws. Additionally, each ringless meter has a built-in horn-type bypass device facilitating the use of bypass cables by utility service personnel. This feature has proven to be a theft-resistant bypass design.

Installation Compact and relatively light-weight, all modules can be lifted into place, bolted together and wired by one person. Bottom alignment of meter modules allows all conduit to be cut and positioned at the same height, saving time and money (meter mains may vary).

384

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

Residential and Commercial Products

Modular Meter Centers

Wiring Diagrams Service Entrance Modules

Technical

1-Phase, 3 Wire, Incoming

3-Phase, 4 Wire, Incoming

Meter Modules -- 125 and 200A

Commercial to 200A

19

Residential and Commercial Products

3-Phase In, 3-Phase Out, Typical

400A Socket

1-Phase In, 1-Phase Out, Typical

3-Phase In, 1-Phase Out, Typical

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

385

Residential and Commercial Products

Modular Meter Centers

Service Entrance Modules ­­ Circuit Breaker

Table 19.15

Ampere Rating Phase 400 600 1 3 Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 9.250 (235) 14.000 (356) B 15.562 (395) 17.625 (448) C 33.000 (838) 37.000 (940) D 4.562 (116) 4.562 (116)

Dimensions

Remaining Dimensions for all Ratings -- In. (mm)

G 17.500 (445) O 62.000 (1575) H 24.875 (632) P 16.250 (413) I 17.937 (456) Q 22.187 (564) J 12.437 (316) R 5.500 (140) K 6.937 (176) S 5.500 (140) L 3.000 (76) T 14.000 (356) M 8.500 (216) U 14.000 (356) N 14.000 (356)

19

Residential and Commercial Products Table 19.16

Ampere Rating Phase 800 1, 3 1, 3 1, 3 Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 20.094 (510) 20.094 (510) B 14.062 (357) 14.062 (357) C 6.062 (154) 6.062 (154) D 3.000 (76) 3.000 (76) E 8.500 (216) 8.500 (216) F 15.000 (381) 15.000 (381)

Table 19.14

Ampere Rating Phase 1, 3 1600 1 2000 Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 25.031 (636) B 18.906 (480) C 12.500 (318) D 6.125 (156) E 3.000 (76) F 8.500 (216)

1000 1200

Remaining Dimensions for all Ratings -- In. (mm)

G 20.000 (508) P 13.250 (337) H 14.875 (378) Q 4.750 (121) I 9.937 (252) R 5.500 (140) J 5.000 (127) S 15.000 (381) K 1.500 (38) T 21.500 (546) L 2.625 (67) U 10.500 (267) M 7.625 (194) V 15.000 (381) N 10.500 (267) W 3.812 (97) O 43.000 (1092) X 5.437 (138)

Remaining Dimensions for all Ratings -- In. (mm)

G 17.500 (445) O 62.000 (1575) H 24.875 (632) P 16.250 (413) I 17.937 (456) Q 22.187 (564) J 12.437 (316) R 5.500 (140) K 6.937 (176) S 31.500 (800) L 3.000 (76) T 14.000 (356) M 8.500 (216) U 17.500 (445) N 14.000 (356)

1000 and 1200A = 20.0 in. (508 mm) 1000 and 1200A = 23.5 in. (597 mm)

386

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

Residential and Commercial Products

Modular Meter Centers

Service Entrance Modules -- Fusible Switch

Table 19.18

Ampere Rating Phase 200 G 2.250 (57) 1, 3 H 3.000 (76) Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 12.000 (305) I 8.500 (216) B 13.000 (330) J 33.000 (838) C 13.500 (343) K 16.500 (419) D 6.000 (152) L 1.000 (25) E 12.000 (305) M 2.250 (57) F 1.000 (25) N 12.000 (305)

Dimensions

Add 2 in. (51mm) to include handle. Add 3 in. (76mm) to include handle.

Table 19.19

Ampere Rating Phase 400 600 800 1, 3 Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 8.500 (216) 14.500 (368) 14.500 (368) B 12.187 (310) 18.187 (462) 18.187 (462) C 35.500 (902) 41.500 (1054) 41.500 (1054) D 6.937 (176) 8.937 (227) 8.937 (227)

19

Residential and Commercial Products

Remaining Dimensions for all Ratings -- In. (mm)

E 15.000 (381) M 3.500 (89) F 3.375 (86) N 3.500 (89) G 4.187 (106) O 2.750 (70) H 3.375 (86) P 15.000 (381) I 3.375 (86) Q 16.500 (419) J 16.000 (406) R 15.000 (381) K 1.500 (38) S 3.187 (81) L 7.500 (191)

Table 19.17

Ampere Rating Phase 1200 G 14.875 (378) 1, 3 H 9.937 (252) Dimensions In Inches (mm) A 20.094 (510) I 5.000 (127) B 15.000 (381) K 2.625 (67) C 18.000 (457) D E 15.062 23.500 (383) (597) L M N 7.625 15.000 3.187 (194) (381) (81) F 50.000 (1270) O 3.187 (81)

J 1.500 (38)

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

387

Residential and Commercial Products

Modular Meter Centers

Service Entrance Module ­­ Main Switch with Underground Box Extension (Meets EUSERC Specifications)

Table 19.20

Ampere Rating Phase 400 1, 3 600 800 G 16.500 (419) H 9.000 (229) Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 25.500 (648) I 4.250 (108) B 15.000 (381) C 50.062 (1272) L 14.094 (358) D 26.296 (668) M 33.500 (851) E 17.906 (455) N 2.000 (51) F 21.250 (540) O 4.000 (102)

Dimensions

J 4.375 (111)

K 10.187 (259)

Tap Box Module ­­ 800A

Table 19.21

Ampere Rating Phase Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 12.000 (305) I 2.750 (70) Q 1.500 (38) B 3.375 (86) J 1.500 (38) R 6.000 (152) C 13.000 (330) K 6.000 (152) D 5.312 (135) L 39.000 (991) E 3.375 (86) M 24.937 (633) F 2.625 (67) N 14.812 (376)

19

Residential and Commercial Products

800 G 12.000 (305) O 15.500 (394)

1, 3 H 4.875 (124) P 12.000 (305)

388

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

Residential and Commercial Products

Modular Meter Centers

Tap Box Modules 1200A 1600A

Dimensions

Table 19.22

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Ampere Rating Phase A B C D 3.375 8.250 4.125 5.500 1, 3 1200 (86) (210) (105) (140) E 3.000 (76) F 13.000 (330)

Table 19.23

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Ampere Rating Phase A B C D 25.000 19.000 12.500 6.000 1, 3 1600 (635) (483) (318) (152) E 8.500 (216) F 3.000 (76)

G 3.250 (83) O 16.500 (419)

H 8.500 (216) P 12.000 (305)

I 4.250 (108) Q 15.000 (381)

J 5.500 (140)

K 3.000 (76)

L 41.000 (1041)

M 29.500 (749)

N 19.250 (489)

G 14.000 (356) O 29.250 (743)

H 17.875 (454) P 19.000 (483)

I 12.500 (318) Q 16.500 (419)

J 7.000 (178) R 13.000 (330)

K 13.000 (330)

L 8.500 (216)

M 3.000 (76)

N 41.750 (1060)

19

Residential and Commercial Products

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

389

Residential and Commercial Products

Modular Meter Centers

Meter Modules 125A 200A

Dimensions

Table 19.27

No. of Sockets 2 3 4 5 6 Dimension "A" in Inches (mm) 32.406 (823) 41.406 (1052) 50.406 (1280) 59.406 (1509) 68.406 (1738)

Table 19.28

No. of Sockets 2 3 4 Dimension "A" in Inches (mm) 36.406 (925) 47.406 (1204) 58.406 (1484)

Dimensions in Inches (mm) -- Common to All Socket Configurations

J 7.844 (199) R 5.594 (142) K 4.844 (123) S 2.062 (52) L 13.062 (332) T 5.187 (132) M 11.000 (279) U 7.500 (191) N 6.656 (169) O 4.343 (110) P 11.500 (292) Q 2.469 (63)

19

Residential and Commercial Products

Dimensions in Inches (mm) -- Common to All Socket Configurations

K 7.844 (199) S 4.953 (126) L 4.219 (107) T 2.343 (60) M 9.062 (230) U 5.094 (129) N 9.000 (229) V 7.500 (191) O 4.656 (118) P 4.343 (110) Q 11.500 (292) R 2.203 (56)

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

391

Residential and Commercial Products

Specialized Circuit Breakers

Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (Class A)

Features ½ Available in 15 through 60 ampere rating ½ Suitable for a variety of construction applications ½ Resists false tripping (Shielded to prevent RF interference tripping) ½ Low voltage stability (Resists tripping from brown outs, 50 V AC minimum) ½ Standard 1 in. (25 mm) format ½ Also available in BLF type (Low tab bolt-on) ½ UL listed under standard UL 489 ½ Meets NEC code article 680-42 ½ CSA certified UL Interrupting Ratings 15 through 60 A at 120/240 VAC; 10,000 Symmetrical RMS amperes.

Application

GFCI 2-Pole QPF

Front View Side View

19

Residential and Commercial Products

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wiring Diagrams

Features ½ Compact design incorporating (2) 15A or 20A 1-pole circuit breakers in series with surge arrester module ½ Plug-in load center mounting is easy to install ½ One device will protect the entire residence ½ Illuminated LED's indicate surge protection functioning ½ Perfect for retrofit - Replaces (2) 1 in. (25 mm) breakers without losing any circuits ½ UL Listed -- Meets ANSI C62.11 requirements ½ CSA Certified

Circuit Breaker and Secondary Surge Arrester

Ratings ½ Secondary surge arrester voltage rating -- 175V AC maximum, line-to-ground. ½ Transient energy rating -- 460 joules, line-to-neutral. -- 920 joules, line-to-line. ½ Peak current withstand rating -- 40,000 amps. ½ Discharge voltage / current characteristic rating -- at 1500 amps, 600 volts, line-to-neutral, at 5000 amps, 800 volts, line-to-neutral. ½ Transient suppression voltage rating: 1500V at 10,000A, line-to-neutral. ½ Circuit breaker interrupting rating -- maximum RMS symmetrical, 10,000 amps, 120 / 240V AC. (not for use on 240 volt 2-wire systems).

394

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

General Technical and Application Information

Types of Power Distribution Systems

There are several basic considerations which must be included by the system design engineer to select and design the best power distribution system which will supply power to both present and future loads most economically. Among these are: ½ Safety ½ Reliability ½ Maintenance ½ Flexibility ½ Voltage Regulation ½ Initial Investment ½ Simplicity of Operation The characteristics of electrical service available at the building site, the types of loads, the quality of service required, and the size and configuration of building are also important factors that will influence system design and circuit arrangement. Four basic circuit arrangements are used for the distribution of electric power. They are the radial, primary selective, secondary selective, and secondary network circuit arrangements. The following discussion of these circuit arrangements covers both the high-voltage and lowvoltage circuits. The reader should recognize that the high-voltage circuits and substations may be owned by either the utility company or the building owner, depending upon the electric rates, the practice, and requirements of the particular electric utility serving the specific building site. Radial System If power is brought into a building at utilization voltage, the simplest and the lowest cost means of distributing the power is to use a radial circuit arrangement. The radial system is the simplest that can be used, and has the lowest system investment. It is suitable for smaller installations where continuity of service is not critical. The low voltage service entrance circuit comes into the building through service entrance equipment and terminates at a main switchgear assembly, switchboard or panelboard. Feeder circuits are provided to the loads or to other subswitchboards, distribution cabinets, or panelboards. Figure 1 shows the two forms of radial circuit arrangements most frequently used. Under normal operating conditions, the entire load is served through the single incoming supply circuit, and in the case of high voltage service, through the transformer. A fault in the supply circuit, the transformer, or the main bus will cause an interruption of service to all loads. A fault on one of the feeder or branch circuits should be isolated from the rest of the system by the circuit protective device on that circuit. Under this condition, continuity of service is maintained for all loads except those served from the faulted circuit. The need for continuity of service often requires multiple paths of power supply as opposed to the single path of power supply in the radial system.

Technical 21

General Technical & Application Info.

Figure 3. Expanded Radial Systems individual Primary Feeder Protection

making it possible to limit outages due to a feeder or transformer fault to the loads associated with the faulted equipment. If circuit breakers are used for primary feeder protection, the cost of this system will be high. Even if fused switches are used, the cost of the arrangement of Figure 3 will exceed the cost of the arrangement of Figure 2. Primary Selective System The circuit arrangement of Figure 4 provides means of reducing both the extent and duration of an outage caused by a primary feeder fault. This operating feature is provided through the use of duplicate primary feeder circuits and load interrupter switches that permit connection of each secondary substation transformer to either of the two primary feeder circuits. Each primary feeder circuit must have sufficient capacity to carry the total load in the building.

Figure 2. Expanded Radial System--Single Primary Feeder

A fault in a primary feeder in the arrangement shown in Figure 2 will cause the main protective device to operate and interrupt service to all loads. If the fault were in a transformer, service could be restored to all loads except those served from that transformer. If the fault were in a primary feeder, service could not be restored to any loads until the source of trouble had been eliminated. Since it is to be expected that more faults will occur on the feeders than in the transformers, it becomes logical to consider providing individual circuit protection on the primary feeders as shown in Figure 3. This arrangement has the advantage of

Figure 4. Primary Selective Systems

Figure 1. Radial Systems

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

415

General Technical and Application Information

Types of Power Distribution Systems

21

General Technical & Application Info. Under normal operating conditions, the appropriate switches are closed in an attempt to divide the load equally between the two primary feeder circuits. Then, should a primary feeder fault occur, there is an interruption of service to only half of the load. Service can be restored to all loads by switching the deenergized transformers to the other primary feeder circuit. The primary selective switches are usually manually operated and outage time for half the load is determined by the time it takes to accomplish the necessary switching. An automatic throwover switching arrangement could be used to avoid the interruption of service to half the load. However, the additional cost of the automatic feature may not be justified in many applications. If a fault occurs in a secondary substation transformer, service can be restored to all loads except those served from the faulted transformer. The higher degree of service continuity afforded by the primary selective arrangement is realized at a cost somewhat higher than a simple radial system due to the extra primary cables and switchgear. Secondary Selective System Under normal conditions, the secondary selective arrangement of Figure 5 is operated as two separate radial systems. The secondary tie circuit breaker in each secondary substation is normally open. The load served from a secondary selective substation should be divided equally between the two bus sections. If a fault occurs on a primary feeder or in a transformer, service is interrupted to all loads associated with the faulted feeder or transformer. Service may be restored to all secondary buses by first opening the main secondary switch or circuit breaker associated with the faulted transformer and primary feeder, and then closing the tie breaker. The two transformer secondary circuit breakers in each substation should be interlocked with the secondary tie breaker in such a manner that all three cannot be in the closed position simultaneously. This prevents parallel operation of the two transformers and thereby minimizes the interrupting duty imposed on the secondary switching devices. It also eliminates the possibility of interrupting service to all loads on the bus when a fault occurs in either a primary feeder or a transformer. The cost of the secondary selective system will depend upon the spare capacity in the transformers and primary feeders. The minimum transformer and primary feeder capacity will be determined by 416

Technical

Figure 5. Secondary Selective System Using Close-Coupled Double-Ended Substation

Figure 6. Secondary Selective System Using Two Single-Ended Substations With Cable or Bus Tie

essential loads that must be served under emergency operating conditions. If service is to be provided for all loads under emergency conditions, then each primary feeder should have sufficient capacity to carry the total load, and each transformer should be capable of carrying the total load in each substation. This type of system will be more expensive than either the radial or primary selective system, but it makes restoration of service to all essential loads possible in the event of either a primary feeder or transformer fault. The higher cost results from the duplication of transformer capacity in each secondary substation. This cost may be reduced by shedding nonessential loads. A modification of the secondary selective circuit arrangement is shown in Figure 6. In this arrangement there is only one transformer in each secondary substation, but adjacent substations are interconnected in pairs by a normally open low voltage tie circuit. When the primary feeder or transformer supplying one secondary substation bus is out of service, the essential loads on that substation bus can be supplied over the tie circuit. The operating aspects of this system are somewhat complicated if the two substations are separated by distance. The best arrangement is to use close-coupled, double-ended substations. Secondary Network System Many buildings with radial distribution systems are served at utilization voltage from utility secondary network systems. The network supply system assures a relatively high degree of service reliability. The utility network may take the form of

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

a distributed network or a spot network. If the building demand is in the order of 750 kVA or higher, a spot network will often be established to serve the building. In buildings where a high degree of service reliability is required, and where spot network supply may not be available, the distributed secondary network system is often used. This is particularly true of institutional buildings such as hospitals. The network may take the form of several secondary substations interconnected by low voltage circuits. However, the most common practice is to use some form of the spot network circuit arrangement.

Figure 7. Simple Spot Network System

A simple spot network, such as shown in Figure 7, consists of two or more identical transformers supplied over separate primary feeder circuits. The transformers are connected to a common low voltage

CSI Section 16470

General Technical and Application Information

Types of Power Distribution Systems

bus through network protectors and are operated in parallel. A network protector is an electrically operated power circuit breaker controlled by network relays in such a way that the circuit breaker automatically opens when power flows from the low voltage bus toward the transformer. When voltages in the system are such that power would flow toward the low voltage bus from the transformer, it will close automatically. Network protectors are normally equipped with relays which operate for faults in the network transformer or high voltage feeder only. The network is often operated on the assumption that network failure will "burn" open. Network protectors without supplementary protection do not meet the requirements of the NEC for overcurrent, ground fault, or short circuit protection. Protection of the network or collector bus may be added by providing sensing devices, including ground fault detection, with tripping of the network protectors. The most common use of the network protector, however, has been by utilities in vaults where failure of the network devices could cause damage limited to the vault. High integrity design involving wide phase separation and the use of "catastrophe" fusing minimize the danger and extent of a network failure. A conventional circuit breaker with time overcurrent and instantaneous trip devices plus network relays can meet the NEC requirements. However, the full reliability of the network may be compromised since selectivity between these devices is difficult to obtain. Under normal operating conditions, the total load connected to the bus is shared equally by the transformers. Should a fault occur in a transformer or on a primary feeder, the network protector associated with the faulted transformer or feeder will open on reverse power flow to isolate the fault from the low voltage bus. The remaining transformer or transformers in the substation will continue to carry the load and there will be no interruption of service to the loads, except for a voltage dip during the time that it takes for the protective equipment to operate. If only two transformers are used in a spot network substation, each transformer must be capable of carrying the total load served from the low voltage bus. The amount of spare transformer capacity in the substation can be reduced by using a primary selective switching arrangement with each transformer, or by using three or more transformers. If the primary selective switching arrangement is used, the total load can be about 160 percent of the nameplate rating of one of the transformers. This produces an overload on one transformer until such time as the remaining transformer can be switched to the other feeder in the case of a primary feeder fault. The interrupting duty imposed on the low voltage protective devices in a spot network substation is higher than in radial, primary selective, or secondary selective substations having the same load capability because of the spare transformer capacity required in the spot network substation and because the transformers are operated in parallel.

Technical 21

General Technical & Application Info.

Figure 9. Primary Selective Secondary Network System

Figure 8. Secondary Network System

The spare transformer capacity, the network protectors, and the higher interrupting duty will make the secondary network arrangement much more expensive than the other arrangements. At the same time, these elements make the reliability of the network system greater than for the other system configurations. The secondary network may also take the form shown in Figure 8. In this arrangement there is only one transformer in each secondary substation, and the substations are interconnected by normally closed low voltage tie circuits. The tie circuits permit interchange of power between substations to accommodate unequal loading on the substations and to provide multiple paths of power flow to the various load buses. In

normal operation, the substations are about equally loaded and the current flowing in the tie circuits is relatively small. However, if a network protector opens to isolate a transformer on a primary feeder fault, the load on the associated bus is then carried by the adjacent network units and is supplied over the tie circuits. This arrangement provides for continuous power supply to all low voltage load buses, even though a primary feeder circuit or a transformer is taken out of service. In the network arrangement in Figure 9, if there were three incoming primary feeder circuits and three transformers, the combined capacity of two of the transformers should be sufficient to carry the entire load on the three substations on the basis that only one feeder is out of service at one time. Generally, these transformers would all have the same ratings. With this arrangement, as with the spot network arrangement, a reduction in spare transformer capacity can be achieved, if a primary selective switching arrangement is used at each substation transformer. However, if three or more primary feeder circuits are available, the reduction in transformer capacity achieved through the use of a primary selective arrangement may be small. Cable ties or busway ties, as shown in Figures 8 and 9, will require careful consideration of load distribution during contingencies and of the safety aspects with regard to backfeeds. Key or other mechanical interlocking of switches or circuit breakers may be essential.

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

417

General Technical and Application Information

Ground Fault Protection

21

General Technical & Application Info. The term "low magnitude" arcing ground fault is a deceptive description of this type fault. What is meant by this is that the fault current magnitude is low compared to that of a bolted fault. Even so, the arc energy released at the point of the fault can cause much damage and may result in a fire. A ground fault is an insulation failure between an energized conductor and ground. A phase-to-ground arcing fault, unlike a phase-to-phase bolted fault, is a high-impedance type fault. The factors that contribute to this high impedance are the resistance of the arc and the impedance of the return path. This return path is usually metal conduit, raceway, busway housing or switchboard frames. Another contributing factor is the spasmodic nature of the arc. The circuit breaker or fuse protecting the circuit detects the fault current, but the actual ground fault current magnitude is ever changing due to arc elongating blowout effects, self-clearing attempts and arc reignition. These current limiting effects make the circuit breaker or fuse incapable of detecting the actual damage that is occurring. This is not to imply that these devices are inadequate. The problem is one of system protection because the circuit breaker must be adjusted (or fuse size selected) so as to hold without tripping under momentary overload conditions, such as motor starting current or transformer inrush current. Therefore, the circuit breaker or fuse cannot open quickly enough under relatively low magnitude faults to limit the arcing damage. Figure 10 illustrates the basic problem. Shown is a typical distribution system with a 1600 ampere main service entrance unit with a circuit breaker (single line "a") or fused service protector (single line "b"). A ground fault of 1500 amperes on the bus would affect but would not open either device. A 4000 ampere ground fault would be cleared in approximately 35 seconds by the circuit breaker and in 230 seconds by the fuse. To allow a fault of this magnitude to persist for this length of time would create more than 92,000 kW seconds of arc energy. As a result of tests made, it has been determined that an arc with a value of 1050 kW seconds of energy would vaporize about 1.0 cubic in. of copper or 2.5 cubic in. of aluminum. Obviously a fault of the magnitude shown in Figure 10 could cause a considerable amount of damage. The nature of low-level arcing ground faults makes impractical their detection

Technical

Figure 10. Ground Fault Protection

by a traditional overcurrent devices. To complete total protection of the system against all possible types of faults, other means are utilized to detect ground fault currents, including: ½ Zero sequence method ½ Source ground current (or ground return) method ½ Residual connection method Zero Sequence Method This is commonly used when ground fault protection is provided for equipment employing electromechanical trip devices. The scheme uses a core balance type current transformer (ground sensor) which encircles all phase conductors (and neutral on four wire system) to detect ground faults. The operation of this system is such that under normal operating conditions (eg., no ground fault on the system) there is

no output from the ground sensor to the tripping relay because the vector sum of all the currents through the sensor window is zero. (Ia + lb + Ic + In = 0) If a ground fault occurs on the system, there is now an additional current (Ig) seen by ground sensor which returns to the source by a path other than through the sensor window. The sensor now sees an unbalance caused by Ig and operates the ground relay which trips the circuit protector. (Ia + lb + lc + In = Ig) The ground sensor is located downstream from the point at which the system is grounded and can be mounted either on the line side or load side of the main disconnect device. This method can be used on incoming main disconnect or on feeders.

418

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

General Technical and Application Information

Ground Fault Protection

Source Ground Current (or Ground Return) Method This method of detecting the ground fault current Ig locates the ground sensor on the neutral connection to ground at the service entrance. This means that the ground sensor only detects ground fault current. This type of detection has some limitations because it is detecting the ground fault return current. On multiple source systems with multiple connections to ground, this ground fault current can return by more than one path, therefore, some sensitivity in detecting these faults would be lost. Residual Connection Method Current sensors, one on each of the phase conductors and on the neutral conductors, are connected in common. This common (or residual connection) measures the vector summation of the phase currents and the neutral current. Under normal conditions, this vector summation will be zero, and no current will be applied to the ground relay. If a fault involving ground occurs, the current summation is not equal to zero. Current flows into common connection which is applied to the relay. This method of detecting ground fault current is used in circuit breakers with electronic trip device.

Technical 21

General Technical & Application Info.

Figure 11. Schematic for Zero Sequence

Figure 12. Schematic for Source Ground Current

GFS = Ground Fault Sensor GFP = Ground Fault Protection (Relay or Trip Unit)

Residual Ground Current Sensing

3-Wire System This system is used with electronic trip units, and always includes three current sensors mounted on the circuit breaker. A trip element is connected in series with each sensor to provide phase overcurrent protection. By adding a ground trip element in the residual (neutral) circuit of the three current sensors, it will sense ground fault current only, and not load current. This permits more sensitive settings to protect against low magnitude ground faults. This scheme is shown in Figure 14. Under normal conditions, the vector sum of the current in all of the phases equals zero. No current would flow in the GND element, which is also true under the condition of a phase-to-phase fault. A phase-to-ground fault would cause a current to flow in the GND trip element. If the magnitude of this current exceeds the pickup setting for the required time, the trip unit will operate to trip the breaker.

Figure 13. Schematic for Residual Method

Figure 14. Schematic for Ground Protection on 3-Wire Systems, Residual Sensing

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

419

General Technical and Application Information

Ground Fault Protection

21

General Technical & Application Info. 4-Wire System To avoid false tripping, a fourth current sensor is connected in the neutral conductor to sense normal neutral current. This fourth sensor is connected so that it cancels the normal neutral current which is developed in the residual circuit as shown in Figure 15. Under normal conditions, the vector sum of the current in all phases equals the neutral current. Disregarding the effects of the neutral sensor connection, the neutral current would flow through the GND element. Since this is normal neutral current, pickup of the GND element is not desired. Therefore, the neutral sensor is added to sense the same neutral current as the GND sensor -- but opposite in polarity. The result is a circulating current between the phase sensing current sensors and the neutral sensor, with no current flowing through the GND sensor. This is similar to a differential relay circuit. When a phase-to-ground fault occurs, the vector sum of the phase currents will no longer equal the neutral current because the ground fault current

Technical

Figure 15. Schematic for Ground Protection on 4-Wire Systems, Residual Sensing

returns via the ground bus and bypasses the neutral. If the magnitude of the phase-to-ground current exceeds the

pickup setting of the GND element for the required time, the trip unit will operate to open the breaker.

Types Of Coordinated Ground Fault Tripping Systems

There are two types of Coordinated Ground Fault Systems: ½ Time / Current Selective ½ Zone Selective (Zone Interlock) Time / Current Selective In this system the time / current characteristics of the Ground Fault Protection (GFP) devices used with each disconnect are coordinated so that the nearest disconnect supplying the ground fault location will open. Any upstream disconnects remain closed and continue to supply the remaining load current. Each set of GFP devices should have a specified timecurrent operating characteristic. When disconnects are connected in series, each downstream device should use a time-current setting that will cause it to open and clear the circuit before any upstream disconnect tripping mechanism is actuated. The time-current bands of disconnects in series must not overlap and must be separated from each other sufficiently to allow for the clearing time of each disconnecting means used. The time / current selective system is recommended for applications where damage levels associated with the time / current settings used are tolerable. This type of system does not require interlocking wiring between the GFP devices associated with main feeder and branch disconnecting devices. Figure 16, on the next page, illustrates time / current selective coordination in a system involving a 4000 ampere main circuit breaker and a 1600 ampere feeder circuit breaker in an incoming service switchboard. These feed a distribution switchboard with a 600 ampere subfeeder to a 100 ampere branch breaker. The system is coordinated so that only the circuit breaker nearest the location of the ground fault trips. Zone Selective (Zone Interlock) In this system each disconnecting means should open as quickly as possible when a ground fault occurs in the zone where this disconnect is the nearest supply source. The GFP device for an upstream disconnecting means should have at least two modes of operation. If a ground fault occurs between it and the nearest downstream disconnect, it should operate in its fast tripping mode. When a ground fault occurs beyond the downstream disconnect, the downstream GFP device should open in its fast tripping mode and simultaneously send a restraining signal to the upstream device and transfer that device to a timedelay tripping mode. The upstream time-delay tripping characteristic selected should be such that the downstream disconnect will open and clear the circuit before the upstream disconnect tripping mechanism is actuated. The time-current characteristic of the upstream device should be such as to offer backup protection in the event of malfunction of the downstream equipment. Alternatively, a restraining signal from a downstream device may be used to prevent the tripping of an upstream disconnect on ground fault instead of causing it to operate in the time-delay tripping mode. This may be done where backup protection is less important than continuity of service to critical loads supplied by the upstream unit. There are very few instances in which this is justified, and a careful study of the entire system should be made before using this type of interlocking. For a zone selective system, the timecurrent bands of disconnects in series, although used only for backup protection, should not overlap and should be separate from each other sufficiently to allow for the opening time of each disconnecting means used.

420

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

General Technical and Application Information

Ground Fault Protection

Time/Current Selective Ground Coordination

Technical 21

General Technical & Application Info.

Figure 17. Zone Interlocking Scheme

Figure 16. Fully Coordinated Multizone GFP System

The zone selective or zone interlock system provides fast tripping of the nearest disconnect upstream of the ground fault. The damage level is the lowest that is possible because the ground fault is cleared as quickly as the protective equipment can respond and the disconnect can open. Additional interlocking wiring and circuity for sending and receiving the restraining signals are required.

The zone selective or zone interlock scheme is for those few special applications where exceptionally fast tripping is necessary for all feeders throughout the entire system to reduce damage. Note that although the relay time can be reduced appreciably, the circuit breaker mechanism and arcing time (plus safety margin) will still be present.

Zone Selective Operation (Figure 17): a) Relay-1 will sense a ground fault at A when it exceeds 10 amperes. It will instantly initiate tripping of the Branch breaker and send restraining signals (transfer from instantaneous operation to time-delayed operation) to Relay-2 and Relay-3 (Relay-2 and Relay-3 will then back up Relay-1 on a time coordinated basis). Relay-4 will be restrained by Relay-2 if ground fault exceeds 100 amperes. b) Relay-2 will sense a ground fault at B when it exceeds 100 amperes. It will instantly initiate tripping of the Sub-Feeder breaker and send restraining signals to Relay-3 and Relay-4. c) Relay-3 will sense a ground fault at C when it exceeds 400 amperes. It will instantly initiate tripping of the Feeder breaker and send a restraining signal to Relay-4. d) Relay-4 will sense a ground fault at D when it exceeds 800 amperes. It will instantly initiate tripping of the Main breaker. Table 21.1

Typical Ampere Setting Restrained Time Delay

800 400 100 10

0.4 SEC. 0.3 SEC. 0.2 SEC. 0.1 SEC.

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

421

General Technical and Application Information

Ground Fault Protection

21 Typical Application Diagrams

Figures 18 through 23 on this and the facing page show the basic methods of applying ground fault protection (GFP). Other types of distribution systems will require variations of these methods to satisfy other system conditions. These diagrams show circuit breakers as the disconnects. Any disconnecting Table 21.2

Ground Fault Protection On Main Disconnect Only

Technical

and ground return sensors provide protection only on the load side of associated disconnects. If a vector summation method is used and its sensors are located on load side of a disconnect, the zone between a source and actual sensor location becomes the responsibility of the next upstream protective device.

means can be utilized, providing it is suitable for use with a ground fault protection system as indicated in the scope of this application guide. The examples do not show protection against a ground fault on the supply side of the main disconnect. Sensing device and disconnect locations define zones of protection. Source side

General Technical & Application Info.

Recommendations for Figures 18-23

Figure Sensing Method Additional Ground Points Recommended Use Selectivity

18 19

Vector Summation Ground Return Main and Feeders­ Vector Summation Main ­ Ground Return Feeders ­ Vector Summation Main and feeders 1-3 ­ Vector Summation MCC branch feeder A ­ Zero Sequence

Must not be downstream. May be upstream None Must not be downstream of main ground fault sensor. May be upstream. None

Minimum protection only per Section 230-95 for the National Electric Code

Limited selectivity depends on location of fault and rating of overcurrent devices on the upstream side of fault. Main will allow feeder to trip for faults downstream of feeder sensors, but main will trip if feeder fails to operate.

On Main and Feeder Disconnects

20 21

Improved service continuity is required

On Main, Feeder, and Selected Branch Disconnects with Zone Selective Interlocking

22

Must not be downstream of main ground fault sensor. May be upstream.

Improved service continuity and minimum arcing fault damage are required and protection is needed on branch circuits.

Main and feeder 1-3 will provide delayed backup protection if fault is downstream of MCC branch feeder A. Main will provide delayed backup protection if fault is downstream of sensors for feeders 1-3. Main will trip on fastest curve if fault is upstream of sensors for feeders 1-3. When operating with tie disconnect open, main will provide delayed backup protection if fault is downstream from feeder sensors. When operating with the tie disconnect closed, the tie will trip before the main, thus sectionalizing the bus.

Double-Ended System with Protection on Main and On Tie and Feeder Disconnects

23

Main and Tie ­ Ground Return Feeders ­ Vector Summation

None

Double-ended systems with ground fault protection on tie disconnect where maximum continuity of service is essential.

Ground Fault Protection on Main Disconnects Only

Figure 18

Figure 19

422

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

General Technical and Application Information

Ground Fault Protection

Ground Fault Protection on Main and Feeder Disconnects

Technical 21

General Technical & Application Info.

Figure 20

Figure 21

Ground Fault Protection on Main, Feeder and Selected Branch Disconnects with Zone Selective Interlocking

Double-Ended System with Ground Fault Protection on Main and on Tie and Feeder Disconnects

Note: Interlocking Supplementary interlocking is required but will vary depending on equipment used.

Figure 22

Figure 23

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

423

General Technical and Application Information

System Analysis

21

General Technical & Application Info. Table 21.4

Description Single-Line Diagram

Technical

Result Mixed loads ­ including 200 HP of induction motors on each feeder. Each feeder ­ 100 ft. of 3-500 kcmil copper in steel conduit (per NEC Table 9, Z = 0.050 ohms/1000 ft.

Calculating Symmetrical Short-Circuit Currents

Reference to Table 21.3 None

Z = 5.75%

1. Select 1500 kVA as kVAbase 2. Utility supply per unit impedance 3. Transformer per unit impedance 4. Motor feedback per unit contribution 5. Cable per unit impedance

1.a 3.b 2.c

kVAbase

=

kVAbase kVAsc Z% 100

1500 1500 (250mVA x 1000)

Zpu = Zpu =

= =

5.75% 100

=

0.006pu

=

0.0575pu

5.a, 3.b 2.d

Zpu = Zpu =

kVAbase (4 x motor kVA) (Zohms) (kVAbase) (1000) (kV)2

= =

(

1500 4 x (1.0 x 200)

100 1000

= =

1.875pu 0.0326pu

x 0.050) (1500) (1000) (0.48)2

6. Impedance Diagram

6

7. For fault at location 1 (main bus), simplify impedance diagram.

7.a - Series impedance 7.b - Parallel impedances

( 1 0.0635 8. Isc (rms symmetrical amperes) (Note that fault duty for main breaker is lower, as the main breaker sees only the main contribution from the transformer) 9. For fault at location 2 (load terminals of feeder 4), simplify impedance diagram. 7.a - Series impedance 7.b - Parallel impedances ( 1 .0.0635 10. Isc (rms symmetrical amperes) 8.a

ISC =

+

4 0.9076

=

1 ) .0560

1500 (0.0560) ( 3) (0.48) 1500 (0.0635) ( 3) (0.48)

8.a

ISC =

(kVAbase) (Zpu) ( 3) (kV) (kVAbase) (Zpu) ( 3) (kV)

=

= 32,219A (main bus)

ISC =

=

= 28,413A (main breaker)

+

3 1.9076

=

1 ) 0.0577

1500 (0.0577) ( 3) (0.48)

(kVAbase) (Zpu) ( 3) (kV)

=

=

31,270A

428

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

General Technical and Application Information

Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Technology

Fuseless Current Limiting Circuit Breakers The technology of Siemens Sentron® fuseless current limiting circuit breakers was developed to meet the demands of modern distribution systems. It is not uncommon for today's systems to have prospective short circuit currents approaching 200,000 amperes. Users demanded the protection and flexibility afforded by circuit breakers, without the nuisance and expense of fuse replacement. Underwriters Laboratories, in UL4892.4A, defines a fuseless current limiting circuit breaker as one that "does not employ a fusible element, and that when operating within its current-limiting range, limits the let-through l2t to a value less than the l2t of a half-cycle wave of the symmetrical prospective current." l2t is an expression which allows comparison of the energy available as a result of fault current flow. As used in current limiting discussions, l 2t refers to the energy released between the initiation of the fault current and the clearing of the circuit. Figure 26 relates the "prospective l2t" to the energy allowed by a Sentron current limiting circuit breaker, or "let-through l2t". The upper curve represents the maximum I2 the circuit can produce, unaltered by the presence of any protective device. The lower curve illustrates the reduction in energy allowed when Sentron current limiting circuit breakers are used.

Technical

The Sentron circuit breakers use the "blow-apart" contact principle to accomplish current limitation. This principle is based on the electro-magnetic repulsion of adjacent conductors which carry current in opposite directions. The contact arms are arranged to create opposing magnetic fields. As fault current rises, magnetic repulsion forces the contacts to separate completely. The higher the fault current, the faster this "blowapart" action occurs. As figure 27 illustrates, the energy letthrough with the current limiting Sentron circuit breaker is decreased significantly. This provides better protection for downstream equipment, and reduces damage. Applications and Ratings Sentron current limiting circuit breakers are designed for use in load centers, power panelboards, distribution switchboards, secondary unit substations, and all types of individual enclosures where the available fault currents exceed the interrupting ratings of heavy duty and extra-heavy duty molded case circuit breakers. Sentron circuit breakers have ratings of 15 through 1600 amperes, 240 through 600 volts AC, with up to 200,000 symmetrical amperes interrupting rating.

21

General Technical & Application Info.

Figure 26. Reduction of l t Let-Through with Current-Limiting Technology

2

Figure 27. Current Limitation

Figure 27 illustrates how the Sentron circuit breaker limits the energy under fault conditions. The upper curve illustrates the first half-cycle wave of prospective fault current. To qualify as truly current limiting, the circuit breaker must prevent the current value from reaching the maximum value that it would reach if the circuit breaker were not connected in the circuit.

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

429

General Technical and Application Information

Series-Connected Combination Ratings

21

General Technical & Application Info. Series-Connected Rating A series-connected rating can be assigned to a combination of components -- typically circuit breakers -- which has been tested in combination to a higher interrupting rating than that of the lowest rated protective device of the combination. These ratings must be substantiated by extensive UL testing. General Article 110-9 of the 1993 National Electric Code states the following: "Equipment intended to break current at fault levels shall have an interrupting rating sufficient for the nominal circuit voltage and the current that is available at the line terminals of the equipment. Equipment intended to break current at other than fault levels shall have an interrupting rating at nominal circuit voltage sufficient for the current that must be interrupted." The difference between the phrases "at fault levels" and "at other than fault levels" is the part of the Code which makes series-connected systems possible. For example, the traditional method of satisfying the Code was to select each breaker in the series with an interrupting rating equal to or greater than the prospective fault current. The interrupting rating of a circuit breaker -- stated in RMS symmetrical amperes -- is the amount of short circuit current the device can safely interrupt and continue to function as a circuit breaker. Thus, if the prospective fault current at the line terminals of a panelboard is 100,000A RMS symmetrical, this traditional method would require that all the circuit breakers within the panelboard be rated at 100,000A RMS symmetrical or greater interrupting capacity. This is illustrated in Figure 28. In the traditional system, both the main and the feeder breaker are subjected to several short circuit peaks. In a series-connected system, however, the individual components (or circuit breakers) have already been tested in series and the combination has been given an interrupting rating equal to or greater than various prospective fault currents which are available. The combination, therefore, acts as a single entity, and performs the same protective function as individual circuit breakers in the traditional method. The difference is that combinations in series-connected systems contain devices with lower interrupting ratings. Siemens circuit breakers used in series combinations which have passed extensive tests required by Underwriters Laboratories are listed in the UL Recognized Component Directory according to manufacturer's name and type. The listing means that such circuit breakers are UL Recognized for the series interrupting ratings as noted in the Directory, and that they can be used as an entity to meet Article 110-9 of the NEC. Using the previous example, if the prospective fault current at the line terminals of the panelboard is 100,000 amperes RMS symmetrical, the seriesconnected method would involve selecting a specific combination from the UL Recognized Component Directory with a rating of 100,000 amperes RMS symmetrical or greater interrupting capacity. That combination might include individual components which have lower individual interrupting ratings than 100,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. However, all the components in the combination have been tested together and form an entity that will safety interrupt the prospective fault current of the particular situation being examined as long as the interrupting rating listed matches the prospective fault current.

Technical

With the advent of fuseless current limiting circuit breakers such as Sentron, another important development in seriesconnected combinations has emerged. Because of the fuseless current limiting circuit breaker's extremely fast interrupting capability, this device provides more control over high prospective fault currents than traditional series-connected systems. The concept behind using fuseless current limiting circuit breakers as a component in a series-connected system is twofold: (1) higher interrupting ratings, and (2) increased control over peak current (ip) and energy let-through (I2t). For example, a current limiting circuit breaker is placed at the side closest to the source of power and rated according to the prospective fault current available at the line-side terminals. In effect, doing this places a "shroud of protection" over the downstream components. Because of the inherent high interrupting capability of the current limiting circuit breaker, the breaker itself meets or exceeds the prospective short circuit current. Because of its current limiting action the prospective I2t never reaches downstream components. This is illustrated in Figure 29. It is important to recognize that the current limiting circuit breaker be an individual component in a UL tested combination, and that it is the combination itself -- current limiting circuit breaker plus other circuit breakers -- that forms entity specified in day-to-day applications. For specific series-connected combinations that have met UL requirements and are listed in the UL Recognized Component Directory, check with your local Siemens sales office listed on the back cover. Since the Directory is updated every six months, please check for additional combinations which may have been tested and approved.

Figure 28 -- Without Current Limiting

Figure 29 -- Series-Connected Protective Scheme With Current Limiting Main Circuit Breaker

430

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

CSI Section 16470

General Technical and Application Information

Harmonics / K-factor Ratings

Non-Linear Loads When a sinusoidal voltage is applied to a linear load, the resultant current waveform takes on the shape of a sine wave as well. Typical linear loads are resistive heating and induction motors. In contrast, a non-linear load either: ½ Draws current during only part of the cycle and acts as an open circuit for the balance of the cycle, or ½ Changes the impedance during the cycle, hence the resultant waveform is distorted and no longer conforms to a pure sine wave shape. In recent years, the use of electronic equipment has mushroomed in both offices and industrial plants. These electronic devices are powered by switching power supplies or some type of rectifier circuit. Examples of these devices used in offices are: computers, fax machines, copiers, printers, cash registers, UPS systems, and solid-state ballasts. In industrial plants, one will find other electronic devices such as variable speed drives, HID lighting, solid-state starters and solidstate instruments. They all contribute to the distortion of the current waveform and the generation of harmonics. As the use of electronic equipment increases and it makes up a larger portion of the electrical load, many concerns are raised about its impact on the electrical power supply system. Harmonics As defined by ANSI / IEEE Std. 519-1992, harmonic components are represented by a periodic wave or quantity having a frequency that is an integral multiple of the fundamental frequency. Harmonics are voltages or currents at frequencies that are integer multiples of the fundamental (60 Hz) frequency: 120 Hz, 180 Hz, 240 Hz, 300 Hz, etc. Harmonics are designated by their harmonic number, or multiple of the fundamental frequency. Thus, a harmonic with a frequency of 180 Hz (three times the 60 Hz fundamental frequency) is called the 3rd harmonic. Harmonics superimpose themselves on the fundamental waveform, distorting it and changing its magnitude. For instance, when a sine wave voltage source is applied to a non-linear load connected from a phase-leg to neutral on a 3-phase, 4-wire branch circuit, the load itself will draw a current wave made up of the 60 Hz fundamental frequency of the voltage source, plus 3rd and higher order odd harmonic (multiples of the 60 Hz fundamental frequency), which are all CSI Section 16470

Voltage of Current Waveform for Linear Loads (Sine Wave)

Technical 21

General Technical & Application Info.

Typical Current Waveform of Switching Power Supply

A Non-Linear Current and Its Fundamental, Plus 3rd and 5th Harmonic Components

Figure 30 -- Effect of Harmonics on Current Waveform

generated by the non-linear load. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) is calculated as the square root of the sum of the squares of all harmonics divided by the normal 60 Hz value.

THD=

( (( ( ( ( ( (

IRMS 60 HZ

2

IRMS

2

180 HZ

IRMS N

2

IRMS 60 HZ

2

Therefore, it is the percentage amount of odd harmonics (3rd, 5th, 7th ,..., 25th,...) present in the load which can affect the transformer, and this condition is called a "Non-Linear Load" or "Non-Sinusoidal Load". To determine what amount of harmonic content is present, a K-Factor calculation is made instead of using the THD formula. The total amount of harmonics will determine the percentage of non-linear load, which can be specified with the appropriate K-Factor rating.

This yields an RMS value of distortion as a percentage of the fundamental 60 Hz waveform.

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

431

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

Product Selection Guide

ACCESSTM Electrical Distribution Communications

General Connectivity Diagram Software Hardware Field Level Devices Guide Form Specifications Power Monitoring and Control System Field Level Devices 5 6 8 10 12

Index

75 76 77 79 80 81 84 87 88 89 91 93 95 96 Unit Space for Disconnect Devices Through-Bus Fed Bussed/Non-Bussed Pull Sections Distribution Sections-- Type SB3 Only ETI Circuit Breakers Vacu-Break Switches Full Voltage, Non-Rev. Starters Type RCIII Individually Mounted Breakers Breaker Arrangement and Layout Low Voltage Power Breakers SB Encased Systems Breakers Vacu-Break Switches Bolted Pressure Switches Tie Breaker Section and Power Circuit Breakers Bolted Pressure Switches Service Entrance Busway Application Ground Fault Protection Automatic Throwover System Some Things To Consider Guide Form Specifications 128 129 129

Secondary Unit Substations

General Incoming Line Section General Technical Dimensions Transformer Section General Liquid Filled Dry Type Cast Coil Testing and Accessories Transformer Technical Data Dimensions Transition Section Secondary Distribution Section Guide Form Specifications

130 130 130 131 132 133 133 134 134 135 135 136 137 138 139 140

16 17

Medium Voltage Switchgear -- 38kV

General Construction Details Vacuum Circuit Breakers Ratings Enclosure Dimensions Floor Plans Side Views Guide Form Specifications 19 20 23 24 25 26 27 28

SentronTM Switchboards

General 99 Types SB1, SB2, SB3, and RCIII 100 Service Sections 101 Main Disconnect Option 101 Front-Connected Construction-- Types SBI, SB2, and SB3 102 Rear Connected Construction-- Type RCIII 104 Distribution Feeder Section 105 Type SB Encased Systems Breakers105 Low Voltage Power Breaker 105 Modifications and Accessories Metering 107 Motor Control 108 Low Voltage Power Breakers 108 SB Encased Systems Breakers 109 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 110 Vacu-Break Fusible Switches 110 Bolted Pressure Switches 110 HCP Fusible Switch 110 Interrupting Ratings of Disconnect Devices 111 Pressure Wire Connectors 114 Standard C.T. Compartments 115 Utility Metering-- Types SB1, SB2, SB3 116 Service Sections & Dimensions 400-2000A Utility Metering and Multi-Main 120 Utility Metering and Single Main 121 Non-Utility Type With or Without Customer Metering and Main 123 Combination Sections Molded Case Circuit Breaker Main124 Vacu-Break Main 125 HCP Switch Main 126 Bolted Pressure Switch, Main 126 Distribution Sections-- Types SB1, SB2, SB3 and RCIII Main Lug Only -- 400A-2000A 127

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

Medium Voltage Switchgear-- 5 through 15kV

General Construction Details Vacuum Circuit Breakers ISGS Relay, Access System Type GMI Vacuum Circuit Breakers Ratings Enclosure Dimensions Floor Plans Side Views Guide Form Specifications 31 33 35 37 38 43 44 45 46 47

Commercial Metering Switchboards

Type SMM / SMD-- EUSERC Utility Areas Type MMS Meter Sections--SMM / SMD Meter Sections--MMS Disconnect Ratings Dimensions--Type SMM / SMD Circuit Breaker Main Vacu-Break and HCP Main Bolted Pressure Switch Main Meter Sections Dimensions­Type MMS Circuit Breaker Sections Vacu-Break Sections Auxiliary Sections-- SMM / SMD, MMS Guide Form Specifications Type SMM / SMD Type MMS 145 145 146 146 148 149 149 150 150 151 151 152 153 154

480V Metal-Enclosed Switchgear

General Construction Details LV Power Circuit Breakers Breaker Accessories Static Trip Ill Trip Unit RL Breaker and Accessories VT, CPT, CT Data RL and RLF Breaker Ratings Static Trip III Time Curve Weights and Dimensions Breaker Elements Auxiliary / Breaker Sections Floor Plans, Side Views Guide Form Specifications 50 51 54 56 57 59 60 62 63 64 65 67

SentronTM Panelboards

General 155 Features 156 Ratings 157 Modifications 158 Lighting and Distribution Types S1 and S2 Main Lugs and Main Breakers 159 Types S1 and S2 Branch Breakers 161 Types S1 and S2 Column Widths 162 Telephone Cabinets 162 Type SE Main Lug and Main Breakers 163

Power Switching Centers

General Switch Components Ratings Non-UL / ANSI Standards UL and ANSI Units Guide Form Specifications 438 69 70 71 72 73 74

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

Product Selection Guide

SentronTM Panelboards, cont'd

Types SE Alternate Main, Subfeed and Branch Breakers 164 Types S3 Main lug and Main Breakers 165 Types S3 Box Selection 166 Power and Distribution Type S4 and S5 Main lugs and Main Breakers 167 Types S4 and S5 Alternate Main, Branch Breakers and Lugs 168 Types F1 and F2 Main lugs, Breakers, and Enclosures 169 Types F1 and F2 Branch Switches and Fuses 170 Lug Data and Bussing Sequence 171 Motor Starters 171 Guide Form Specifications­ Panelboards 172 Transient Protection System (TPS) 174 Integrated Surge Protective Devices175 Guide Form Specifications­TVSS 176 Temperature Rise Curves­ Copper (Flat vs. Edgewise) Voltage Drop Tables­Aluminum Voltage Drop Tables­Copper Straight Sections Plug-in Openings Cross Sections Dimensions Elbows and Tees Offsets and Crosses Cable Tap Boxes Switchboard Connections Transformer Tap Sections Expansion Sections Wall Flanges and End Closures Bus Plugs Cubicles and Reducers Guide Form Specifications XJ-L Busway System General Straight Sections and Isolated Ground Elbows Tap Boxes Outlet Covers, Flanges, Hangers and End Closures Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs Fusible Bus Plugs Guide Form Specifications 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224

Index

Dimensions and Weights Typical Floor Plan Details 252 Typical Layout Arrangements 254 Standard Controller Components 256 Guide Form Specifications Medium Voltage Controller 258 Siemens Advanced Motor Master System - SAMMS-MV 259

Motor Control Centers

General­Model 95 Plus Construction Details Siemens Advanced Motor Master System - SAMMS-LV General Functions Time Current Curves Motor Starter Units Feeder Tap Units / Modifications Other Modifications Circuit Breaker Ratings and Dimensions Starter Ratings and Dimensions Incoming Cable Space Standard Conduit Space Dimensions Wiring Classifications Model 95 Plus Specifications Guide Form Specifications SAMMS-LV Specifications 261 262

265 266 267 269 270 271 272 273 275 276 277 278 278 280

Busway Systems

National Electric Code 177 Sentron Busway System General 178 Characteristics 180 Ground Resistance and Capacity 180 Straight Sections,Plug-in Options 181 Feeder and Plug-in Widths / Weights 182 Elbows, Tees, and Offsets 183 End Tap Boxes 184 Cable Tap Boxes 185 Service Heads and Stubs 186 Switchboard, Switchgear, MCC Stubs 187 Flanged End Cutout and Drilling Pattern 188 Expansion Fittings and Reducers 189 Roof, Ceiling, Wall and Floor Flanges 190 Hangers 191 Plug-In Units 192 Bus Plugs 193 Cubicles 194 Panelboard and Meter Center Modules 194 Guide Form Specifications 195 XL-U Busway System General 196 Component Check List 197 Temperature Rise Curves­ Aluminum 199 Temperature Rise Curves­ Copper 200

Transformers

Dry Type 600V Distribution General K-Factor Data Technical Data Guide Form Specifications General Purpose K-Factor Rating Three Phase Padmounted General Construction Details Fuse Protection Switches Surge Arresters Dimensions and Weights Guide Form Specifications 225 225 226 227 228 230 231 234 235 236 237 238

Programmable Controllers

SIMATIC S7 Series SIMATIC S7-400 Series SIMATIC S7-300 Series SIMATIC S7-200 Series SIMATIC Industrial Software SIMATIC 505 SIMATIC S5 Series Application and Design Features 281 282 282 283 283 284

AC Controls

Manual Starters and Switches Class SMF, MMS, and MRS 285 General Features 286 Horsepower Rating 286 Class SMF Heater Elements 286 Flush Mounting Dimensions 287 NEMA 7 & 9 Enclosure Dimensions 288 Wiring Diagrams 288 Manual Motor Starter Protector 289 Manual Motor Starters and Contactors General and Wiring Diagrams 290 Dimensions 291 Magnetic Contactors 292 Lighting and Heating Contactors 293

Medium Voltage Controllers­ Series 81000TM

Construction Details 239 Siemens Advanced Motor Master System - SAMMS-MV 244 Time / Current Characteristic Curves246 Contactors 248 Fuse Application Fuse Selection Guide 249 Motor Acceleration Times 250 Time/Current Characteristic Curves 251

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

439

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

Product Selection Guide

AC Controls, cont'd

Compact Magnetic Contactor Lighting Lighting and Heating Contactor Dimensions Manual Starters and Switches­ Types CLM and CLH Combination Starters (NEMA 0-4) Contactors­Non-Reversing Magnetic Motor Starters Magnetic Contactors­ Dimensions / Wiring Magnetic Contactors­Enclosures Full Voltage, Non-Reversing Starters (NEMA 6-8) Multi-Speed Starters (NEMA 0-4) Reduced Voltage Starters­ Electromechanical Solid State Reduced Voltage Starters Solid-State Starter Dimensions Pilot Device Units / Indicator Lights Enclosed Pilot Device Stations Guide Form Specifications 294 295 296 297 298 299 301 302 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 JXD2 Thru CLD6 Breakers 336 LMD6 Thru CND6 Breakers 337 PD6 Thru HRXD6 Breakers 338 SJD6 Thru SCMD6 S.S. Breakers339 SND6 Thru SHHTD6 S.S. Breakers340 Enclosure Dimensions Type 1 341 Type 3R 342 Types 4, 4X, 7 and 9 343 Types 5, 12, and 12X 344 Knockouts, Neutrals, and Hubs 345 Adjustable ET / ETI Data 346 Motor Circuit Protection 347 Internal Accessories 348 Pressure Wire Connectors 349 Unusual Operating Conditions 350 Capacitor Circuit Conductors 352 Federal Specification Classification 353 Guide Form Specifications 354

Index

Modular Meter Centers General Wiring Diagrams Meter Modules Service Entrance­Breakers Service Entrance­Fusible Sw. Service Entrance­Main Switch Tap Box Module­800A Tap Box Module­1200A, 1600A Underground Pull Box Commercial Meter Modules Meter Modules­125A, 200A Metering Accessories Specialized Circuit Breakers Series Connected Breakers Guide Form Specifications 382 385 385 386 387 388 389 389 390 390 391 392 394 395 397

Other Industrial Products & Services

AC and DC Drives NEMA Motors Above NEMA Motors Voltage Regulators Technical Training 399 408 410 412 413

Enclosed Switches

General and Heavy Duty Mill Duty Features Enclosures Load, HP, and Short Circuit Ratings Horsepower Ratings General and Heavy Duty­240V Heavy Duty­600V Special Applications Mill Duty Dimensions General Duty­240V Heavy Duty­240V Heavy Duty­600V Knockout Diagrams Dimensions Double Throw 6-Pole / Mill Duty Hub, Lug, Fuse, Accessory Data Guide Form Specifications 355 356 357 358 359 360 360 361 362 363 364 365 367 368 369 370

SB Encased Systems

General­1200-5000 Amp Frame Interrupting Ratings IEC 947-2 Ratings Frame Sizes and Rating Accessories and Weights SB-EC Trip Unit Features TL Trip Unit Features SB Accessories SB Breaker Stacking in Switchboards Dimensions 1200 Ampere Frame 2000 Ampere Frame 3200 and 5000 Ampere Frame (Drawout) 3200 and 5000 Ampere Frame (Fixed) Guide Form Specifications 313 314 314 314 314 315 316 317 320 321 322 323 324 325

General Technical and Application Information

Types of Power Distribution Systems Ground Fault Protection Zero Sequence Method Source Ground Method Residual Connection Method Residual Ground Current Sensing Types Of Coordinated Ground Fault Tripping Systems TCC Selective Ground Coordination Typical Application Diagrams NEC Requirements For Ground Fault Protection Overcurrent Protection and Coordination System Analysis Short Circuit Calculation Procedures Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Technology Series-Connected Combination Ratings Harmonics / K-factor Ratings Estimating K-Factor Loads Codes and Standards Full-Load Current - Motors and Transformers Normal Load and Fault Currents­ 3-Phase Transformers Ampacities of Conductors Formulas / Grounding Conductors 415 418 419 419 419 420 421 422 424 425 426 427 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437

Residential and Commercial Products

Standards and Reference EQ Load Centers General Features Dimensions Wiring Diagrams EQ Meter Combinations Features Dimensions Knockouts Single Position Meter Sockets Uni-Pak Metering System General Technical Wiring Diagrams Dimensions 371 372 373 374 374 375 376 376 377 379 380 380 381

Sentron® Molded Case Circuit Breakers

General Overview Sensitrip III Circuit Breaker Sensitrip III Control Functions Internal Accessories Overview Reference Guide Tables MCCB Overview Interrupting Ratings Thermal-Magnetic Load Center and Panelboard Breakers BQ Thru CQD6 Breakers ED2 Thru CFD6 Breakers 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335

440

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems Specification Guide

Information

Siemens Energy & Automation -- Specification Guide

160 pages

Report File (DMCA)

Our content is added by our users. We aim to remove reported files within 1 working day. Please use this link to notify us:

Report this file as copyright or inappropriate

78076